Introduction “ ‘Pictura’s Cornerstone’: Karel van Mander and His Foundation of the Noble, free Art of Painting

In: Karel van Mander and his Foundation of the Noble, Free Art of Painting
Author:
Walter S. Melion
Search for other papers by Walter S. Melion in
Current site
Google Scholar
PubMed
Close
Open Access

Written by Karel van Mander (1548–1606), a celebrated polymath known to his contemporaries as a painter, draftsman, print designer, poet, and art theoretician, the Schilder-Boeck (Book on Picturing) (1604), as its title-page clearly states, consists of six “parts” (deelen), each a book in its own right (Figs. 1 & 2). The titular print describes the overall structure as follows: “The Schilder-Boeck, in which First the foundation of the Noble, Free art of Painting Is Presented in Various parts to Youths desirous of learning; after which in three parts the lives of the renowned, illustrious Painters of ancient and modern times; finally, the commentary on the Metamorphoses of Publius Ovidius Naso, and therebeside the depiction of figures; all of it serviceable and useful to painters, Lovers of art, and poets, as also to all estates of men.”1 The book, as a whole and in its parts, is addressed above all to these three communities of readers, some of whom were multiply representative: the art lover Bartholomeus Ferreris, one of Van Mander’s dedicatees, had once trained with the painters Anthonis Mor, Pieter Jansz. Pourbus, and Frans Pourbus I, and another dedicatee, Melchior Wijntgis, was both a poet and an art patron.2 Printed by Jacob de Meester in Alkmaar and published by Paschier van Wes[t]busch in Haarlem, the 1604 edition is a typographic magnum opus, its constituent elements carefully assembled: comprising more than 368 folios, inclusive of the inserted portrait print of Van Mander (engraved by Jan Saenredam after a lost painting by Hendrick Goltzius), the book displays multiple typefaces (predominantly Textura, Van den Keere, Roman, and Italic), two copper-plate and three letter-press title pages (the former designed by Van Mander and engraved by Jacob Matham), running headlines edited by Van Mander himself as well as catchwords painstakingly selected by De Meester, and a comprehensive index of commonplaces for Book I, the “Foundation” (most of them culled from Van Mander’s marginal glosses), along with indices nominum for Books IIV.3

Although the “Foundation,” “Lives,” “Commentary,” and “Depiction” may initially have been conceived as self-sufficient entities, as some scholars have argued, the Schilder-Boeck, in its published form, has been forged into a compilatory whole, its parts mutually referential and fully concatenated, with Books IIV, the “Foundation” and the three sets of “Lives,” foliated sequentially.4 Books VVI, introduced by a second engraved title page, launch a second sequence of folios, and this indicates that the publisher, though his privilege granted by the States General of the United Provinces describes the Schilder-Boeck as a book in six parts, intended the final two parts to be marketable either paired on their own or together with the other four. Indeed, Books VVI function like appendices to Books IIV, whereas the form, function, and argument of the first four books are more thoroughly unified. They might best be characterized as an intertext consisting of a prefatory poem on the pictorial arts, the Grondt der Edel vry Schilder-const (Foundation of the Noble, free Art of Painting), followed by a sequence of three sets of painters’ lives—first, ancient Greek and Roman masters, then Italian masters of the fourteenth through early seventeenth centuries, and finally, Netherlandish and German masters of the fifteenth through early seventeenth centuries—that variously exemplify the critical categories or, as Van Mander puts it, the “sundry constituent elements” (“verscheyden deelen”) initially discussed in the poem’s fourteen chapters. The “Lives” primarily concern mural or easel painting, with the Northern lives focusing almost exclusively on the latter, while also incorporating numerous digressions on glass-painting and printmaking.

The two further books that close out the Schilder-Boeck are the Wtlegghingh (Commentary), on the fifteen books of Ovid’s Metamorphoses and their protagonists, and Wtbeeldinghe (Depiction), an iconographical lexicon of allegorical figures, in three chapters—the first on the pagan gods, the second on animals and things, the third on abstractions such as Peace, Concord, Fidelity, Friendship, Hazard, Occasion, Favor, and Poetry (personified by the Poet). Van Mander claims in the dedicatory foreword of Book V, the “Commentary,” that he conceived it as a supplement to the Schilder-Boeck, for the purpose of enabling “painter[s] themselves better to comprehend their Ovidian scenes and to expound them for others,” as it were ex post facto.5 In the dedicatory preface of Book VI, the “Depiction,” addressed to his close friend, the painter-poet Cornelis Ketel, he justifies the addition of this final part to the Schilder-Boeck by emphasizing that poets and painters, being “peaceable and reposeful” (“gherust en stil”), are alike predisposed first to ponder inwardly the “considered / imagined mental images” (“d’inbeeldinghen”) which thereafter the “hands, like compliant servitors, must execute and accomplish.”6 The images of the pagan gods described and elucidated in chapter 1 of Book VI are to be appreciated as counterparts to the paintings that once adorned the ancients’ public places, “gladdening their sense of sight.”7 And the hieroglyphic animals and things marshalled in chapters 2 and 3 are conceived as extensions of the kinds of symbolic appurtenance endorsed in chapter 5 of the “Foundation” (henceforth, Grondt), “On Ordonnance and the Invention of Histories.”

1 The Intertextual Network of Dedicatory Epistles and Prefaces

The dedications and prefaces to the six books of the Schilder-Boeck demonstrate how the treatise as a whole constitutes a sort of inter-text, in which the parts must be read side by side, indeed concertedly, if they are to acquire their full significance. Take the dedicatory epistles that inaugurate each book and together build an edifice of comparison between Ancients and Moderns: the men addressed, all of whom are characterized as Maecenates (generous patrons comparable in their generosity to Gaius Maecenas, famed supporter of the poets Horace and Virgil) and liefhebbers (lovers of art), make up an elite community of affluent, knowledgeable viewers, well versed in the visual arts and, in a number of cases, themselves practitioners of art, who confer on schilderconst a social prestige comparable to that which it enjoyed in ancient Greece and Rome. They testify to the existence of a Dutch social network, a nobility of accomplishment, united by a shared love of painting and collecting, and a respect for its foremost exponents—councilor and mintmaster of the States General (Wijntgis),8 notary and secretary to the Fleet of Amsterdam (Jacques Razet),9 painter and banker-pawnbroker (Ferreris),10 beer brewers (Jan Mathijsz. Ban and Cornelis Geritsz. Vlasman, one of whom, Ban, was also a gold- and silversmith),11 schoolmaster, city secretary of Amsterdam, and notary public (Gedeon Fallet),12 and painter and poet (Cornelis Ketel).13 Committed to the cultivation of schilderconst, these men treat love of the higher arts of drawing and painting as a prerogative, and in this respect, they resemble the ancient nobility of blood who likewise privileged these arts above all others. Concomitantly, four of Van Mander’s dedicatees—Razet, Ferreris, Ban, and Vlasman—have amassed superlative painting collections that further bear witness to their devotion to schilderconst and underscore their affinities with the Ancients.

[From the dedication of Book I to Wijntgis:]

For had [the art of Painting] no such noble lovers, she herself and her artful practitioners, without climbing high or being raised in honor, would be reckoned amongst other handiworks and manual laborers, and would perforce remain dishonored and contemned amongst ignorant folk who lack understanding. But good fortune or merciful Occasion commonly ordains in every Century and time that several worthy, upright lovers be attached to our Art and her artful practitioners....Protogenes, Painter of Caunus, had the Egyptian King Demetrius. Pamphilus and Melanthus had Aratus and Tholomeus. Apelles had Alexander, and Zeuxis the Agrigentians. Beyond these ancients, Jan van Eyck had Duke Philip of Charlois; Albrecht Dürer, Charles the Fifth; … Sprangher and Hans von Aachen, the Emperor Rudolph, and we have Melchior, my Maecenas, or better said, Apollo, to whom I altogether dedicate and offer up my slipshod poem, in likeness a mere lambkin.14

[From the dedication of Book II to Razet:]

My statement is confirmed all the more, in that you, noble Sir, love artful works above money and amass them, having much pleasure therein.15

In comparison with many ancient and modern counterparts, Dutch and Flemish liefhebbers, being favorably disposed toward schilderconst, one of the most peaceable of arts, will also be favorably inclined to sponsor the Schilder-Boeck, which pays homage not to the military heroes lionized in olden days but instead to men illustrious for their pictorial deeds executed on panel or canvas.

[To Razet:]

And [my “Lives”] shall be more pleasing than were I to offer him in a learned and more artful style all the ancient, semidivine war heroes, with [their] oath-plighted, four-square battle arrays, forays, and conquests.16

[From the dedication of Book IV to Ban and Vlasman:]

(As I deem) there may well be some or many whom it surprises that I have made such a book, and expended so much effort and care on these matters, which any person perhaps, or certainly, might judge to be too low or trivial: thinking that only men famed for their weaponry and high deeds, were or are worthy of being described by the pen. Yea, that Marius, Silla, Catilina, and other such cruel devourers of men more deserve or ought to be preserved in memory, than our noble, artful, World-adorning spirits of ancient and modern times …. There are others, enough too, who learnedly and carefully promote the description of the years’ times, or the Tragedies of our bloodied Netherlandish Theater, to which [task] I would not be suited.17

The prefatory poem on the etymology of the terms schilder and schildery (painter and painting), printed just before the dedication to Razet, performs a similar function: with reference to ancient soldiers’ shields (schilden) painted with eponymous devices, the anonymous poet contends that less important than the martial instrumentalities of such armaments were their linguistic affordances; in representing its bearer’s identity, to such an extent that the schild was hung up as a trophy, memorial, or epitaph of his past accomplishments, the shield became metonymic of the memorializing and aggrandizing functions of the pictures painted upon them. Hence, the incorporation of schild into schilder (not shield-bearer but painter or picturer) and schildery (not shield-bearing or shield-making but painting or picturing): schild’s warlike connotations are transmuted into the more peaceful ones associated with schilderconst.18

A third point of comparison between Ancients and Moderns has to do with their like concern for mastery over the full range of descriptive subjects and pictorial effects comprised by the imitation of nature. This comparative exercise takes us from the dedicatory texts to the prefaces proper. The “Preface on the foundation of the noble, free art of painting” concludes with a list of ancient subjects and effects that incorporates critical categories such as beauty, mimetic precision, invention, cleverness or wit, and grace, technical categories such as facility, fine coloring, good measure or proportion, skill at copying, and the ability to paint large or small things, facultative categories such as painting after the life what the eyes see and painting from memory, subject categories such as human figures, affects, animals, landscape, fruit and flowers, and, as a subcategory of these subjects, the moral quality of profundity. Van Mander then considers how this list has been assimilated and revived by the Italians and the Netherlanders: the widely diverse representational categories explored by the Ancients are reclassified and compressed, resulting in a new roster more closely resembling the specialized pictorial genres practiced by the generation of Dutch painters active just after (and partially trained by) Van Mander. That he designates these various categories, both ancient and modern, verscheydenheden speaks to his sense of his contemporaries, Netherlanders in particular, as heirs to a system of painting that, even while placing great value on “figures and Histories,” yet acknowledges the collateral value to be found in skilled painting of other kinds of things. In making his case, Van Mander once again transposes from the register of war to that of art; although he initially analogizes painters to bold principes who persuade their troops to fight valorously, he ultimately encourages them to “achieve a singular mastery in our Arts, which he will attain without any danger, battle, or shedding of blood, if earnestly, with constant effort, he but avail himself of magnanimous Nature.”19 The reference to Nature is meant not only to encourage painters to cultivate their natural abilities, their God-given gifts, but also refers to the many things that Nature gives the painter to see and describe. The ideal result would be a painter capable of portraying everything, but since such persons are few and far between, Van Mander counsels the aspiring painter to be pragmatic, to perfect in himself whatever seems capable of perfection:

As Roman Leaders were formerly wont to do, who through artful exhortation could discern from the shaking of their soldiers’ spears how their courage had been awakened and brought to life, so I adjure them to step forth intrepidly and take hold at first of the most special part of the Arts, namely, that they learn how to dispose a Human figure, and finally, that they also embrace all the concomitant parts [of the Arts], or otherwise, if Nature and Spirit are unwilling to permit, some special part, in order to become excellent at it: for it does not happen daily that a single person is empowered to learn, grasp, comprehend everything, or become proficient in all things.

Thus one finds our Art to have proceeded since olden days or Ancient times: that one in one thing, and another in another thing has been an abler and better Master, as one will find in their lives …. One will also find the same varieties (verscheydenheden) amongst contemporary Italians and Netherlanders, here too many to recount: whereby the Young shall be taught to persevere in the Art, to seize that which Nature offers most readily. If not perfection in figures and Histories, so may it be Animals, Kitchens, Fruits, Flowers, Landscapes, Buildings, Perspectives, Cartouches, Grotesques, Night Scenes, Fires, Portraits after the life, Sea Pieces, and Ships, or to paint something else in this wise.20

The term verscheydenheden appears at least twice elsewhere in the Schilder-Boeck: in the “Life of Baccio Bandinelli,” it refers to the “varieties of coloring and marking” (“verscheydenheden van coloreringen en vlecken”) displayed by Baccio in his Leda with Castor and Pollux, painted to rival Michelangelo’s Leda; counterposed to the terms “mixing and tempering” (“vermeninghen en temperinghen”), verscheydenheden implicitly refers to Baccio’s compulsion to show himself as various in his technical abilities, emulous of Michelangelo yet singularly different from him.21 In the “Life of Lucas van Leyden,” the term refers to “varieties of facial types and costumes as per the Old Law/Testament” (“verscheydenheden van tronien en cleedingen na den ouden Wet”), to be seen in the master’s prints, no two of which appear alike as regards faces and apparel (“al meest d’een d’ander niet ghelijckende”). This is why Italian masters make a habit of copying Lucas’s prints, states Van Mander, who then deplores their efforts to conceal their indebtedness to Lucas.22 By contrast, related terms such as verscheydenheyt (variety, rooted in concepts of difference, distinction, diversity) and verscheyden (various, distinct, diverse, sundry) are ubiquitous throughout the Schilder-Boeck, which surely indicates that verscheydenheden derives from them, being the plural of one and the noun adjunct of the other. On this account, Van Mander’s conception of the many “parts” of schilderconst—which the aspiring painter must cultivate, inasmuch as he is able, if he is “fully to avail himself of magnanimous Nature”—can be thought to originate from his embrace of variety as a key principle of art. By rooting the parts of painting in a notion of variety so capacious that it seems to denominate everything visible and paintable, Van Mander declares that he places a premium on the painter’s all-encompassing powers of differentiation. Indeed, the beauty of nature, and therefore the beauty of schilderconst, as he affirms in chapter 5 of the Grondt, “Van der Ordinanty ende Inventy der Historien” (On the Ordonnance and Invention of Histories), comes from variety.23

The Grondt examines all the parts of painting enumerated in the Preface, some passingly, others, such as history, landscape, and animals (as well as affects), to which entire chapters are dedicated, at far greater length. As becomes clear from the mutual relationship of these chapters and their constituent topics, two subject categories—history and landscape—incorporate the greatest variety of describable things; Van Mander appraises their many points of connection and commonalities of theme in chapters 5 and 8, respectively, “On Ordonnance” and “On Landscape.”24 His conviction that the verscheydenheden in toto can potentially be comprised by history and, to the extent that history and landscape are profoundly complementary, also by landscape, perhaps derives from the conception of history he endorses implicitly in the Grondt and explicitly in his posthumous published translation of Ieronimus Benzonius, De historie, van de Nieuwe Weerelt, te weten, de beschrijvinghe van West-Indien (History of the New World, that is, description of the West Indies) (Haarlem: Paschier van Wesbusch, 1610) and his two poems in praise of Haarlem, the first published in 1610, the second earlier, in 1596, known today from an edition of two manuscript transcriptions of these poems, copied from these lost publications.25 Both texts can be characterized loosely as chorographies, an historical genre that chronicles or, better, inventories a region’s noteworthy events by setting them in the larger descriptive context of its topographical features, major edifices, manufactured and commercial goods, networks of trade, and its inhabitants’ appearance, character, customs, and manners of dress. It is under the sign of this type of history, which subsumes narration into a discursive field descriptive in form and function, that the historical genus valorized in the Preface and the historical ordonnance championed in interlinked chapters 5 and 8 of the Grondt can best be understood.

The dedications to Wijntgis, Razet, Ferreris, Ban and Vlasman, Fallet, and Ketel, supplemented by remarks in the prefaces that directly follow, serve to convey a further analogy between Ancients and Moderns: in showing how a shared love of painting unites liefhebbers and schilders, just as it did in ancient times, how such men, then and now, are ruled by “the nature of our Arts, which seek out and love whatever is like them, that is, civility and friendship,”26 and how both groups tend to gravitate appreciatively toward the technical and material aspects of schilderconst (i.e., “Brush-strokes and Panels”),27 Van Mander posits a relation between mind and hand that privileges the latter, construing it as the bodily instrument whereby the mind’s images are given material expression. Van Mander’s conception of the hand’s share in the mental process of fashioning images is essentially Aristotelian:28

And just as Plutarch says that friendship is the noblest [thing] in Nature, so is our Schilder-const glad to be familiar with so noble a virtue, in that Schilder-gheest (the Painter’s spirit), like the Poet’s, cannot endure the very toxic violent shocks [of Envy], but instead is pleased to be calm and still, since thought’s considered / imagined mental images (“d’inbeeldinghen”) through their secret operation must first deliberate and decide, as in the City Hall of a Bourgeois City, what the hands, like compliant servitors (“ghehoorsaem dienaren”), must then execute and do.29

The term ghehoorsaem (compliant, acquiescent, amenable) implies that the hands, more than mere instruments, are willing agents of the mind’s power of imagination, through which the private mental images constitutive of its secret operations are transformed by manual skill into material images that are public and legible. As a matter of fact, Van Mander grants the hand a functional identity at once cognitive and executive everywhere in the Schilder-Boeck; the dedications and prefaces preview this tendency to valorize the hand’s agency. Praising Razet’s large collection of paintings, for example, he calls them “silent voices … painted by various learned, artful hands.”30 In this formulation, art and erudition are as if lodged in the hands, which function as metonyms for the painters who wield them and, implicitly, for the “manners of hand” (handelinghen) representative of those same painters.

If the dedicatory epistles work collectively, as well as in tandem with the prefaces and subsequent lives, to put forward certain arguments about the nature and modi operandi of ancient and modern schilderconst, what sorts of questions do the prefaces conjointly pose? There are three: what is the nature of schilderconst; how does it relate to poëterije (poetry); and when did it originate, relative to other consten (arts)? The Preface to “Lives of the Ancient Illustrious Painters, Egyptian, Greek, and Roman” provides a succinct answer to the first question, which resonates with the fuller account developed in the Schilder-Boeck as a whole. Schilderconst consists in the shadowing forth of a verisimilar mirror image that captures the apparent likeness of some person(s) or thing(s). This processual definition, which ascribes to painting the power of fixing an “appearance of being” (“den schijn van het zijn”) that would otherwise be as fleeting as a shadow, beyond the compass of memory, ultimately derives from Leon Battista Alberti’s De pictura II.26, combined with Quintilian’s account of the origins of painting in De institutione oratoria X.ii.7 and Pliny’s in Naturalis historia XXX.15:31

Some have subtly contrived [to say] that she arose from Narcissus, who was transformed into a flower, for she is the flower of all the Arts, so that the whole of the Fable of Narcissus can, not inopportunely, be explained in this wise: for what may better rhyme with the fine form of this Youth shadowed forth in the Crystal-clear fountain, than a Figure artfully painted and done after the life by the learned hand of a Painter rich in Art? Even while writing this, I am astonished by how fitting this [contrivance] is, given that I do indeed find our Art to be a shadow of true being, comparable to the appearance of that which exists: for as some men write, this noble, Heaven-sent gift of nature is the daughter of Shadow. My witness is the learned Quintilian, whose opinion is that she originates from the shadows cast by the Sun, wherefore the Ancients are thought to have captured the head’s chief features by outlining these shadows. Pliny, too, in his noted thirty-fifth book, chapter 12, recounts how the daughter of a potter, Deburates, being enamored of a Youth, drew with a coal the profile of his face shadowed by candlelight upon a wall, in order to have him ever before the eyes and in mind; from which [drawing] her father is thought to have made and baked the first face in clay relief. For which reason the art of Drawing (Teycken-const) ought to be celebrated for having been born before Sculpture: and on this account, Painting ought to have been produced by Phoebus or Vulcan, namely, from the shadows cast by the Sun or fire.32

These anecdotes also introduce one of Van Mander’s most important collateral themes—the relation between teyckenconst and schilderconst—which is addressed in chapters 2, “Van het teyckenen, ofte Teycken-const” (On drawing, or the Art of Delineating), and 12, “Van wel schilderen, oft Coloreren” (On painting well, or Coloring).

All six prefaces take for granted the close affiliation between painting and poetry, but the Preface to the Wtlegghingh draws the most explicit, if tried and true, parallels. The context for Van Mander’s prefatory remarks is set in the dedicatory epistle, addressed to Gedeon Fallet. Here he borrows his chief points from Philostratus the Elder’s introduction to the Imagines and Simonides of Ceos’s comparison of painting to mute poetry, cited by Plutarch in De gloria Atheniensium III.346.33 He begins by observing that painting, when it “exemplifies and describes the features and deeds of virtuous admirable Men,” joins forces with history and poetry, since they, too, strive after truth and moral instruction.34 He then narrows his focus exclusively to painting and poetry:

For just as the Painter by means of brush-strokes gives past events to be known as if they were present, so does the Poet with beautifully voiced reasons and discriminating words: wherefore they but differ in the materials of representation and portrayal. Thus the writer who runs the course of his narratives in good form is thanked neither less nor more than the Painter who places his work before the eyes, bringing it skillfully to pass with soul-stirring figurations.35

Even the silence of painting is like poetry, in that the ancient Greeks, following Euripides’s dictum, “Silence is the answer of the wise,” favored sayings that used the fewest words to express the richest meanings. Notable is the way Van Mander precisely distinguishes between the material means of representation and then goes on to imply that painting and poetry exercise a reciprocal claim on those means: well-executed narratives convey actions effectively when they partake of a “good form / formation” (i.e., visualize them); well-painted pictures move the beholder when they include beeldinghen (i.e., figurations / rhetorical figures). The goal shared by painters and poets, it would seem, is the effect of enargeia—vivid likeness, visual presence, sensory immediacy.

The Preface proper elaborates upon these parallels by insisting that Poetry is a visual art that operates in and through images. When it artfully praises virtue or condemns vice, it does so by making the two paths visible (“te schouwen”). Poetry achieves its salutary effects by picturing men to themselves in a form at once stirring and aspirational:

Yes, [Poetry] is so entire that I am impelled to say that wise Poetic devices, profound and inspired poems, have an exceptionally potent and beneficial force, in that they gratify the heart by tickling the ear, sweetly picturing to Man a better image of himself, tempering his thought, taming desire and lust, making sense constant, stilling the heart, concentrating the spirt, refining morals, and finally curing the harmful sicknesses of the Soul: so that sound and pure in will, word, and work, armed with innocence, Manful, unmoved and unhindered, he may traverse the thousand-fold perilous, dire thieving woods, and the murderous, dark straying paths of this world, and at long last reach peace of spirit and rest of Soul.36

Scriptural poetry uses a different kind of image to produce a like effect, mixing visual elements incongruously to cue a saying’s deeply symbolic, allegorical sense: as when, in Judges 9:8–15, the trees go to anoint a king; or, in 4 Kings 14:9–10, the thistle asks the cedar to give his daughter in marriage to the thistle’s son; or, in 1 Chronicles 16:32–33, the seas roar and the fields rejoice, praising the Lord. In a similar fashion, the New Testament parables portray the word of God as if he were speaking in images; Van Mander paraphrases and partially elides the parables of the sower and the oversown cockle:

Now one must yet consider what may otherwise be meant and imported. As elsewhere the word of God is portrayed (afghebeeldt) to us with a grain seed for sowing, the unenlightened with a pathway, the inconstant with stony ground, the eagerly desirous with thorns, the fearful of God with good soil, the Word with the Field, the Angels with the Reapers, the Last Judgment with the Harvest, Hell with the Bonfire, Heaven with the barn, good persons with Wheat, bad persons with cockles, as also, [respectively,] with Sheep and Goats.37

That Van Mander thinks of these poetic images as painted by other means, not with pigments but with words whose descriptive potential has been maximized, becomes even more apparent when he segues from Scripture to Ovid. Speaking about Ovid’s Verander-Boeck (Book of Metamorphoses), he states: “There skillfully with keen observation every property [of things] and many-colored contrivances are with very great Art coupled together.”38 He likens the Metamorphoses to a “clear lustrous mirror of instruction placed before the [reader-viewer’s] eyes,” for the purpose of re-forming him, so that he finds himself “in form much improved, transformed, or reshaped.”39

Poetry, then, is to be appreciated as a genus of image-making very closely paired with schilderconst, distinguishable from it only materially, through its reliance on words rather than pigments, brushes, and panels. This brings us to the third topic addressed by the prefaces—the origins of painting, as this pertains to its relation to its sister arts, such as sculpture, and to the liberal arts. Given Van Mander’s conception of poetry as a kind of image-making, it perhaps comes as no surprise to find him arguing in the Preface to Book II that schilderconst must be at least as old as the Trojan War since Homer could not possibly have described the Shield of Achilles in so vivid, lively, and detailed a way, had painting not existed to guide him. Even if the shield was engraved and enameled rather than actually painted, the assumption of painting’s priority over Homer’s poetry would remain irrefragable:

Now, even if one were to say that this work was engraved and baked with enamels, rather than painted, be that as it may, it were not possible to have brought into the work all the things recounted had the art of drawing (Teycken-const) not been in a state of great perfection: and if [drawing] was in great perfection, it were impossible for painting not to have already been brought forth alongside, and not imperfectly, as is well to be deduced …. Now, having taken this into consideration, one would think that Homer could not write so palpably and vividly about the art of Drawing or Painting (“Teycken oft Schilder-const”), had they not been common currency, known beforehand; and indeed, he could not have expatiated so fully about them had they not been richly and highly in practice and use, at the very least in his own time.40

Van Mander then extends his timeline back to the time of Lycurgus, 872 years before the birth of Christ, and finally hypothesizes that schilderconst may predate the Flood, since only 200 years after it, Belus, son of Nimrod, caused a figure to be made, which became the first idol. In short, painting must have been a clever invention of the Chaldeans and Egyptians, from whom it spread to the Greeks and the Romans who revered it as a “noble, free Art, not as a guild-regulated craft,” and as a “silent sister of very spirited Poetry.”41 This extended defense of painting’s venerable age and temporal priority to all other arts and crafts, with the possible exception of poetry, bolsters his opening assertion, in the Preface to the Grondt, that the “genius-begetting, noble art of Painting [is] the natural nursemaid of all virtuous Arts and sciences.” This is why she was held in such high honor by ancient Greek and Roman “Lords and men of the highest learning.” Van Mander then coyly, if modestly, adds: “But whether in or through this association our exceptional art of Painting now bestows through her worthy presence or company a greater honor upon the other Arts than she formerly received from association with them, what I feel about this I shall gladly keep quiet, that I not be chided by reproving eyes, or badly thanked, and in order not to foment many a dispute.”42 The Grondt, viewed through the closely woven web of dedicatory epistles and prefaces, can be seen formally to justify schilderconst’s ancient status and privileges, her liberal bona fides, which Van Mander, chapter by chapter, fully situates in the painter’s entwined mind, heart, and hand.

2 The Sources, Title-Page, and Scope of the Grondt

Van Mander’s conviction that schilderconst musters the schilder’s mind, heart, and hand, issuing from their confluent agencies, largely derives from Domenicus Lampsonius’s efforts to codify a canon of Netherlandish masters in the print cycle he assembled in collaboration with the print publisher Hieronymus Cock. Titled Pictorum aliquot celebrium Germaniae Inferioris effigies (Some Effigies of Celebrated Netherlandish Painters), this series of viri illustres consists of portraits of deceased painters, starting with Hubert and Jan van Eyck and ending with Hieronymus Cock, who died before the Effigies was finally issued in 1572.43 Lampsonius supplied the Latin epitaphs that accompany the mortuary images and function as a summary of each painter’s character and achievements. Van Mander, who knew these prints intimately, translated many of the epitaphs, incorporating many of them as perorations to the lives of masters who had died before he penned the Schilder-Boeck.

Lampsonius, as Edward Wouk has recently argued, conceived of the Effigies as a Netherlandish version of the Aeneid: Virgil’s poem recounts the origins of Rome, just as Lampsonius’s concatenated epitaphs tell the story of Netherlandish art, which is seen to arise fully formed, as if already mature, when the Van Eycks promulgate the new medium and technique of oil painting.44 At several points in the series, praise is lavished on masters who harmonize the workings of the mind, heart, and hand: for instance, the landscape painter Lucas Gassel of Helmond receives commendation for leading men’s minds to embrace honesty and integrity and, in equal measure, for leading their hearts to love good things. In proof, Lampsonius credits Gassel’s skillful hand with having engendered in him his own “love of graphice (picturing).”45 Here as with many other painters in the series, Gassel proudly displays the tools of his art, tightly gripping a palette, brushes, and maulstick. Lampsonius calls upon Pieter Bruegel to “be blessed for your spirit, as you are blessed in your skill.”46 The Dutch cognate for the Latin animo is gheest, Van Mander’s term of choice for masters notable for their ready wit and ingenuity of invention. Most remarkable is Jan van Amstel’s epitaph: in a rejoinder to Michelangelo’s disparaging dictum, publicized by Anton Francesco Doni in Il Disegno, that Netherlandish painters lack rational intelligence, having their brain in their hands, not their heads, Lampsonius turns disparagement into praise for Van Amstel’s skilled art of landscape painting.47 The aphorism may be true, avows Lampsonius, but the condition it describes is laudable: “It is said not without reason that the Italian has his brain in his head, but the Belgian has his brain in his active hand. Therefore, the hand of Jan favored painting fields well, rather than his head knowing how to paint badly either men or gods.”48 Whereas Michelangelo alleges that Netherlandish art is mindless, Lampsonius counters that Van Amstel’s “active hand” is itself mindful, for it knows how to paint fields well and favors landscape over inaptly and ineptly painted history.49 Lampsonius’s reference to landscape as docta in the Herri met de Bles epitaph, and his designation of Gassel’s hand as docta, speak to a notion of manual virtuosity that roundly informs Van Mander’s many invocations of the “gheleerde hant” (learned hand) throughout the Schilder-Boeck.50 Van Mander uses the phrase to bestow praise and honor on masters such as Hendrick Goltzius whose practiced burin-hand combines inordinate skill with facile grace, assiduity (vlijt) with spirit (gheest).51 In the dedication of Book II to Razet, cited above, his collection of painted works by “various learned, artful hands” serves to confirm his discriminating love of schilderconst.52 The Schilder-Boeck as a whole greatly elaborates upon the apparatus of canon-formation promulgated by Lampsonius and Cock.

But what of the Grondt? Van Mander had several models ready to hand, such as the poems on art published by his former teacher, the poet-painter Lucas de Heere of Ghent, in Den hof en boomgaerd der poësiën, inhoudende menigherley soorten van Poetijckelicke blommen (Garden and Orchard of Poetry, Containing Many Sorts of Poetic Blooms) (Ghent: Ghileyn Manilius, 1565), which in turn inspired the civic administrator Marcus van Vaernewyck, likewise of Ghent, to include extensive notes on art in Den spieghel der Nederlandscher audtheyt, inhoudende de constructie, oft vergaderinghe van Belgis (Mirror of Netherlandish Antiquity, Containing the Construction, or Aggregation of Belgium) (Ghent: Gheeraert van Salenson, 1568).53 In the Preface to Book IV, Het leven der doorluchtighe Nederlandtsche, en Hoogh-duytsche schilders … Alles tot lust, vermaeck, en nut der Schilders, en Schilder-const beminders (Lives of the illustrious Netherlandish and High-German painters … All for the pleasure, delight, and use of Painters and lovers of Painting), Van Mander mentions that he had tried in vain to get hold of De Heere’s lives of esteemed Northern painters, written in verse, left incomplete, and now untraceable, “which not least would otherwise have been a great help to me, in those particulars that required great effort to track down and secure.”54 It is easy to imagine how De Heere’s dual project of composing poems on art and versified lives of artists might have functioned as a prototype for the Schilder-Boeck’s more complex combination of a theoretical poem on art and three sets of parallel lives of painters, ancient, Italian, and Northern.

The more systematic format of Van Mander’s Grondt, with its progression from a long opening exhortation that makes reference, both implicit and explicit, to literary works the aspiring painter should know as potential sources of invention, to chapters on the composition (or, as Van Mander puts it, “ordonnance”) of history and landscape, to chapters on the painter’s chief ornaments—varieties of animal, fabric, and well sorted or mixed colors—broadly follows the tripartite schema of classical rhetorical treatises, which generally move from invention (the speaker’s selection of topics), to disposition (orderly presentation of those topics), to eloquence or elocution (ornamentation and amplification of those same topics). However, the emphasis Van Mander places on the process of amplification, on descriptive effects and ornaments, and on what might be termed feats of eloquent coloring suggests that the Grondt could better be compared to treatises on poetics, such as Matthijs de Caslelein’s De const van rhetoriken (Art of Rhetorics) (Ghent: Jan Cauwel, 1555).55 De Castelein’s verse treatise invokes the rhetorical canons and figures of thought and speech associated with classical rhetoric and the Aristotelian and Ciceronian functions of docere, delectare, and movere (to instruct, delight, and move), but it attaches these parts and devices to the so-called “arts de second rhétorique” (arts of the second rhetoric), colorful elocution above all. Amongst a plethora of figurative expressions, description is favored as an affective device that engenders vivid, richly detailed images, making them seem as if palpably present.56 In all these respects, De Castelein’s poetic treatise on the art of poetry, surely well known to Van Mander, who was himself a gifted poet and rhetorician, might have offered a welcome exemplar, template, or gauge for his poem on schilderconst. After all, the Grondt is a poetic tour de force, replete with well-appointed and skillfully deployed figures—apostrophe, ekphrasis, enargeia, metaphor, metonymy, paradox, paronomasia, personification, prosopopoeia, simile, synecdoche, et al.—marshaled to argue for the high, indeed foundational status of the art of painting amongst the other visual arts, and for its close kinship with the liberal arts.

Equally pivotal for Van Mander was the theoretical preface to Giorgio Vasari’s Le vite de’ piu eccellenti Pittori, Scultori et Architettori (Lives of the Most Excellent Painters, Sculptors, and Architects), 3 vols. (Florence: Giunti, 1568). Titled “Introduzzione … alle tre Arti del Disegno, cioè Architettura, Pittura, et Scoltura,” the preface explains how disegno (drawing, delineation) operates both as a principle of visual invention that launches the allied processes of painting, sculpture, and architecture, and as the practical means whereby such invention is made materially manifest.57 The “Introduzzione” initiates the tripartite sequence of lives that chronicles the gradual improvement and, in the final of three ages, the perfection of the “three arts of disegno, namely, Architecture, Painting, and Sculpture,” between the late thirteenth and the mid-sixteenth centuries. Van Mander transformed Vasari’s theoretical preface into a comprehensive poem on painting and its parts, but like Vasari, he then sutured his theoretical statement to sequences of lives in which the poem’s critical categories are seen to play out. Vasari’s three ages of Italian art became three distinct cultural histories of art—Ancient, Italian, Netherlandish—on the model of Plutarch’s Parallel Lives, as Van Mander explains in the “Life of Apollodorus,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book II: “Just as I, like the excellent Writer Plutarch, planned to compare the illustrious Men, Greek and Italian, one against the other, so should it serve, not unfitly, to set the Athenian Apollodorus opposite Michelangelo.”58 In Grondt, chapter 8, “Van der Reflecty, Reverberacy, teghen-glans oft weerschijn” (On Reflection, Reverberation, re-reflected luster, or re-reflection), he gives further information on the genesis of his multipart book. As there were three great schools of ancient painting—Attic, Ionian, and Sicyonian—so Van Mander treats the ancient Greeks and Romans, the Italians (Florentines, Romans, Venetians, and Lombards), and the Northerners (Netherlandish and High German) as representatives of three great schools of art, drawing an explicit parallel between the arts of Sicyon and that of Batavia (the term used by Tacitus in his Germania for the Dutch Rhineland, i.e., the Netherlands):

Furthermore, in that Pictura is now as favorable to Batavia,
As she formerly was to Sicyon,
So has nature come to shake forth gifts from out of her lap
Upon the harbor town of Haarlem.
Into the bosoms of two residents living there;
One of them by rights a Painter, whose
Plato’s Cave, wherein is Art of no common strain,
Is to be found in Amsterdam.59

Underlying the division of painting into three historical schools must be Quintilian’s distinction between oratorical genres and styles, in Book XIII, chapter 10 of the Institutio oratoria.60 First and foremost, Quintilian distinguishes between the Attic and Latin methods of argumentation and delivery.

This brief selection of key source texts makes all the more apparent the novel format and argument of the Schilder-Boeck. Nothing quite like his treatise had ever been published: a theoretical poem in fourteen chapters (Book I), followed by parallel histories of art (Books IIIV) that exemplify the critical categories introduced in Book I by embedding them in artists’ lives, in turn supplemented by two smaller treatises on allegorical image-making (Books VVI), both of which, by expounding upon the many mythopoetic figures that punctuate the Grondt and providing the rationale for Van Mander’s method of personification, allow the reader to circle back to his symbolic usage throughout the Grondt. The mutual referentiality of the six books, the intercalation of topics and themes within and across them, justifies the characterization of the Schilder-Boeck as an intertext.

The title-page to the book at large consists of elements drawn from its several books, most of all from the principles set out in the Grondt (Fig. 1).61 Above is the winged ox of the Guild of Saint Luke, with the guild’s metadevice, three shields emblazoned upon a larger shield, hanging from its neck. If the ox signifies the labor of schilderconst (Wtbeeldinghe, chapter 2, fol. 128r), the seraphic head (identified in Book IV, “Life of Cornelis Ketel,” fol. 276v, as a “Seraphinnen hoofd,” “Seraphim’s head,” or alternatively, a “Lof-geest,” “spirit of praise”) alludes to the divine source of praiseworthy art, namely, to genius or native ability (Grondt, chapter 1, stanzas 1 and 7), which must be combined with diligent labor if the would-be painter wishes to achieve perfection. Flanking the ox, two putti distribute a palm frond and a laurel wreath, the signs of perfection duly honored. At right the personification of schilderconst, maulstick, brushes, and palette in hand, looks intently at the personification across from her, portraying her features after the life (“Life of Cornelis Ketel,” fols. 276v, 278v, and 279v). This many-breasted figure, wearing a crenelated crown, raising a scepter, and leaning against a terrestrial orb, can be identified as both the mother goddess Cybele and the earth goddess Tellus, who jointly embody Nature (Wtbeeldinge, fol. 125v). The Art of Painting thus exemplifies the crucial importance of working after living nature, the “lodestar of picturing, its foundation stone and target” (Grondt, chapter 2, stanza 13).62 The child who holds up Painting’s panel or canvas, playing the part of her easel, turns either toward the putto crowning him with laurel or toward Nature: he stands for the “students of Art born of Nature” (Grondt, chapter 11, stanza 1: “Ghy der Natuer oorspronckscher Const Scholieren”), who “attend to the master’s palette and brushes” (Grondt, chapter 1, stanza 48: “Hebt acht op Meesters Pallet en Pinceelen”), whose “labor yield[s] its sweet rewards” (Grondt, chapter 1, stanza 12: “Dan baert arbeydt versoetende profijten”).

Below the topmost figures stand two further personifications: at the right, aligned with Painting and her laureate student, Fame sounds the trumpet of their worthy deeds, while holding stationary the trumpet of misdeeds (Wtlegginghe, fols. 99v–101r); that she looks leftward, as if staring at the titular text, signals that securing the fame of the pictorial arts, the art of painting in particular, and of its practitioners, was the chief aim of the Schilder-Boeck. As Painting gazes at Nature, so Fame may be gazing at the woman to her right, who draws or writes on a tablet, one sheet of paper curling over its top edge. Although she may be Clio, Muse of History, who would then allude to Van Mander’s three sets of parallel “Lives” that chronicle the histories of Ancient, Northern, and Italian painting, she more likely personifies teyckenconst, the “art of Drawing [that] encompasses all things, holding every Art within her measured skeins,” the art of “trac[ing] letters and characters” amongst them (Grondt, chapter 2, stanzas 1and 2).63 Aligned with Cybele-Tellus-Nature, one of her breasts brightly spotlit, she may also portray teyckenconst as the “kind-hearted wet-nurse” who gives rise to all other arts and nourishes them (Grondt, chapter 2, stanza 2).64 The essential sisterhood of teyckenconst and schilderconst, explicated in the Grondt, especially chapters 2 and 12, is briefly but potently summarized in the dedication of Book III of the Schilder-Boeck, the Italian “Lives,” to Van Mander’s close friend and patron Bartholomeus Ferreris. He asseverates that much effort must be expended to learn both the one and the other since they are jointly indispensable for the cultivation of European culture:

Worthy gentleman, and good friend, that there are many who in this present, all too ungrateful age claim with a minimum of discernment that commonplace operations are comparable with the very exceptional, heaven-sent gifts of nature, and expressly, that Teycken-const or Schilder-const, perfect at portraying nature, are not only easily learned and facile, but also quite unnecessary, comes from a coarse, perverse judgment. For inasmuch as in our populous Europe, people are accustomed to living civilly, honorably, and rationally, not as barbarians or beasts, so is nearly nothing more consequential and serviceable at mutually sustaining the small with the great, and the great with small, than the aforementioned Teycken-const or Schilder-const.65

The reference to things great and small pertains not only to people of variable estate, the high-placed and the lowly, but also, as the dedicatory text goes on to argue, to the relation between the higher and lower arts, i.e., painting, glass-painting, and copperplate engraving on one hand, the skilled handicrafts on the other. I shall have more to say about this presently.

Together, the personifications that grace the title page make reference to the whole of the Schilder-Boeck, placing it under the sign of the tripartite Aristotelian rhetorical scheme of natura/ingenium (natural ability/genius), ars/doctrina (art as theory/instruction), and exercitatio (art as practical skill), respectively bodied forth by Nature, Painting and her student, and the activities of Painting and Drawing, for whom Nature functions in the title print as both the originating source and the object of representation. Codified by Cicero in De oratore II.162–178, and applied as a tractatio (systematic treatment) of the dramatic genres by Horace in Ars poëtica 408–412, this scheme provides the basic philosophical armature upon which Van Mander constructs his arguments about the nature, operations, and instruments whereby schilderconst is produced and perfected.66 Far less conventional is his use of parallel construction to define the excellences of three pictorial traditions—the art of painting as practiced by the Ancients, the Italians, and the Netherlanders and High Germans, whose lives and works are compared in Books IIIV, in accordance with the theoretical criteria laid out in Book I. Van Mander adapted his method of argument-by-comparison from Plutarch’s Parallel Lives and from the defense of analogical argument in Aristotle’s Rhetoric, Cicero’s De inventione, and Quintilian’s Institutio oratoria, where these authors respectively advocate for the use of paradeigmata (paired paradigms), collationes (collatable exempla), and similitudines (evidentiary similitudes).67

Begun in the early 1590s, certainly no later than 1596, and finished in June 1603, as the dedication to Melchior Wijntgis records, Book I, the Grondt, was designed to supply the terminology whereby the practitioners of schilderconst could be described and evaluated in the subsequent three books: in addition to the chapter on teyckenconst, there are chapters on bodily analogie/proportie (analogy, proportion), figural actitude (attitude, disposition), ordinanty/inventy of histories (ordonnance, invention), affecten (affects), reflecty (reflection), landtschap (landscape), beesten/dieren/voghels (cattle, animals, birds), laken/draperinghe (stuffs, drapery), sorteren der verwen (sorting of colors), and wel schilderen/coloreren (painting well, coloring). Chapter 1, a long exordium, exhortative in tone, mainly dealing with the nature and circumstances of the painter’s life and the mores of the workshop, initiates the sequence of fourteen chapters on the component parts of schilderconst.68 Chapters 2–6 chiefly deal with the active human figure, the proportional arrangement of bodily members, the expressive coordination of the face and limbs, and the narrative distribution of multiple figures within an ambient or circumferential landscape setting.69 Although color occasionally comes up as a topic, the emphasis falls on teyckenconst, how the figure and its circumstances may be delineated. Chapter 5 on history adumbrates chapter 8 on landscape, since Van Mander conceives of both subjects as mutually amplifying ornaments: embedded figural scenes enliven the landscape, and conversely, landscape mobilizes the eyes in ways that activate the figures. The transition from teyckenconst to schilderconst, from drawing in graphic media such as pen, pencil, chalk, pastel, or coal, to painting in oil colors occurs in chapter 7 on the dynamics of reflected light and color and how to represent them.70 Chapters 8–10, on landscape, animals, and textiles respectively, focus on the problem of how to paint animate things or entities whose fugitive and lively qualities, encapsulated by the term gheestig (spirited), make them difficult to capture pictorially. This is the context in which Van Mander most fully grapples with the distinction between painting nae[r] t’leven (after the life) and uyt den gheest (from the spirit).71 Finally, chapters 11–14 examine colors, their material bases and representational uses, the methods of distinguishing amongst them, the modes of brushwork whereby they are applied, and the meanings, both heraldic and emblematic, that they have come to bear.72 Chapters 2, 7, and 12 give special thought to the process whereby mimetic images are formed; 2 and 12 to the kinds and degrees of “handling,” the manners of line or brushstroke best suited to confecting such images; 7 to the relation between natural and pictorial artifice; and chapters 7 and 9 to the optical appeal of paintings that exercise a persuasive, even deceptively mimetic effect upon the beholder. These topics and themes are discussed in the more detailed summary, “Précis of the Poem’s Fourteen Chapters,” that serves to round out my introductory remarks, and in the notes that accompany the prose translation of the Grondt.73

As will be evident from this brief chapter-by-chapter summary of the Grondt, Van Mander leavens general principles with an abundant supply of visual particulars that vividly exemplify assorted representational means and ends. In doing so, he made full use of the vast array of firsthand knowledge gleaned during his apprenticeships with the poet-painter Lucas de Heere in Ghent (ca. 1566–1567) and the painter Pieter Vlerick in Kortrijk and Tournai (ca. 1567–1568), his study tour of Italy and long stay in Rome (1573–1577), his visit to Vienna where he and Bartholomeus Sprangher worked together on the triumphal arch marking Rudolf II’s Joyful Entry into the city (1577), and his many years as an occasional, then a professional painter in Flanders (1577–1583) and Haarlem (1583–1603).74 Throughout the Schilder-Boeck, Van Mander acknowledges the kinship of teyckenconst and schilderconst with the lesser arts and trades (“Const[en] oft Ambacht[en]”), whose artisanal bona fides these higher arts elevate not only through their close affiliation to the liberal arts, but also through the exceptionally high level of manual and technical skill they demand from their gifted practitioners.75 Van Mander clearly expresses this point of view in the dedication of Book III to Bartholomeus Ferreris, cited above. In stating that Drawing and Painting have the power to couple the small with the great, the great with the small, and to nourish them both, he refers also to the ways in which the higher arts confer status on the lower:

Hereby is very profitable coinage distinguished with effigies, coats of arms, and devices. Through this Mother of every ornament, all artful handiworks receive their highest, most perfect beauty, whether they be forged, cast, carved, incised, built, carpentered, masoned, woven, sewn, embroidered, draped, or wrought: accordingly, gold and silver, due to their subtle workmanship, are bought at half again above their estimated worth, and a copperplate is weighed up against a silver one. Indeed, had one a plate made of the poorest material or lead, and ‘twere surely covered over or painted by the admired Apelles, Parrhasius, or Zeuxis, then would it easily be worth its weight in fine coin of gold.76

Aligned with this conception of the relation amongst drawing, painting, and the other image-based arts and trades is the disclaimer issued at the close of the Northern “Lives”: although he has focused here on painting, his original intention had been to include glass painters and copperplate engravers (“Glas-schrijvers en Plaet-snijders”), information about whom is instead dispersed throughout Book IV.77 And at the start of the “Life of Joris Hoefnaghel,” he states that the visual arts, like a trade, provide insurance against the vicissitudes of fortune, since they can be practiced for money; the willingness of the social elite to let their children train in a “Const oft Ambacht” is a positive trait peculiar to Netherlanders:

I find that a better custom prevails among us Netherlanders than is in use with other peoples—namely, that parents, even when empowered by wealth, often get their children to learn one or other art or trade early in their youth; that can be wonderfully useful, especially in times of war and emigration. For we find that cruel fortune, the bane of this world, has less power over a skill than over riches, and that the art which one has learned in youth is often the last resort in necessity and a refuge of consolation, to avert the shipwreck of oppressive poverty.78

Van Mander’s joint investment in the high art of schilderconst and in the lower consten, which benefit from the influence of the painter’s “clever wit” and higher faculties, sensible as they are to the “living images in [his] spirit, mind, and affection,” shines through the synoptic comment about him in Arnoldus Buchelius’s Diarium; having seen his tapestry designs in the Delft workshop of François Spierincx, Buchelius states: “This Spierincx was making much use of the designs and patterns of Karel Vermandre, citizen of Haarlem, excellent painter; whose genius, said [Spierincx], was so versatile that [Vermandre] might prescribe to masters of whatsoever art in what respect [their works] ought to be altered—to painters, sculptors, glass workers, tapestry weavers or embroiderers, architects, goldsmiths, textile makers.”79 However, Van Mander also expends considerable energy to demarcate the boundary between schilderconst and the lesser, if contiguous, arts and crafts, the ambachten and handt-wercken. In the “Life of Pieter Vlerick,” for instance, as part of a diatribe against guild organizations that treat painting no differently than “coarse handicrafts and trades such as weaving, furriery, carpentry, smithing, and suchlike,” he laments:

O Pictura, noble and supreme bearer of genius in Nature, mother of all embellishments and wet nurse of all noble virtuous arts, who is not obliged to yield before any of your fellow sisters called the liberal arts, who was valued so highly by the noble Greeks and Romans and whose artful practitioners were so much welcomed and well received everywhere—and so gladly accepted as citizens by gentlemen and authorities. O, far too ungrateful present times, that on the insistence of clumsy bunglers has established in the towns such shameful laws and such envious regulations so that almost everywhere (excepting almost only Rome) a guild is made of the noble art of painting …. In Haarlem, where there have always been many noble spirits in our art, there are tinkers, tinsmiths, and old clothes traders included in the guild.80

Each chapter of the Grondt starts with a general definition of the pictorial category to be discussed, followed by a plethora of visual examples that become increasingly specific, thus assisting the reader visually to epitomize the category in question; many of the chapters also incorporate a more or less detailed, circumstantial treatment of materials and techniques, even though the Grondt is a treatise on the theory and practice of schilderconst, not a practical handbook or an illustrative drawing- or picture-book. Van Mander relies throughout on ekphrasis, the rhetorical figure of description, of which he was a consummate master, to adduce the images he wants his readers to fashion in their mind’s eye. To enrich and intensify the process of visualization, and to ensure that his readers remember what they read, he eloquently musters the “colors” of poetry, applying the metrical and rhyme schemes of Italian ottava rima: his stanzas consist of eight lines, each line eleven syllables long, cadenced in “reghels mate”—a regular meter without caesura—and rhymed ab aa bb cc.81

3 Laying a Comparative Foundation for the Schilder-Boeck

The Grondt, as mentioned above, lays the groundwork for the sequential discussion of Ancient, Italian, and Northern art that follows in the parallel form of three sets of “Lives.” Take the critical category teyckenconst, which is defined in chapter 2, first expansively as the representational source of every image-based art, including the full spectrum of liberal arts, such as grammar, which transmit knowledge by recourse to letter-forms; and then more specifically as the conveyance of thoughts by means “drawing, drawing over, drawing round all that [the sense of] sight may apprehend within the limits of the world.”82 By stanza 6, in anticipation of chapters 3–6, Van Mander has narrowed his focus to the human figure; in stanza 9, he states that if the student wishes to draw and shade figures well, he must first find a competent master and closely follow his manner of handling coal, chalk, or pen and ink; and in stanza 10, he shifts emphasis to tonal techniques of washing and hatching on gray- or blue-tinted paper. Stanzas 14–16 affirm that nature is the ultimate source of every graceful “action, attitude, [or] fine foreshortening,” that invention, which Van Mander here equates with ordonnance (the disposition and distribution of human figures), results from drawing after nature and committing these drawings to the storehouse of memory, and that by drawing incessantly, not only from nature but also “from out of one’s self” (“uyt zijn selven doen”), one will eventually become a revered master worthy of being imitated.83 Stanzas 9 and 14–16 thus envision a pedagogical cycle leading from the Meester and his “goede manier” (competent manner) to graceful Natuer, and from nature, memory, and the self in concert, to a masterful manner capable of leading the next generation of students back to Natuer. This sets the stage for his account, in stanza 20, of the manner of line best suited to delineating the flexion of a mobile body, namely, the swelling and tapering stroke that alters gradatim, thick to thin, which he presents as an epitome of grace. Complementarily, Van Mander briefly recounts the methods of rendering the body tonally or in color with a stylus made from chalk or pastel or a stump, and he closes as he opened, by placing painting in a lineage from drawing, and limning schilderconst as teyckenconst’s daughter.84 Typical is the transition from a universal statement about the mimetic functions of teyckenconst to more particular discussion of selected objects and methods of representation (chapter 2 places emphasis on the human body) and of the materials and techniques whereby these objects may be portrayed convincingly, in ways that cleave close to nature even when they issue from “out of one’s self.”

Amongst the Greek and Roman painters, Apelles takes pride of place as the supreme master of teyckenconst, and Van Mander’s explanation of how and why this is the case serves to establish the ancient pedigree of the kind of line, moving thick to thin, that he valorizes at the close of chapter 2. In the “Life of Apelles,” the appraisal of teyckenconst turns on Pliny’s famous anecdote about the contest waged between Apelles and Protogenes to determine whose command of “a dexterous fine line/stroke” (“eenen behendigen dunnen treck”) was foremost.85 Having called on the painter Protogenes in Rhodes, Apelles learns that he has just stepped out; finding an empty canvas on his easel, he leaves on it, as his calling-card, a finely brushed line in a single color. Returning home, Protogenes immediately recognizes the line as his rival’s, saying that “no one but Apelles could have made with color and brush so fine or subtle a line as this.”86 He responds by painting an even finer line in a different color. Returning to the workshop and finding to his shame a line finer than his, Apelles takes a brush dipped in another color and paints a line so inimitably fine that it passes through the prior two. This third line, declares Van Mander, “clove the other two so deftly that no line more precise or subtle could possibly be executed.”87 Rendered in paint, executed in lines, these three hatches were appreciated by knowledgeable viewers as joint tokens of teyckenconst and schilderconst: “This panel was left by them unchanged as a memorial, with just these three strokes, to the wonderment of those who saw it, especially those who understood the art of Drawing or the art of Painting.”88 Van Mander calls attention to the hybridity of this collaboratively made picture, its liminal status, which freely oscillates between painting and drawing. The overlapping lines, each colored stroke thinner than the prior stroke, function like a fully resolved version of the swelling and tapering line canonized in chapter 2, its constituent elements made visible and distinct. Moreover, the lines have the force of signature strokes: Protogenes immediately recognizes Apelles in and through the line only he could have brushed, and then answers him in kind, with a line unique to his brush; in turn, Apelles responds with a line incontestably his. In this sense, the lines can be seen to advert to the process of drawing and/or painting “uyt zijn selven” (from out of oneself), likewise enunciated in chapter 2. Additionally, the almost symbiotic relation between teyckenconst and schilderconst that the lines disclose can be thought to evince another central theme of chapter 2: the filiation between these two species of pictorial practice. This is to say that the “Life of Apelles” takes up and exemplifies many of the chief features of teyckenconst introduced in the Grondt.

The “Life of Apelles,” even while referring back to chapter 2, also inverts its method of argumentation. Whereas it begins with an assertion about the representational function and force of teyckenconst and concludes by articulating various media and instruments, along with a specific kind of line, the “Life” starts with an anecdote about individuated lines as indices of technical expertise, opening out into a discussion of their mimetic force and function. Soon after telling the story of Apelles and Protogenes, Van Mander hazards a guess about the representational rather than abstract nature of the lines in question:

This is what Pliny says about it. But if I were freely to give voice here to my impressions: it seems to me that these were not simply drawn straight lines or strokes, as many nonpainters think, but rather the outline of a certain arm or leg, or indeed the profile of a face, or something of this sort, the which outline they had drawn very precisely, in some places crossing the other’s line with different colors, dubbed by Pliny “cleaving through”; for there are learned persons who, lacking a good knowledge of our art, write and speak without a grasp of it. And my opinion is confirmed by what Pliny attests: those who understood Schilder-const were greatly astonished and amazed. Wherefrom may well be thought that these lines which the two most exceptional, lofty masters of our art competed against each another to draw were artful outlines rather than simple lines; for many a schoolmaster, calligrapher, or nonpainter could draw by hand a straight line, oftentimes better than the world’s best painter, and for this be not much esteemed by the painters. To such an end, a yardstick or ruler may be used. But they who know about art admire and are moved whenever they see a subtle, artful outline drawn skillfully with exceptional understanding, wherein Teycken-const exists in the highest degree; but they would simply pass a straight line by, unremarked.89

As chapter 2 centers on drawing the human body in motion, so Van Mander assimilates Apelles’s and Protogenes’s mobile lines to hatches brushed to circumscribe a figure’s limbs. In this respect, too, the “Life” extends, complicates, but also clarifies the content of chapter 2, showing that the Grondt, attuned as it is to contemporary pictorial practice, yet subscribes to Ancient norms.

Apelles’s counterpart in Book III, the Italian “Lives,” is Michelangelo, who, though he lacks his ancient forebear’s “quality of grace” (gracelijckheyt) or “lovable charm” (charis), is as nonpareil as he in teyckenconst.90 Paraphrasing Vasari’s “Life of Michelangelo,” Van Mander summarizes the nature, power, and scope of the master’s teyckenconst in the capsule perorations on the Sistine Chapel ceiling and the Last Judgment. About the former, he says:

In sum, this whole work has been made in such a way, and is of such a kind, as to be the vessel of light or lamp of our Art, sufficient to illuminate the whole world, which formerly for many hundreds of years was passably blind to the true art of Drawing. No painter need wish to see greater perfection in invention, foreshortening, attitudes, beauty of nudes, and draperies: for here Art in the highest degree is brought to the furthest limit, as well appears from the uttermost beauty of the nude figures, projecting very saliently, living and moving, varied in age, who display oaken wreaths to signify the golden age.91

His assessment of the Last Judgment makes even clearer what Michelangelo’s teyckenconst entails: a single-minded focus on the human figure actively posed to enact every conceivable attitude.

Then he gave himself over further to serve Paul III, completing the Judgment with much assiduity, in which with a great manner he truly focused on the nudes, that is, on the beauty, perfect proportion, and forms of the human body, in every sort of attitude, herein surpassing everyone else, leaving aside joyful coloring, and a thousand other pleasantries, with which other painters effect pleasing concinnity, and also graceful invention in the ordering of his History.92

In perfecting teyckenconst at the expense of “pleasing concinnity” (“vermackelijcken welstand”), in a way that sets him apart from every other painter, Michelangelo displays his resolute commitment to the principle of working “out of one’s self.” To demonstrate how total was his embrace of this precept, Van Mander recalls his warning to a young painter skilled at borrowing from other painters: the young man should instead “accustom himself to working ‘uyt zijn selven.’ ”93 Michelangelo is like Apelles and very unlike him: it becomes increasingly clear as the Grondt progresses, especially in light of chapters 5 and 7–14, that Michelangelo has excluded from his practice of teyckenconst and schilderconst virtually every descriptive pictorial ornament (byvoechsel)—not least landscape and the sensual depiction of human flesh—whose presence invites and rewards close viewing.

If Michelangelo departs from ancient precedent, Hendrick Goltzius and Bartholomeus Sprangher, his counterparts amongst the contemporary Northern masters, are lauded for their Apelles-like ability to combine teyckenconst with gracelijckheyt.94 The many parallels between Ancient and Northern masters, first adduced in the Preface to the Grondt, where a list of Ancient pictorial specialties is followed by an analogous list of Northern specialties, reach their climax in the “Lives” of Sprangher and Goltzius, whom Van Mander portrays as latter-day counterparts to Apelles.95 By calling attention to their supreme command of teyckenconst, Van Mander also compares them to Michelangelo, very explicitly in the case of Sprangher, about whose life, consecrated to drawing and painting in the service of Rudolf II, he writes: “his works shall answer to the purpose of children, like those of Michelangelo, and shall offer up his name to eternity in the Temple of Fame.”96 However, the quality of grace that permeates Sprangher’s art, placing him in a lineage from Apelles, and setting him side by side with “Raphael who was graceful in all things,” also differentiates him in this regard from Michelangelo whose teyckenconst lacked grace.97 The implication is that Sprangher, who resembles Michelangelo and Raphael, thereby surpasses both. In truth, Van Mander attributes Sprangher’s meteoric rise as a court painter to his Apelles-like grace, with which he was gifted by nature from his earliest years:

In point of fact, from the very beginning a certain Apelles-like grace has played through all his works, so that his Venusian Pictura, being now joined by Harmonia, the daughter of Mars and Venus, through the unification of good coloring and sure, dexterous, ingenious drawing, is neither to be faulted with the least little thing, not a sandal’s creak, nor at all to be surpassed. Whereby Sprangher well deserves to have been taken up in so worthy a degree by the Roman Caesar who, being as much a lover of art as the great Alexander, has too [in Sprangher] his Apelles.98

This laudation of Sprangher’s inimitably graceful drawing, which has now been enhanced by (or, better, harmonized with) fine coloring is licensed by an epitome of his art, the Banquet of the Gods (Marriage Feast of Cupid and Psyche) executed in pen, ink, and wash and issued as an engraving by Hendrick Goltzius in 1587 (Fig. 3):

Apropos of his drawing, he handles the pen in so exceptionally subtle a way that one knows no one like him, and in this I too follow the judgment of someone known above all others for his pen-handling, the singular Goltzius, who has said to me that he knows of no one to match [Sprangher]. As we have seen from various works here in this land, above all that splendid and wondrously well ordonnanced banquet of the Gods, or wedding feast of Psyche, which the learned hand and artful burin of Goltzius brought into the light in the year 1585 [sic].99

Van Mander designed Sprangher’s “Life” to exemplify several aspects of teyckenconst recounted in Grondt, chapter 2: first of all, the twin sources of teyckenconst—natural ability, gifted by nature, and practical application, whereby aptitude is honed; second, expertise gained by drawing with various tools and materials, first coal and chalk, then pen and ink, finally in black and white pigments on blue-tinted paper. Van Mander puts this succinctly in stanzas 3 and 10:

The perfection of the art of Drawing must needs come forth
From a sound understanding, and understanding
Must [in turn] draw strength from practice, having taken root
In a spirit endued by nature, which, being
Ingenious and resourceful, fortifies [understanding] and deftly vivifies it.100
You may do it all: hatch and wash
As your spirit inclines, with fiery effort,
Hastening to set your hand to copying
With Coal or Chalk, on Paper gray as ash,
Or on pale blue [Paper], heightening
And deepening: …101

A notable feature of the “Life of Sprangher” is the degree to which Van Mander emphasizes that he lacked a master worthy of instructing him: his abilities as a draftsman (and painter) are characterized as sui generis, emerging as they do from nature (i.e., from out of himself), where they lie dormant until practice and contingent circumstance bring them to light. Take the telling anecdote about the origins of Sprangher’s facility with pen and ink, then with pen, ink, wash, and white heightening on blue-tinted paper. Thus far, Sprangher had only drawn in coal or chalk, but compelled by a commission from the Pope, who wished to see modelli for an entire Passion series, he experimented with pen and ink, to brilliant effect: “having never before drawn with anything other than coal or chalk, he executed the whole of it in white and black on blue paper, twelve pieces in all: thus did the Pope bring Sprangher to draw with the pen, as one compelled thereto.”102 Medium by medium, technique by technique, Sprangher achieves facility in every branch of teyckenconst, rising to every challenge he encounters, by converting natural ability into practical expertise. His seemingly effortless facility is the result of “natural spirit” (“natuerlijcken gheest,” i.e., “spirit endued by nature”) given practical expression (oeffeningh, “practice, exercise”).103

In the “Life of Hendrick Goltzius, excellent Painter, Copperplate Engraver, and Glass-Painter from Mulbracht,” Van Mander confirms his friend and colleague’s status as Europe’s foremost draftsman, a paragon of teyckenconst without equal; with reference to glass-painting and its sister arts, painting and copperplate engraving, he states: “for this Art, like painting and copperplate engraving, grows or has its perfection from Teycken-const, in which I know no one better than he, or anyone who has climbed higher or grown taller in stature above the common judgment.”104 Goltzius, in everything he does as a teyckenaer (draftsman), exemplifies the best practices itemized in Grondt, chapter 2—for example, Van Mander’s precepts about working after the twin paradigms of graceful nature and comely manner:

Therefore, ‘twere good to find an accomplished Master
From the start, in order to accustom oneself to a comely manner.105
‘Tis wondrous, the grace one sees Nature
Pour forth into life, from every side;
Here everything can be found that we might lack in ourselves ….106

And this I have to say about [Goltzius], that from his youth onward he not only strove to follow the beauty or various forms of Nature, but also accustomed himself wonderfully to counterfeiting the various manners of hand (handelingen) of the best masters, such as Heemskerck, Frans Floris, Blocklandt, Federico Zuccaro, and finally Sprangher, whose spirited manner he followed very truly; and thereupon, he also engraved after him that splendid work, Sprangher’s heavenly banquet, overflowing with sweet and delectable nectar, conferring on both the draftsman and the engraver a like immortality.107

The pleasing grace of Sprangher’s manner, the praiseworthy “Apellische gratie” lauded in his “Life,” here finds its appropriate expression in the “masterful force of Goltzius’s burin-hand” (“t’vermoghen der Graef-ijsers”), marked as it is by the swelling and tapering line that Grondt, chapter 2 considers synonymous with grace.

Furthermore, Goltzius is much appreciated throughout his “Life” for his ability to work “uyt zijn selven,” in ways that attest his protean imitative skill and technical invention. Van Mander acclaims his six-part series, the Life of the Virgin of 1593–1594, for its assimilation of Goltzius’s hand to multiple hands in images that appear to have been invented by the masters whose manners Goltzius imitates, but are in fact new images invented by him, in this sense sourced from out of himself: “but omitting many things for the sake of brevity, I shall recount the six pieces he wrought, having just come back from Italy: for thinking upon the manners of hand he had everywhere seen, he with his single hand displayed various hands of his own invention.”108 Subsequently, he invents a new kind of pictorial image, launching a novel method of teyckenconst, hybrid to such a fault, executed partly in pen, partly in oil-color, on primed canvas the size of a large painting:

Hereafter, Goltzius had the idea of drawing with the pen on prepared canvas, for howsoever large the parchment sheets [on which he had previously drawn], they yet struck him as much too small, in respect of his great resolve and spirit. Therefore, he set about, drawing with the pen on canvas, [its surface] primed and quite large, the nude figure of a woman, with a laughing satyr nearby, very subtly and ingeniously done, and he also heightened it, touching the naked [limbs] in a few places with a bit of color, and then varnished it.109

This picture, thus described, recalls the painted lines of Apelles and Protogenes, which occupied a liminal place somewhere between painting and drawing; in point of fact, its hybridity is more entangled, for Van Mander, by appending it to his discussion of Goltzius’s drawings on parchment, indicates that it is rendered, like them, in the manner of an engraving, with markedly swelling and tapering strokes of the pen. The work exhibits materials and techniques characteristic of a print, a drawing, and a painting, but is neither printed nor merely drawn, or simply painted. Newly invented by Goltzius, this kind of image is as singular to him as the invention of oil colors and the mirrorlike technique they enabled were particular to Jan van Eyck.110 It is in this specific sense fashioned quintessentially from out of himself. But like oil colors and, for that matter, copperplate engraving, this curious offshoot of teyckenconst also partakes of the status of a novum repertum (thing newly discovered), that community of technical inventions which were thought to distinguish the Moderns from the Ancients. The Ancients were masters of teyckenconst, but not in the way of the Italians, nor again in the way of the Northern masters, and certainly not in the way peculiar to Goltzius, who shares in the Apelles-like grace of Sprangher but also exceeds him on two fronts: his protean manner of imitation and his invention of a composite method of picturing, one part teyckenconst, one part schilderconst. The presentation of the critical category teyckenconst in Grondt, chapter 2, like that of historie in chapter 5, reflexy-const in chapter 7, landtschap in chapter 8, or coloreren in chapter 12, provides the discursive armature whereby these terms are meaningfully applied and inflected in the consecutive sequences of parallel “Lives.”

4 Key Terms and Critical Categories

Although Van Mander’s terminology is fully discussed in my annotations to the Grondt’s fourteen chapters, certain terms and categories require a more discursive treatment beyond the scope of a commentative note. In this section of the “Introduction,” I examine his usage of the terms schilder / schilderen (painter / painting, to paint; picturer / picturing, to picture) and manier (manner, virtually synonymous with handelingh, handling), and of the categories uyt zijn selven doen ([to work] from out of oneself), welstandt (concinnity, decorum, well-being), gheest and uyt den gheest (spirit and [to work] from the spirit), and wel schilderen (painting / to paint well).

a Schilder

Throughout the Grondt, Van Mander uses schilder in a general or particular sense, depending on context: in chapter 1, stanza 1, he combines it with a reference to a gifted youngster’s impulse to draw and thus signifies the irresistible urge to make pictures; elsewhere the term can refer specifically to painting:

O Hebes’s sprigs, Scholars of Genius,
You who here and there, instead of writing,
Have daubed and stained your Papers
With Mannikins, Ships, various animals,
Rarely leaving a single spot empty,
Seemingly driven on by Nature
To become a Picturer, so that to this end your Parents
Sustain you with their bodies, support you on their shoulders.111

I have translated schilder as “picturer,” schilderen as “picturing,” in those instances when Van Mander refers to a medium or media other than (or in addition to) paint applied with a brush or brushlike instrument, and also whenever he talks about picture-making as a whole. His friend and patron Jacques Razet, notary and secretary of the Customs in Amsterdam, uses the Latin pictura to signify this broader sense of schilderconst in the remarkable will he drew up on January 24, 1609, specifying that the yield from the rental of his house be used to sponsor needy young painters training in the “noble art pictura, painting, sculpture, or engraving” (“Edele const pictura, Schilderen beelt ofte plaetsnyden”).112 With respect to Van Mander’s usage of schilder / schilderen, it is worth keeping in mind what Boudewijn Bakker posits about the Schilder-Boeck—namely, that it consists, broadly speaking, of two parts, the first on drawing, the second on painting.113 On this basis, a sequential summary of the Grondt’s topics and themes might read as follows: after the hortatory opening chapter, the next five chapters primarily concern teyckenconst, the art of drawing. Chapter 7 on reflexy-const (the art of reflection) introduces the second part, which pivots from picturing with lines to painting with colors. Chapters 8–10, on landtschap (landscape), beesten, dieren, en voghels (cattle, animals, and birds), and laken oft draperinghe (fabric or drapery), focus mainly on painting, in particular on the painting of things that require to be depicted uyt den gheest (from the mind, spirit). Finally, the four concluding chapters examine the material and representational properties of oil colors and also their symbolical meanings. The Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae. Schat der Neder-duytscher spraken defines geschildert as peinct (painted) as well as depinxit (painted but also depicted); schilder as peinctre (painter) as well as pictor (painter but also picturer); schilderen as peindre (to paint) as well as pingere, depingere, expingere, scribere (to paint or picture, depict, describe, write); schilderije as peincture (painting) as well as pictura, graphice (painting but also picture, drawing, or alternatively, art of painting, picturing, or drawing).114 Seventeenth-century uses of schilder and schilderen, postdating the first and second editions of the Schilder-Boeck (1604 and 1618 respectively), come more consistently and explicitly to denote painting in colors, as L. de Pauw-de Veen argued in her classic study of these terms.115 When Van Mander applies schilder more generally, as in the titular word Schilder-Boeck, he approaches the connotations of afschilderen (to portray), which is not inherently media-specific.116 At the close of Book IV, Van Mander reveals that his original intention had been to include sections on “glass-engraving / -painting, copperplate engraving, and women painters” (“Glas-schrivers, Plaet-snijders, en Nederlandtsche Vrouwen, die t’Pinceel gheoeffent hebben”).117 Instead, constrained by time and space, he chose largely to concentrate on “painting and painters” (“schilderen en Schilders”), even while including remarks on the best exponents of the complementary arts of engraving and glass-engraving / -painting throughout the Northern lives just recounted. As he puts it: “Forasmuch as I have occasionally denominated and given an account of the same [glass-engravers / -painters, copperplate engravers, and women painters], or rather, the best of them, heretofore in the lives of the Schilders.”118 This is to say that Books I and IV of the Schilder-Boeck, even though they use the term schilder mainly to refer to painting, also retain its close association with allied pictorial arts such as glas-schrijven and plaet-snijden (glass-engraving / -painting and copperplate engraving).119

b Manier

Typical of Van Mander’s usage is the occurrence of the term manier in chapter 2, stanza 9 of the Grondt:

Therefore, ‘twere good to find an accomplished Master
From the start, in order to accustom oneself to a good manner
And learn the sure, firm foundations
Of disposition, handling, contour, projection,
And to become familiar with sound placement of lights and shadows,
By subtly drawing where the light strikes,
First with Coal, then with Chalks and Pens,
Such that one may hardly see hard, robust strokes anywhere but where the shadows fall.120

Manier (in Italian, maniera) is the “manner of hand” characteristic of a given master, either conferred by nature as an expression of that master’s innate spirit or assimilated and cultivated through the practice of imitation. According to the Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae, manier or its cognate wijse, signifies “mode, manner, usage, or custom” (in French, “mode, maniere, usage, et coustume”; in Latin, “mos, modus, ratio, ritus, usus, qualitas, gestus”). A closely related term is handeling[h] (handling), used by Van Mander to denote a master’s distinctive method of manipulating the tools of art—pen and ink, burin and copperplate, brush and pigment, etc. The Thesaurus defines handeling as maniement (handling, manipulation) in French, as tractatus or attrectatio (handling, treatment) in Latin, but also contrectatio (appropriation of a thing to one’s self), which corollary definition associates handeling with imitative practice.121 Amongst the Northern masters in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, who apprentice themselves to a competent master, learning his pictorial manner, Hendrick Goltzius provides an exemplary case, even though the negotiations leading to his apprenticeship were protracted and complex. His father arranges for a two-year stay with the engraver Dirck Volckertsz. Coornhert, which founders because Goltzius dislikes the terms of the agreement. Coornhert therefore offers a short-term trial apprenticeship: initially accepted by Goltzius, this second arrangement likewise miscarries when Coornhert stipulates that should his student quit, he must promise never to study with another engraver. Upon learning that Goltzius, ever assiduous, has continued to practice engraving on his own, Coornhert relents and invites him to Haarlem; here “he delighted in Goltzius’s education and beginnings, and often instructed him in the best manner (to his way of thinking) as best he could.”122 The qualified aside, “to his way of thinking,” sets the scene for other occasions when Goltzius, first as a student and then an independent master, continued to explore other manieren / handelingen—i.e., other ways of thinking in / through handling of the tools and media of art—striving fully to imitate them: “And this I have to say about him, that from his youth onward he not only strove to follow the beauty or various forms of Nature, but also accustomed himself wonderfully to counterfeiting the various manners of hand (handelingen) of the best masters.”123 Van Mander utilizes Bartholomeus Sprangher to furnish a telling counterexample: his natural gifts gradually emerge in spite of many abortive efforts to attach himself to a worthy master.124 He first apprentices to Jan Mandijn, who dies after eighteen months, before the boy has been fully trained; he transfers to the workshop of Gillis Mostaert who dies two weeks later, and then to the workshop of Cornelis van Dalem, under whom he learns to paint landscapes but no figures. Moving to Paris, he attaches himself to a former student of Giulio Clovio, an illuminator named Marcus, who sets him to work copying crayon drawings but neither cultivates his powers of invention nor teaches him to paint anything but miniatures. So, he becomes the assistant of another master (unnamed) who, though he specializes in large devotional panels, proves to be quite mediocre. Tasked with painting such a devotional scene but otherwise left to fend for himself, he first experiments with charcoal and chalk on blue paper, designing a Resurrection of Christ that he then translates into paint with surprisingly good results. Soon after, he leaves this new master and moves to Milan where a painter from Malines teaches him how to paint in watercolor on canvas; his next stop is Parma where, still desperate to find a master whose manner is worthy of emulation, he engages himself to paint for Bernardo Suwari, erstwhile pupil of Antonio da Correggio. This affiliation, too, proves short-lived, and so, Sprangher journeys to Rome where by a chain of fortuitous circumstances he receives a papal commission to produce modelli in pen and ink for a Passion series to be painted on copper: the pressure of this unexpected commission forces Sprangher, who had previously drawn only in charcoal, chalk, or crayon, to master pen, ink, and wash. The upshot of this sequence of vicissitudes is to argue that Sprangher’s characteristic manier / wijse / handelingh, which Van Mander closely associates with his skillful handling of the pen and repeatedly praises for his “figures’ very ingenious movement” (“seer aerdighe roerentheyt der beelden”), “most graceful action,” and “Apelles-like grace” (“gracelijckste actie” and “Apellische gratie”), issued from the promptings of gheest, largely independent of any master’s influence.125 Divinely infused by Nature, responsive to the pressures of circumstance, and honed by self-reliant labor, his “Venus-like picturing” (“Venussche Pictura”) is sui generis.126

c Uyt zijn selven doen

This category of image or, more precisely, of image-making is complementary to the paired rubrics nae[r] t’leven (after the life) and uyt den gheest (from the spirit), utilized ubiquitously in the Grondt and the three sets of “Lives.” Its first explicit appearance occurs in Grondt, chapter 2, stanza 15:

‘Tis wondrous, the grace one sees Nature
Pour forth into life, from every side;
Here everything can be found that we might lack in ourselves:
Action, attitude, fine foreshortening,
Contour, cross-contour, to gladden us.
By doing and redoing over time,
One attains the experience of a revered Master:
But one must also learn to fashion from out of oneself.127

Van Mander means that one must learn to invent from out of whole cloth, fashioning new figures adapted from the ones impressed upon memory through the practice of drawing after the life. “Uyt zijn selven doen” (fashion from out of oneself) corresponds to Vasari’s “fare da se” or, simply, da se, which refers to the artist’s ability to produce figural attitudes by mobilizing the fantasia (imaginative faculty).128 As he states in Vite, 1:172, the imagination will become an inventive source of attitudes only if the memory has first been plentifully stocked with prototypes drawn dal vivo (after the living model); then “can attitudes in any position be formed from out of one’s imagination (‘di fantasia da se’).”129 Vasari, although he describes drawing after the living model as crucial to the process of artistic formation, ultimately considers it a mere corollary to the more important process of cultivating the fantasia.130 By contrast, in chapter 2, stanza 15, line 3, Van Mander ascribes to nature everything the self might otherwise lack, thus grounding line 8’s reference to “fashioning from out of oneself” in the generative practice of drawing after nature.

The catchphrase “uyt zijn selven doen” may be connected to the Italian aphorism “ogni dipintore dipinge se” (every painter paints himself), codified by Poliziano and Savonarola amongst others, and ascribed by Vasari, in Vite 7:260, to Michelangelo under the form “ogni pittore ritrae se medesimo” (every painting portrays himself).131 Unlike Vasari, and not unlike Leonardo, who saw nature as a corrective to solipsistic judgment, Van Mander views working from out of one’s self as complementary, even beholden, rather than antagonistic to nature. He makes this patently clear in the “Life of Albrecht Dürer,” where, praising the subtle mastery of line (“aerdigh van teyckeningh”) on view in the master’s engravings, he nearly elides the distinction between nature and self as sources of art: “It is very much to be admired how many properties of our Art he brought forth or discovered from out of Nature, or as if from out of himself, as much in concinnity of actions, in ordonnance, as in smoothness and beauty of fabrics, as seen in some of his last Marian images, wherein one observes a fine magnificence of disposition, great even lights beside profound shadows, and uniform darks, in the rich fabrics.”132 Quite differently, “ogni dipintore dipinge se,” construed as a doctrine of art, identifies the fantasia as the key source of each artist’s distinctive approach to “i modi, le arie, le maniere, i tratti” (Vite 2:80). Following from the Vite, Gian Paolo Lomazzo’s two treatises on art, Trattato dell’arte della pittura, scoltura et architettura (Milan: Paolo Gottardo Pontio, 1584) and Idea del tempio della pittura (Milan: Paolo Gottardo Pontio, 1590), postulate that the distinctive properties of pictorial style—proportion, motion, color, light, perspective, composition, and [ideal] form—vary from master to master according to temperamental and complexional differences determinative of their respective personae (i.e., da se).133 Although Van Mander may have adopted Lomazzo’s conception of a canon of masters various in artistic excellence but equal in attainment, throughout the Grondt he displays far less interest than either Lomazzo or Vasari in the cultivation of individual handelinghen or manieren. Occasional asides, such as chapter 2, stanza 9, form a rare exception to this tendency.134

On the other hand, in Schilder-Boeck, Books IIIV, the biographies of the Ancient, Italian, and Netherlandish masters, Van Mander consistently pays close attention to the distinguishing traits constitutive of pictorial manner, though even here the emphasis falls less on how such manner is constituted than on the importance of finding a master whose art is worthy of imitation, if one wishes eventually, by diligent application to the foundational practices of schildercont, to formulate a manner of one’s own. When a good master is lacking, as witness the case of Abraham Bloemaert, natural aptitude combined with diligent application inevitably brings such a manner to light. Punning on the artist’s name, Van Mander praises him for his “painterly floriferous quality” (“schilderachtigen bloem-aerdt”), confected mysteriously: “In short, Bloemaert has applied himself so diligently to art that he has become a supreme master (though one might well say) without a master. Therefore, when telling off his pupils to admonish them to diligence, he sometimes said: I wish that once in my life I could have seen a good master painting, or handling colors, so that I could have learned their manner or technique by observing them.”135

The mutually supplementary practices of picturing after nature’s naked truth and from out of oneself are analogous to a similarly foundational pair of criteria that proliferates throughout Book IV: picturing nae[r] t’leven (after the life) and uyt den gheest (from the mind, spirit). In the “Life of Jacques de Gheyn,” for example, the young master engraver, striving to fortify his understanding of “all the rational principles of art [i.e., of painting]” (“alle redenen der Const”), exercises himself on both fronts.136 Book IV explores various inflections of nae[r] t’leven: in the “Life of Cornelis Cornelisz.” (fol. 292v), when combined with the term conterfeyten (to portray attentively, with descriptive precision), as in the phrase “nae t’leven gheconterfeyt,” it refers to Cornelis’s ability to capture the living model’s every particularity, including his characteristic “condition, actions, and inclinations” (“actien, hun conditien, oft gheneyghtheden”). This usage, which occurs in a long passage on the Officers of the Civic Militia Company of St. George (1599), recalls the expressly evidentiary connotations of the term imago contrafacta (counterfeit or, better, substitutive image, i.e., capable of standing in place of the thing portrayed).137 Elsewhere in the same “Life,” nae[r] t’leven applies to drawings made after antique statues (presumably casts) that Cornelis studied locally; here the phrase denotes the exacting task of portraying something at first hand as well as the exactingly descriptive work of art that results. Van Mander thus uses nae[r] t’leven to signify that a drawing, having been made in the presence of the thing drawn, in fact records the act of viewing that very thing.138

In chapter 9 of the Grondt, “On Cattle, Animals, and Birds,” painting nae[r] t’leven is exemplified in stanzas 35–46, not only by reference to Jacopo Bassano’s many paintings of farmyard animals but also by a series of ekphrastic epigrams, paraphrased from the Greek Anthology, on the ancient sculptor Myron’s famous bronze statue of a heifer. In this context, nae[r] t’leven means not “after the life” but “to the life”; it registers the degree to which a sculptural or pictorial image, like an expertly wrought ekphrasis, has made the thing it represents vividly present to the beholder, producing an altogether persuasive effect of living presence.139

Van Mander grants “teyckenen nae t’leven” (drawing after the life) an authority equivalent to drawing after ancient sculpture, in the “Life of Cornelis Cornelisz.” (fol. 292v), where he writes: “Meanwhile Cornelis greatly abetted his impellent nature by much drawing after the life with exceptional diligence, to this end searching out the best and most beautiful, affective and lively antique figures (“beste en schoonste roerende en levende antijcke beelden”), of which here in our homeland we have more than enough, for no exercise surer or better can be found if one’s judgment is perfect at distinguishing between the most beautiful and the [merely] beautiful.”140 This passage has been read as a reference to drawing after works of ancient art, available locally, whose liveliness shores up their status as a second nature, perfected in its lineaments; moreover, as P.J.J. van Thiel argued, the fact that Van Mander applies the phrase nae t’leven to this particular imitative exercise indicates that the term leven refers not simply to the living model but more widely to any object of imitation that is portrayed in that object’s presence.141 Hessel Miedema instead asserted that Van Mander, who tends strictly to differentiate between leven (nature) and const (art), here refers wittily to the human models selected by Cornelis for their beauty rivaling the perfection of ancient statuary.142 In point of fact, the two readings can to some extent be reconciled, though perhaps at the cost of Miedema’s categorical distinction between nature and art: Van Mander, in referring to living models, treats them as if they were works of art—antiquities in the flesh, one might say, so that “teyckenen nae t’leven” becomes indistinguishable from drawing after the antique. On this reading, the phrase nae t’leven stretches to encompass both lively antiquities and living figures whose beauty is so fine that it appears veritably antique. Van Mander’s statement, far from insistently placing nature and art at odds, ambiguates them, so that they can be seen inextricably to turn on the entangled relation between leven and const, a relation later underscored by the epigrams in praise of Myron’s lifelike heifer in chapter 9.143 A similar process of ambiguation takes place at the start of “Life of Jan van Scorel, Painter,” where the citizens of ancient Rome and the marble and bronze statues portraying them are inferred to be virtually interchangeable, so lively are the statues, so statuesque the people: “It is known that in earlier times the chief among towns, most beautiful Rome—while still flourishing with prosperity and rich in inhabitants—overflowed with people to the same measure as it was rich in art-full, excellent statues, or to put it a better way: marbles and bronzes which were, through great ingenuity, as if naturally transformed into exquisite and most beautiful human and animal bodies.”144

d Welstandt

Van Mander’s term welstandt (concinnity, decorum, well-being) signifies “good bearing” or “demeanor,” and connotes in this context the well-ordered attitude, the good disposition, of a human figure that conforms, at least loosely, to the rules set forth in what follows as well as in chapter 6, “Wtbeeldinghe der Affecten, passien, begeerlijckheden, en lijdens der Menschen” (Portrayal of the Affects, passions, desires, and sorrows of Persons). The term can also be applied to a picture as a whole, in which case it might best be translated “concinnity.” The noun welstandt derives from the verbal phrase “Het staet wel,” which the Dictionarium tetraglotton uses to translate the Latin impersonal verb decet (it beseems, is fitting, suitable).145 The same source also associates this phrase with decor, defining it as “beauty, refinement, the grace that a person has when everything he says or does is fitting” (“schoonheyt, frayheyt, de gracie die een mensch heeft, als alle tghene dat hy seyt oft doet, hem wel staet”).146 The Dictionarium gives as a French cognate for decor the quality of grace possessed by a person whose every word and action “suits him well” (“luy sied bien”). The allied verb decoro is defined “to decorate, honor, embellish” in French (“décorer, honorer, embellir”) and “to honor, fashion by art, and embellish” in Dutch (“vereeren, vercieren, verfraeyen”).147 Furthermore, the Dictionarium translates decorum as “goede gracie” and “bonne grace” (good grace) and also as honnêteté. The latter term derives from honneste, which Randle Cotgrave, A Dictionarie of the French and English Tongues (London: Adam Islip, 1611) renders as “comelie, seemelie, handsome, well befitting.”148 The Etymologicum teutonicae linguae largely concurs with the Dictionarium, defining wel-stand as both decorum and salus (well-being).149 In calling the “virtue of beauty” “decorous and artful” (“schoonheyt, welstandich en constich”), Van Mander thus plays upon the richly complementary lexical associations amongst beauty, artifice, and the mutual attunement of a person’s parts that results in an effect of good grace and comeliness.

As chapter 4 progresses, and especially in stanzas 35–40, he assimilates welstandt more explicitly to the rhetorical doctrine of decorum: namely, that the argument and style of a speech must be appropriate to the audience and occasion it serves, whatever branch of oratory one is exercising—judicial, legislative, or epideictic—and whether one is speaking about the past, future, or present. So, too, argues Van Mander, when a person’s constitutional strengths and temperament, and her or his age, gender, and inclinations are legibly bodied forth so that the person’s appearance, attitude, and action cohere into an accordant whole, then welstandt will be seen perfectly to have been expressed.

Aristotle was the chief source of the principle that the arrangement of the parts of a speech must be governed by propriety of style: “Style is proportional to the subject matter when neither weighty matters are treated offhand, nor trifling matters with dignity, and no embellishment is attached to an ordinary work....Character also may be expressed by the proof from signs, because to each class and habit there is an appropriate style.”150 Cicero in De oratore III.lv.210–212 specifically attaches the doctrine of appropriateness to the discernible qualities of human figures; if the speech is fitted both to the character of the person speaking and to the character of his audience, then by dint of decorum it will prove persuasive: “Although one point at least is obvious, that no single kind of oratory suits every cause or audience or speaker or occasion....The audience is also important—whether it is the lords or the commons or the bench; a large audience or a small one or a single person, and their personal character; and consideration must be given to the age, station, and office of the speakers themselves, and to the occasion.”151

Van Mander’s term welstandt more directly derives from Gualtherus Rivius’s use of the term Wohlstand in Der furnembsten, notwendigsten, der gantzen Architectur anghörigen Künst (Nuremberg: Iohan Petreius, 1547) and Vitruvius-Teutsch: Zehen Bücher von der Architecture und küntslichen Bauen (Nuremberg: Walther Hermann Ryff, 1548).152 The semantic inflections of Wohlstand, as applied to human form and figural grouping, vary according to context and include eurythmy or charm (venustas), decorous beauty (decens pulcritudo), consonance amongst bodily parts and between these parts and the body as a whole (symmetria and concinnitas), and ordering and positioning of persons according to social convention (distributio and decorum). In Der furnembsten … Künst, eygentlicher Bericht, fol. viii r, Rivius states, with reference not simply to human figures but to other elements of the Histori, that copia and vilfaltigkeit (variety) confer Wohlstand on a painting. Diverging from Dürer, who adverts to Wohlstand in the Vier Bücher von menschlicher Proportion of 1528, Rivius associates Wohlstand not with Gewalt (force) but with Zier und Schein (graceful appearance and ornament).153 The same holds true of Van Mander, whose use of welstandt generally accords with Rivius’s usage, but whose understanding of bodily consonance, symmetry, and beauty more closely aligns with Lomazzo’s promotion and codification of the figura serpentinata.154

Throughout Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, Van Mander inflects the meaning of welstandt and its verbal form wel staen by combining these terms with associated criteria of pictorial excellence, such as “met cleen moeyte” (“Life of Hieronymus Bosch,” fol. 216v: effortlessly), “schoonheyt en vriendlijcke gracelijckheyt” (“Life Jan Scorel, Painter,” fol. 234v: beauty and amiable grace), or “soet en vloeyende” (“Life of Michiel Coxcie,” fol. 258v: sweet and flowing). Most of these terms link welstandt to ancillary notions of grace and fluency, in both figural pose and pictorial handelingh (manner, handling). In the “Life of Pieter Aertsen,” on the other hand, welstandt connotes something like “visual coherence”: referring to the extant cartoon of Aertsen’s lost altarpiece of the Nativity once displayed on the high altar of the Nieuwe Kerk, Van Mander praises it for “having been executed in a manly and masterful way,” “with boldly assured brushstrokes” that, when “viewed from afar,” confer welstandt on the “nude figures and everything else” (fol. 244r: “Meesterlijck en Manlijck aenghetast, de naeckten en anders veel ten eersten op de teyckeninghe opgedaen wesende … en soo aendachtich, dat het van verre … hadde eenen uytnemenden grooten welstandt”).155

By and large, then, the term welstandt describes well-fashioned figures and their integral attributes and appurtenances: for example, Van Mander refers to Van Scorel’s “welstandt der beelden” (fol. 234r: good grace [of his] figures) and, in the Coxcie passage just cited, sings the praises of his Vrouw-beelden (female figures); painted in a sweet and flowing manner, the welstandt is further enhanced by elegant, impeccably fine adornments (fol. 258v: “net en suyver in cieraten”). But welstandt can equally be applied to landscape, as in the case of “several landscapes subtle/artful in welstandt,” to be found in the collection of Hendrick Louwersz. Spieghel in Amsterdam (“Life of Hans Soens,” fol. 288v: “eenighe Landtschappen van aerdighen welstandt”). In Grondt, chapter 8, “On Landscape,” it signifies the “well-being” or “good order” of a landscape in which foreground, middle-ground, and background flow seamlessly, one into the other, like ocean waves (stanza 20). Welstandt also connotes the effect, condition, or experience of “well-tempered pleasure” that results from a landscape replete with features—“Cities, Buildings, Mountains, without circumspection, or any other thing” (“Steden, Huysen, Berghen, onbehoedich, oft ander dinghen”)—but not superabundantly (stanza 23). In chapter 9, “On Cattle, Animals, and Birds,” the same sense of “well-being” or “well-beseeming” is applied to the depiction of such creatures (stanza 1, marginal gloss). In chapter 10, “On Fabrics or Drapery,” this sense transfers to the portrayal of fabrics, the bodies they drape, and the nude forms they allow the viewer to intuit (stanza 1 and marginal gloss). And in chapter 12, “On Painting Well, or Coloring,” welstandt refers to the optimal state of a particolored cartoon, in which hues are heightened and deepened so subtly anent the ground color that “projection, depth, volume, relief, sweetness, flowing grace, transition, [and] recession” (“afsteken, diepen, verheffen, ronden, soeticheyt, vloeyen, verdrijven, verschieten”) become readily observable (stanza 15). Later in the same chapter, the term resurfaces to indicate that netticheyt (imperceptibly fine, precise brushwork) is laudable so long as “concinnity” or, alternatively, “coherence” in the sense of visual legibility, is retained from whichever vantage point the viewer selects, whether near or far.156

e Leven and Gheest

Chapter 8, “On Landscape,” adduces the term gheest, in stanza 37 (especially the closing couplet), to identify those objects of imitation whose liveliness and changeability make them impossible to picture by rote:

But were you to test every manner,
After the life or after [another master’s] pleasant handling,
Constantly practicing on paper prepared [with a colored ground],
Fashioning leaves with swirls of ink wash,
Hoping in time to reach a good outcome:
Yet ‘twould not seem, like [drawing] the muscular body, a teachable art:
For leaves, hair, the sky, and drapery,
That is all spirit, and the spirit teaches how to fashion them.157

“Leaves, hair, sky, and drapery” (“bladen, hayr, locht, en laken”) are the respective topics of chapters 8–10, which can therefore be said to focus on pictorial subjects that, being spirited in character, must be rendered uyt den gheest (from the spirit). Whereas chapter 8 concerns the depiction of “leaves” and “sky,” chapter 9, “On Cattle, Animals, and Birds,” concentrates mainly on hayr (hair) or, rather, “fur,” and chapter 10, “On Fabrics and Drapery,” on laken (drapery). The Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae (fol. P3 recto) defines gheest as esprit (spirit) in French, spiritus, animus (mind, spirit, in the specific sense of the mnemonic faculty of thought) in Latin. Kiliaan, Etymologicum Teutonicae linguae (148) likewise defines gheest as spiritus, animum, renders the adjectival form gheestigh as ingeniosus (ingenious), solers (skillful), and argutus (subtle, lively, keen-witted), and provides aerdigh (subtle) as a synonym. These definitions derive from the scholastic, neo-Aristotelian lexicon codified by Thomas Aquinas in Scriptum super libros sententiarum magistri Petri Lombardi (Treatise on the Books of Sentences of Master Peter Lombard), which remained commonplace in the sixteenth and early seventeenth centuries, as the entries in the Thesaurus and Etymologicum indicate. Aquinas closely associates spiritus with the quality of subtilitas (subtlety) and, as a result, applies the term to both material and immaterial things, i.e., to corporeal things so fine in substance or workmanship that they appear virtually incorporeal, and to spiritual things whose fineness is yet capable of material expression.158 Gheest and gheestigh, in Van Mander’s usage, retain this liminal sense of matter subtly constituted, of spirit finely endued with matter: leaves, hair, sky, and drapery are “all spirit” in the sense that their pictorial expression hinges on subtle, lively artifice (in Latin, argutia), born of practical skill (solertia) combined with ingenuity (ingenium). Gheest, so conceived, operates in the realm of animal spirits—the pneumata that enliven and regulate bodily faculties, such as sense perception, and the cognitive operations of the human mind—and at its subtlest, through the activity of sight, known as the “visual spirit,” mediates access to the subtlest spiritual motions, which are almost indistinguishable from the substance and motions of the soul.159

Van Mander’s conception of gheest thus accords with the early modern lexicography of gheest, which hovers between the French esprit and the Latin ingenium, partaking of the former’s connotations of “spirit, wit, vivacity, inclination” and of the latter’s of “genius, ingenuity, natural capacity.”160 What distinguishes his usage is the ease with which he folds gheest as a term for the faculty of spirit, into gheest as an attribute of handelingh (handling, manner of hand, mode of rendering). Nowhere is this more evident than in his discussion of the painter Girolamo Muziano, whose landscapes he came to know in Rome (as also through the prints of Cornelis Cort). In Grondt, chapter 8, stanza 24 he ranks Muziano’s landscapes on a par with those of Tintoretto and Titian, and he later justifies this high praise in “On various Italian Painters, who were in Rome during my time there, between 1573 and 1577,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book III, where he celebrates Muziano’s distinctive manner of landscape painting, his trees above all, whose leaves, distinctively rendered with a signature “fine stroke,” closely resemble the “drawn form” (teyckeninghe) and “good manner of foliage” (“goede maniere van bladen”) of the chestnut tree. Van Mander claims to be paraphrasing Muziano himself, who purportedly stated that these pictorial qualities of the chestnut had made it his chosen object of imitation: “He said, too, that no trees appealed to him more, or had a better drawn form than Chestnut trees, or a good manner of leaves worthy of imitation.”161 It seems clear, then, that Muziano’s trees must be exemplary of the “good stroke, for the leaves” that Van Mander lionizes in stanzas 36–37, the rendering of which he ascribes directly to gheest and places beyond the scope of rote learning. And yet, on his account, Muziano is heard to assert not only that his singular leafy stroke is like the leaves of the chestnut, but that the natural artifice of the chestnut’s well rendered manner of leaves licenses his choice of it as the tree he imitates most closely. It is as if the distinction between portraying leaves nae[r] t’leven and uyt den gheest has been somehow elided. The curious logic of this elision arises from Van Mander’s conviction that the effect of leven (life, liveliness) after which the painter must strive is sometimes best achieved by working uyt den gheest, especially where leaves (and hair, sky, and drapery) are concerned.

Throughout chapters 8, 9, and 10, it becomes evident that the painter who wishes to portray “leaves, hair, sky, and drapery” must marshal gheest, relying neither upon preliminary wash drawings on colored paper, made nae[r] t’leven (after/to the life), nor upon drawings after the manner of masters skilled at depicting such things. Van Mander is making a twofold point, as the next stanza, on tree leaves, indicates: on one hand, leaves, hair, sky, and drapery are too particularized to be captured in a ratio of one-to-one; on the other, they are too fugitive, in that their position easily changes when the wind blows, when the weather alters, when a person shifts position and her/his clothing adjusts accordingly. And yet his opening remark about the kind of nae[r] t’leven drawing upon which the painter may initially feel inclined to rely strongly implies that the picture painted from gheest will display many of the features associated with drawing nae[r] t’leven: it will represent leaves, hair, sky, or drapery in a plausibly verisimilar way that simulates the look of images made after/to the life, i.e., in a manner both true to nature and prevalent in effect, as if the object were vividly present to the viewer.

In Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, Van Mander often uses the phrase uyt den gheest (from the mind, spirit) in association with nae[r] t’leven or, as in the “Life of Cornelis Ketel” (fol. 274v), with allied terms such as conterfeyten (portray, counterfeit, often with specific reference to a person’s countenance). He clearly saw the two processes as complementary, but his usage also indicates that it was contemporary masters above all who had learned to harness gheest as a pictorial resource. The phrase uyt den gheest features just once in part one of Book IV, on masters whose lives he wrote posthumously, whereas it frequently appears in part two, “Lives of admired, living Netherlandish Painters,” which begins with the “Life of Hans Vredeman de Vries.” In the “Life of Frans Floris” (fol. 242v), facility at “ordering and painting uyt den gheest” (“t’ordineren en schilderen uyt den gheest”) arises from workshop practices enforced by Floris: journeymen painters were expected to follow through on the master’s chalk underdrawing; after applying the layer of dead-coloring (i.e., the main divisions of light and dark and the underpainted colors), they then executed the heads, modeling them on Floris’s stock of tronien (painted head studies).162 Having learned how to order and paint on his account, through close study of their master’s ordinantie and tronien, they advanced to imitating him uyt den gheest in a confident manner (“hier door creghen sy stoutheyt en handelinghe” [thereby they acquired boldness and (sure) handling]). As Van Mander avows (fol. 242r), if “many of the best masters in every kingdom, land, and principality were [Floris’s] disciples,” this is because they had inculcated what his workshop regime helped them to memorize.163 In the “Life of Bartholomeus Sprangher” (fol. 269r–v), Van Mander uses uyt den gheest similarly in a telling anecdote: during Sprangher’s early years as an apprentice, his then master, a mediocre French painter, ordered him to paint a scene from sacred history (“historie van devotien”); he handed him three prints, asking that he choose one as his template, not copying it but working uyt den gheest (paraphrasing it from memory). Sprangher instead responds by painting a Resurrection of Christ, designing it after the fashion of his tonal studies drawn on blue paper, in imitation of the chiaroscuro prints of Parmigianino and Floris. The language Van Mander uses to describe this process—“further searching himself to invent something with lights and darks” (“voort by sich selven soeckende, so met hoogen en diepen yet t’inventeren”)—recalls Michelangelo’s apothegm, cited in the “Life of Michelangelo Buonarroti” (fol. 172v), that one must become accustomed to working “from out of oneself” (“uyt zijn selven wat te maken”), and diverges from the French master’s understanding of uyt den gheest.164 In the “Life of Cornelis Ketel” (fol. 274v) immediately after his paired reference to drawing uyt den gheest and conterfeyen, Van Mander distinguishes both practices from Ketel’s conterminous efforts to “paint after his own inventions” (“oock zijn eyghen vindingen te schilderen”).

In the “Life of Jacques de Gheyn” (fol. 294r–v), Van Mander returns to the theme of the complementarity of painting nae[r] t’leven and uyt den gheest: having realized that painting will allow him “to come closer to the life of Nature” (“om t’leven oft de Natuere te verghelijcken”) than did drawing or engraving, he constructs a study grid of colors—“various shades, greens, yellows, blues, reds, flesh colors and other mixtures” (“met verscheyden coleuren, verscheyden graeuwen, groenen, ghelen, blaeuwen, rooden, carnatien, en ander vermengselen”)—and proceeds on this basis to paint a small pot of flowers, then a fuller bouquet in a large glass, painted with “much patience and precision” (“gedult en suyverheyt”), then a charger at life-size, captured by Count Maurice of Nassau at the Battle of Flanders, and finally, a Sleeping Venus and Cupid with Two Satyrs, again at life-size, perfect in the “ordonnance, attitude, proportion, handling, and fluency” of its figures (“ordinantie, steldsel, proportie, handelinghe, en vloeyentheyt”). This progression exemplifies the systematic acquisition of expertise in the full range of verscheydenheyden (varieties of subject) that the history painter must master, not least the complex color, luster, and tender pliancy of human flesh.165 On the rare occasions when Van Mander uses uyt den gheest to mean something like uyt zijn selven maken, he juxtaposes the phrase with the terms “invention” or “to invent,” as in the “Life of Joachim Wtewael” (fol. 296v), where he states that the painter attached himself to a French patron, the bishop of Malo, during his journeyman tour of Italy, painting many things for him, “all uyt den gheest, or after his own invention” (“en al uyt zijnen gheest oft inventie”).

Abraham Bloemaert constitutes a special case: he himself claimed never to have studied with a good master whose handling of colors and manner of painting were worth imitating, as Van Mander reports in the “Life of Abraham Bloemaert” (fol. 297v). Consequently, his self-won distinctive manner which, punning on Bloemaert’s name, Van Mander dubs his “painterly, floral finesse” (“schilderachtigen bloem-aerdt”), is seen to derive from three processes of picturing whereby he trained himself. First, during his youth he exercised himself in conterfeyten, copying drawings by or after Frans Floris and painting a banqueting scene after Dirck Barentsz. and a kitchen scene with oxhead after Pieter Aertsen. Second, during his apprenticeship with a Master Herry in Paris, who gives him no formal instruction, he spends two and a half years drawing and painting uyt den gheest. Finally, after establishing his workshop in Utrecht, he turns intensively to drawing nae[r] t’leven in pen and ink and colored washes (fol. 298r):

Very subtle landscapes by him are to be found in the possession of art lovers, comprising peasants’ cottages, artful and droll, peasant implements, trees, and plots of land, things to be seen in variety and abundance round about Utrecht, which he recorded (geconterfeyt): for he works much after the life, having a very fine way of drawing and handling the pen, afterward adding some colored washes, the end result being exceptionally comely. And just as he is very practiced in every branch of art, so in painting these things he gives them great finesse and beauty, occasionally inserting a bit of sunshine, lowering or fierily sunlit clouds, as the work requires. Herein, too, come cattle, cows, dogs, or suchlike, very naturally done after the life, with a few little histories to boot.166

In this extended passage, conterfeyten and nae[r] t’leven are used interchangeably, while the reference to gracious atmospheric effects added to landscapes painted from nae[r] t’leven drawings indicates that Bloemaert was used to working jointly nae[r] t’leven and uyt den gheest. Moreover, his earlier reliance on conterfeyten can be construed as entirely complementary to, if not precisely identical with, his practice of drawing nae[r] t’leven. Indeed, his habit of drawing after drawings and paintings recalls the instructional practice modeled in the “Life of Cornelis Cornelisz.” (fol. 292v): Cornelis continually improves his gheest and handt by diligently drawing and painting various subjects after the life—a vase of flowers, the officers of the Old Militia Company of Haarlem, and, most tellingly, specimens of ancient sculpture, the expressive life of which enables him judiciously to discriminate amongst the lineaments of beauty (“het schoonste uyt het schoon t’onderscheyden” [to distinguish the most beautiful from the beautiful]).

The terms conterfeyten and nae[r] t’leven are grafted together in the “Life of Michiel Janssen Miereveldt” (fols. 280v and 281r), where Van Mander acknowledges Miereveldt’s natural aptitude for conterfeyten nae[r] t’leven, with specific reference to portraiture. His ability to produce counterfeits after the life first expresses itself in his early mastery of schrjf-const, the art of calligraphy, which requires the penman to assimilate multiple regional hands (i.e., manners of handwriting)—the Dutch, English, French, German, and Italian as well as the Latin, especially chancery cursive—rather than fashioning a novel script. He then graduates to engraving copies after prints by Jan Wierix, so close to their originals that they, too, qualify as epitomes of conterfeyten. Not just prior images but also recognizable handelinghen (manners of handling the stylus or brush) fall within the purview of contefeyten, as Van Mander strongly implies when he next praises Miereveldt’s Judith and Holofernes, engraved or, better, “gehandelt op de manier” (handled in the manner) of Anthonis Blocklandt. Thereupon, Miereveldt apprentices himself to Blocklandt, who teaches him how to paint; it is in this context that conterfeyten nae[r] t’leven shades into painting uyt den gheest, as the following remark makes clear (fol. 281r): “He followed very spiritedly (gheestigh) his master’s handelinghe, in invention, figures, and other things, as I have seen from various works which he, working on his own (‘op zijn selven wrocht’), invented and painted in his youth, and which very much pleased me.”167 Invention on this account issues from conterfeyten after Blocklandt or, more precisely, from the assimilation of Blocklandt’s hand. The same holds true of Miereveldt’s print, Christ and the Samaritan Woman, invented by him (“van zijn eyghen inventie” [after his own invention]) but clearly anchored in imitation of Wierix’s burin-hand (fol. 280v). (This image, it should be noted, exemplifies the mode of ornate historie endorsed in chapter 5, supra, in that it situates the principal figures, Christ and the woman, within a mountainous landscape, makes their faces and hands respectively expressive of speech and attentive listening, and amplifies their encounter by adding numerous witnesses.) Van Mander concludes by stating that Miereveldt, even though he may have missed his true calling as a history painter, has yet shown his mettle as a painter of conterfeytsels, “portraits” that counterfeit a sitter’s likeness; he thus reveals the “virtues and forceful effects” (“deughden en crachten”) particular to this collateral branch of art (by-wegh) (fol. 281r). Such conterfeytsels can make the portrayed person appear fully present in the way that certain nae[r] t’leven pictures depict their subjects to the life, as Miereveldt’s Portrait of Jacques Razet, which is “resemblant, fleshlike, and rendered livingly, spiritedly” (“ghelickende, vleeschachtich, en levende, gheestigh ghedaen”) demonstrates beyond any doubt. Van Mander’s use of conterfeyten and conterfeytsel derives from the codification of the term imago contrafacta to denote a work of art that records a visual fact and fulfills an evidentiary function, verifiably testifying to the existence and appearance of the person or thing portrayed.168 The Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae (fol. K2 recto) defines conterfeyten as namaken (imitate, in the sense of assimilate to), contrefaire (counterfeit) in French, and assimilare, effingere, and induere simulationem alicuius rei (assume the likeness of some thing) in Latin.169

With specific reference to landscape, Van Mander utilizes the phrase nae[r] t’leven to refer both to the depiction of a view seen and rendered after the life and, by implication, also to pictures made after drawings of such views, in “Lives of Hendrick and Marten van Cleef, Painters of Antwerp” (fol. 230r–v). After saying that Hendrick “devoted himself to landscape and travelled to Italy and other countries where he made and portrayed many things and views after the life which he then later used in his works,” Van Mander adds that Hendrick had not actually visited all the places whose towns, ruins, and antiquities he recorded or issued as prints. Instead, he relied on drawings made by Melchior Lorch; in then saying that Hendrick drew “these things after the life, in a most subtle manner,” Van Mander allows his statement to apply jointly to the things and views experienced at first hand and to the drawings by Lorch.170

Van Mander’s remarks about leaves, hair, sky, and drapery recall Lomazzo’s similar comments, in the Trattato dell’arte, about the sure, spirited, and clever hand, the “singular quick grace” necessary for depicting these things or, rather, their motions and reflective properties.171 In particular, what he says about hair likewise applies to leaves, drapery, and “cloudes also in the aire”: their “lightes, lusters, and turninges up … should not be represented to be seene neere hand, but a far of, without the fine stroakes of a pencel, being heightened and lightened with such a singular quick grace.”172 Van Mander’s conviction that gheest-infused handling is essential to the proper portrayal of things as various and volatile as leaves, hair, sky, and drapery tallies with Lomazzo’s warning against excessively scrupulous rendering, which matches these things’ constituent parts stroke for stroke. However, unlike Lomazzo or the Italian theorists who preceded him, Vasari above all, he construes the painting of leaves, hair, sky, and drapery as more geestich by far (ingenious, spirited) than the teachable and therefore codifiable art of figure painting.

f Wel schilderen

The terms wel schilderen (painting well) and coloreren (coloring) are cognates for the Venetian critical categories colorito and colorire; unlike the noun colore, rarely used by Venetian painters and art theorists, colorito and colorire are verbal forms that refer to the active manipulation of tone and hue. Heightened chiaroscuro and saturated color are part and parcel of this manner of painting. As Ludovico Dolce makes clear in L’Aretino, terms such as colorito also advert to brushwork: “And let no one think that what gives coloring its effectiveness is the choice of a beautiful palette, such as fine lakes, fine azures, fine greens, and so on; for these colors are just as beautiful without their being put to work. Rather this effectiveness comes from knowing how to handle them in the proper way.”173 Dolce insists that brushwork should not be so meticulous as to become indiscernible; rather, it should reveal a certain firmness of hand: “It seems to me that what is needed in this context is a certain proper casualness, so that one does not get either too much beauty in the coloring or too high a finish in the figures, but sees in the whole an agreeable firmness of handling.”174 Although the critical categories colorire and colorito alla veneziana carry a strong connotation of vigorous paint handling, Van Mander, in chapter 12, stanzas 19–21 (and elsewhere), even while following Dolce, adapts the terms wel schilderen and coloreren to the usage of Northern masters such as Van Eyck, Dürer, Lucas, and Bruegel, in particular to their coloristic netticheyt (precision).175 Conversely, as becomes evident from his account of Titian’s late works, in stanzas 23–25, even the most conspicuous examples of Venetian coloreren, marked by saturated hues, strong chiaroscuro, and bold brushwork, can be reconciled with Northern pictorial virtues such as the “fastidious” and “precise” paint handling celebrated in stanza 26 (“een suyver manier, end’ een net beginnen”):

Here I should wish to body forth and place before your eyes,
O noble scholars of Painting,
Two opposed yet apposite manners,
Allowing you to direct your eager senses
To the one that most quickens your spirit:
But I would yet advise you first of all to make every effort
Through diligent exercise to acquaint yourself
With a fastidious manner and a precise beginning.176

The diplomat George Gage, in a much-cited letter to Dudley Carleton, dated November 1, 1617, comments on the close relation between the “neatnesse” and “suppleness” (morbidezza) of Jan Brueghel’s paint handling, evident in his flower pieces, which show greater “force,” in Gage’s opinion, than the “cutting and sharpe” floral works of Jacques de Gheyn. He implicitly propounds a paragone of Dutch and Flemish painting, centered on the claim that Brueghel’s loose but precise manner is best suited to imitating the forceful, lively appearance of nature’s floral specimens.177 One of Brueghel’s most fervent collectors, Federico Borromeo, in his Musaeum, makes a similar point when he states that Brueghel “imitated not only the colors of the natural world but also its nimble facilità,” the lively ease with which nature fashions its forms and colors them.178

With regard to the title of chapter 12, “Van wel schilderen, oft Coloreren,” although the use of a comma followed by the conjunction oft (or) indicates that “wel schilderen” (painting well) and coloreren (coloring) are being placed in apposition, the hypothesis, put forward by Achim Stanneck, that these terms might also refer respectively to the two manners of painting defined in stanza 27—the “fine” and the “rough” (“net oft rouw”)—deserves serious consideration.179 Read in this way, “wel schilderen” would denote painting net (precisely, meticulously), whereas coloreren would refer to painting rouw, i.e., more loosely and emphatically. Since Van Mander uses Titian to demonstrate that the latter’s method of painting, if properly mastered, involves judgment and understanding, and requires painstaking care (even though it looks improvised), this reading would ultimately circle back to the one that treats “coloring” and “painting well” as synonyms.

Here as elsewhere in chapters 11–14, Van Mander favors the terms verwe (color) and wel verwen (to color well) over kleur (color) and its variants, even though kleur shares the same root—Latin color—as colore, colorire, and colorito. Verwe, as Karin Leonhard has recently argued, designates color in a material sense: it betokens pigment susceptible to natural and artificial processes of production or manufacture, distillation or refinement, compression or rarefaction, mixture or decoction.180 Kleur, on the other hand, designates color in a perceptual sense, as an optical effect that varies according to value and intensity, and responds to contingent circumstances such as ambient light or shade. It stands to reason that Van Mander, having written the Schilder-Boeck with schilders and liefhebbers (connoisseurs) in mind, would concentrate on color as manipulable pigment; his emphasis on verwe goes hand in hand with his interest in handelingh, the handling of various media, not least paint. In practice, he also considers the optical effects of color but treats them as qualities of verwen.

The larger context for Van Mander’s lengthy excursus on color is his argument, set forth in Books II, III, and IV of the Schilder-Boeck, that just as there were different regional schools of art amongst the Ancients—namely, the Ionian, Sicyonian, and Attic—so now there are three great schools: the Netherlandish, Italian, and Venetian: “For all painting was at first done either in the Hellenic, that is, in the Greek manner, or in the Asiatic: but since Eupompus was a Sicyonian, one set the Hellenic aside and henceforth spoke only of painting done in the Ionian, the Sicyonian, and the Attic manners, which was (as I deem) comparable to what one now says, namely, in the Netherlandish, Italian, Venetian manners.”181 In the “Life of Jacopo Palma,” Van Mander elaborates upon this taxonomy of regional styles, stating that whereas the painters of Florence and Rome are known as “studious practitioners of teyckenconst” (“Teycken-const oeffendende studiose”), those of Venice have long been famous as “exceptional colorists” (“treflijcke coloreerders”) and “well-coloring Painters” (“welverwende Schilders”), and that in this arena of schildercont, Venice is nonpareil.182 In the “Life of Hendrick Goltzius,” he demonstrates how alluring Venetian (and Lombard) coloring is; it has the power to inspire even a master like Goltzius, the foremost Northern practitioner of teyckenconst, to refashion himself as a painter on the Venetian model. As Van Mander puts it:

Goltzius, coming from Italy, had imprinted in memory the fine Italian painting, as if in a mirror, always seeing it before him wherever he went: now taking pleasure in the sweet grace of Raphael, the proper fleshiness of Correggio, the advancing lights and receding, blended darks of Titian, the beautiful silks and well painted stuffs of Veronese, and other Venetians, so that local works no longer satisfied him fully. It was a joy to [other] painters, a source of nourishment, to hear him speak about such things: for his every word was a glowing flesh-tint, a glowing shadow, and [full of] other such rare, little heard-of tales.183

In closing with four chapters on color, Van Mander accentuates the paradigmatic status of Venetian wel verwen and encourages his compatriots to master the art of coloreren, on the example of masters such as Dirck Barendszoon, who affiliated himself to Titian; Peter Vlerick, who collaborated with Tintoretto; and Goltzius, who assimilated a slew of Venetian handelinghen.184

5 Ekphrastic Usage in the Schilder-Boeck

The subsequent two sections of this introductory essay explore two further characteristic features of the Grondt: the why-and-wherefore of the many ekphrases (verbal descriptions of pictorial images) on which Van Mander centers his analyses of schilderconst; and his hybridized conception of history and landscape as mutually entangled pictorial types that engage the beholder by operating at the threshold between visual description and visual deception. To begin, let us consider his distinctive take on the relation between ekphrastic text and image or, more precisely, on the poetics of ekphrastic image-making, both in word and image. Van Mander’s ruling impulse throughout the Schilder-Boeck is to treat the artes (liberal arts) and the pictorial arts of painting, glass-engraving / -painting, and copperplate engraving as sister-arts, and to defend the art of picturing as fundamental, indeed as a crucial source that inspires and instrumentalizes every art and science that traffics in images. In this widest sense, the term schilderconst can be defined as the art of image-making, the principles of which underlie both the literary and the visual arts, rhetorica/poësis and pictura; but schilderconst, defined more narrowly, as we have seen, also refers to the art of painting, which is practiced by the mind, eye, and hand in unison, and expressed in and through a wide array of handelinghen (manners of hand).185 As we shall see, Van Mander moves away from the neo-scholastic, neo-skeptical paradigm of the disputatio artium (dispute of the arts), substituting for it a kind of harmonia artium that embraces all image-based consten (arts) and places them tout court under the sign of schilderconst.186

By the later sixteenth century, after the publication of Benedetto Varchi’s Due lezzioni and the republication of Vasari’s Vite (1568) under the joint auspices of the Accademia Fiorentina and the newly founded Accademia del Disegno, this ekphrastic practice of comparison across media—both by the artist and by the reader-viewer—had come to be codified as a philosophical exercise. Within humanist circles and academic societies, this procedure, based as it was on examining a topic in utramque partem (from this side and that, from all sides), came to be known as the disputatio atium or, in Italian, the disputa delle arti.187 The notion that reciprocal contestation is a crucible in which the arts are tested and tempered had a broad spectrum of applications—not only to painting and rhetoric/poetics, but also to painting and sculpture, painting and printmaking, as well as venturing farther afield, to rhetoric/poetics and philosophy, law and medicine, law and theology, medicine and architecture, or, circling back to the visual arts, to governing principles such as graphice/disegno and colorito.188

Van Mander notably diverges from this mock-combative mode of comparison. The Preface to the Grondt sets the stage for the book’s approach to the consonance of the arts:

The very restorative, inspiriting noble art of Painting, the natural nursemaid of all virtuous Arts and sciences (as Scholars well-versed in letters amply know) was once held in high honor and estate by the greatest Lords and men of the highest learning: indeed, so much esteemed by the ancient wise Greeks that in the time of the artful Painter Pamphilus they placed her in the same degree and on a par with the other liberal Arts. But whether in or through this association our exceptional art of Painting now bestows through her worthy presence or company a greater honor upon the other Arts than she formerly received from association with them, what I feel about this I shall gladly keep quiet, that I not be chided by reproving eyes, or badly thanked, and in order not to foment many a dispute. However, it is not to be gainsaid that she is well worthy of the place from which no one has ever cast her out, and that by rights she may indeed be called liberal.189

Ekphrases play a major role throughout the Schilder-Boeck: Van Mander relies upon them to evaluate the practice of schilderconst, publicize epitomes of the art, and position it in relation to its sister arts. The term ekphrasis refers to one of the key figures of speech and thought, which was appreciated as a powerful instrument of affect and argumentation; both functions—stirring the emotions and putting forward an argument—were treated as criteria when comparing the respective merits of verbal and visual description as complementary methods of image-making. In the Pseudo-Cicero’s Rhetorica ad Herennium (formerly attributed to Cicero himself), these two functions—affective and argumentative—are construed as the figure’s most important tasks. The Pseudo-Cicero treats ekphrasis under two heads—demonstratio (ocular demonstration) and descriptio (vivid description)—consistently attaching it to the arousal of strong emotion and the exposition of consequences:

It is Ocular Demonstration when an event is so described in words that the business seems to be enacted and the subject to pass vividly before the eyes. This we can effect by including what has preceded, followed, and accompanied the event itself, or by keeping steadily to its consequences or the attendant circumstances …. Through this kind of narrative, Ocular Demonstration is very useful in amplifying a matter and basing on it an appeal to pity, for it sets forth the whole incident and virtually brings it before our eyes.190

So, too, vivid description elucidates the outcomes, often adverse, of an action, making them clearly visible, for the purpose of stirring indignation, pity, or some other emotion.191 Here the focus falls not only on figural action but also encompasses attendant circumstances (“rebus circumstantibus”), i.e., all that which surrounds or circumscribes the action, adjacencies such as the specifics of place and time. Van Mander utilizes ekphrasis in this expansive sense, for the vivid description of persons, things, or experiences, but also in its corollary and more particular meaning of the eloquent description of a work of visual art.192

Although Van Mander often elaborates upon critical categories by referring the reader to works of art he has seen, either at first hand or by way of reproductive prints, he prefers to rely on ekphrasis to make these works vividly present; through ekphrasis he not only indicates what these pictures show and how they show it, i.e., their handelingh (medium and manner of rendering), but also endeavors to communicate their affective impact—the pleasure, pain, joy or fear they instill by virtue of the act of beholding. For Van Mander, the threshold between the originating image and the ekphrastic description of said image is exceptionally porous. Constituted by the picture it ostensibly describes, the ekphrasis yet appears constitutive of the picture it renders, as if the two media—visual and verbal—were somehow fully complementary. On this account, there is no rhetorical effect that the pictorial image cannot produce, just as there is no image worthy of note that cannot be reproduced figuratively, by poetic-rhetorical means. Even though Van Mander, who was keenly aware of the properties specific to various media, never entirely collapses image into word or word into image, his poetics of the image is expansive: even as it encompasses every pictorial effect, it also acknowledges that there is no poetic effect beyond the scope of schilderconst (the art of picturing or, in its more particular sense, of painting). Van Mander’s ekphrastic usage presupposes a dialogic relation between text and image, and from there posits the mutuality of the sister arts, painting and poetry, as entirely consonant with the Horatian doctrine ut pictura poesis.

Van Mander, in considering the relation between other sister arts, such as painting and sculpture in the round, emphatically eschews the paradigm of the disputatio atium, nowhere more explicitly than in the life of the ancient Greek painter Apelles.193 Here he asserts that the excellence of painting, like that of sculpture, proceeds in lockstep: the two arts, being complementary, achieve their perfection mutually rather than competitively. This commensal paradigm applies across temporal registers, not only in a particular time and place. The perfected sculptural effects of ancient painting—Apelles’s ability fully to portray three-dimensional figures, for example—can be matched by contemporary painters, just as, conversely, Michelangelo’s superb sculptural works do not so much surpass as match the statuary accomplishments of the Ancients.

Yes, Pliny says about [Apelles] that not only did he outstrip every painter before him, but also every one who came after. So, too, one reads about no one as exceptional as he amongst the Ancients. Then might one think that his works, were they still extant, and were one to place them beside paintings by painters of our modern age, would be nothing special by comparison. But I should quite beg to differ, since one sees free-standing sculptural figures in Rome, in marble and bronze, so excellent that they can still hold their hard heads against the years. Correspondingly, one has never found it to be so, that painting and sculpture in the round give way, the one to the other: instead, whenever one climbs upward, so, too, does the other not fall; on the contrary, they share a like weight in common. Let us now set our modern, free-standing statuary figures next to the best ancient ones: those by Michelangelo himself would be hard pressed to make them yield in art. Now, from what I have read, I should guess that Apelles’s painted figures were rather better than worse than the best of the ancient statues one still sees.194

This is to say that the excellence of Apelles’s art was likely on a par with that of Michelangelo (and vice versa), judging from ancient sculpture, which can function, on this account, virtually as an indexical trace of ancient painting. When Van Mander adds, by way of a coda, that Apelles considered himself inimitable for having bodied forth Venus (loveliness) and Charis (grace) in his pictures, he then offers a contrafactual anecdote: Apelles who, in his overweening pride, was like many an illustrious poet, had in fact claimed to be superior not in kind but only in degree; he thus recognized, though inadvertently, the appreciable grace and charm of his contemporaries’ paintings. Typical of Van Mander, the moral of this story, pace Apelles, is equalizing: “He wished to say that their works, in the way they were made, had a special, exceptional grace, which his own works had.”195

The degree to which picturing / painting and poetry are mutually constitutive for Van Mander, in quite a literal sense, becomes evident when one considers his conception of the origins of schilderconst, set out in Book II of the Schilder-Boeck, “Lives of the Ancient illustrious Painters, Egyptian, Greek, and Roman.” The Preface incorporates two sustained ekphrastic showpieces, the first a lengthy paraphrase of Homer’s famous description of the shield fashioned by Hephaestus for Achilles, at the behest of Thetis, the second a somewhat compressed paraphrase of Virgil’s description of the frieze decorating the temple of Juno in Carthage, which showed scenes from the Trojan war (an aemulatio of the Homeric showpiece). Van Mander’s ekphrasis after Homer serves implicitly to place a Homeric stamp of approval on the various subjects and effects of art designated, defined, and demarcated in the Grondt’s chapters on history, landscape, animals, drapery, reflection, etc. In the Preface to the Grondt, Van Mander, as noted above, dubs these subjects and effects the verscheydenheden (varieties), urging would-be schilders to take command of all of them, but allowing that in practice some will be better at one thing, some at another.196 It is worth quoting the ekphrasis in extenso, since it enables him to claim that Homer’s diction, his power of verbal image-making, like Virgil’s, arises from prior experience of pictures that subsume every kind and degree of image the poet could possibly devise.

So it is indisputable, in view of what the same Homer writes in his Eighteenth Book, that the art of painting was sufficiently well known during the time of the Trojans, for he says that Vulcan had made for Thetis in the shield of Achilles a thousandfold devices / ornaments of Invention, namely, the Heavens, Earth and Sea, the circuit of the Sun, Moon, and Stars, and the various Celestial signs, the Bear, Pleiades, Hyades, and suchlike; then, too, he had fashioned two Cities, with weddings in one of them, and thereby Brides guided by [the light of] burning torches, and people dancing in public, and Matrons looking on, seated at their thresholds, showing admiration in their eyes. Elsewhere People had gathered to hear [lawyers] pleading opposite sides of a death penalty case before the Bench, in which goings-on (‘twere too long to retail here), [Homer] says, were such marvelous affects and actions, that in portraying such things the world’s best Painter would have his hands full. In the other City, he speaks of many episodes of War, the city besieged, and many [city-folk] taking council, making a raid, setting a trap, while Wives and Children, accompanied by old men, defended the city. The ones setting the trap had Mars and Minerva as their Leaders; they lay [in wait] by a river, where they expected to seize the cattle that came there to drink: there came two Herdsmen playing on their Reeden Pipes, giving joyful pleasure to their bleating Flocks, oblivious to the snare set by their enemies who sprang upon them, swords raised, and took hold of the fat Oxen and white Sheep, killing the Peasant Herdsmen. The besiegers, gathered in Counsel, left their meeting and came hither on horseback, where a great battle was fought, and at play amongst them, Tumult, Discord, and Death: here to be seen were great streams of blood, a varied array of actions and apparel. And still did Vulcan (so [Homer] says) fashion a sandy field, thrice ploughed, with earth uncommonly soft and rich, on which many farmers steered their plough-yoked oxen back and forth: to the field’s end there came a Man who refreshed their labour with a cannister of Wine. One saw, too, where they ploughed, how the fresh-furrowed earth was browner than [the earth] turned earlier; this was work[manship] (says he) wholly worth the viewing. Elsewhere [Vulcan] fashioned a fertile field full of yellow-eared corn being mown by Harvesters, the heaps and bundles lying thickly piled amidst the peasants: there some bound the sheaves, and youths laid them up in heaps. Therein the Lord of the field, his hand holding a Scepter or staff, doth seem to revel. In another place, beneath acorned oaks, were others who, having been given the task of preparing a meal, had slaughtered the fattest ox and were making it ready: the Women of the household were bringing the workmen their noontime meal and bread, overstrewn with fine grain. And yet did Vulcan fashion in his Godly work a Vineyard filled full with vines, the black of which was made from blue; he encircled the Vineyard with a ditch, and for entry, there was but a single path, upon which the vignerons came and went. There one saw Maidens and Youths bearing the happy vintage in little baskets woven from twigs. Amongst them was a young man sweetly playing a peasant’s ditty on a harp, and there were others, too, who kept time, clapping their hands joyfully, and dancing to it. Further along, he had fashioned a herd of fat oxen, their foreheads horned, which came lowing, from out their stalls, into a meadow by a fast-flowing river, its banks reedy; four herders brought up the rear, guarding [the herd], and with them nine dogs, fleet of foot. Two Lions had taken from the edge of the bellowing herd a steer that with louder voice brayed for help, and though the herders gave chase and cheered on their hounds, [the dogs], for fear of being bitten, dared not snap at the lions (which went on eating the steer’s innards, and refused to let go); instead, they merely barked, running to and fro. Furthermore, this lame Artifex had fashioned a dale full of white Sheep, also stalls, huts, and other things of this sort. And as Daedalus had formerly done in Crete, in the same manner did [Homer] paint round the beautiful Ariadne a gathering of fresh-faced Youths and fine-haired Maidens, well worth a hundred Oxen, who hand in hand danced a round or a circlet, the youths’ garments finely woven, the weave lustrous as if smeared with oil, the Maidens in long-pleated robes, bearing parti-colored floral wreaths upon their brows.197 Wearing golden daggers at their sides, the Youths, with winged, well-practiced feet, scampered still and anon, like a potter who every now and then lightly turns his wheel. Sometimes paired, straightway they leapt outward, dancing round the others, and sometimes joined together with them: a great concourse of people stood fast, full amused to see who jumped the finest; amongst them were two others who, to the sound of their fine, consummate song, did somersaults. Now may well be surmised from this Shield that painting was properly known in Trojan times: for what Painter is there who should be able to devise all this or bring it to pass in our time? If one were to say that a work such as this was not painted but graven or enameled, whatever it may be, ‘twere impossible to have brought all the things just related into the work if the art of Drawing had not reached a great state of perfection: if its perfection was great, then is it not likely that the art of Painting, already engendered, did exist, as can well be assumed. On the other hand, one reads in the first Book of the Aeneid that Trojan Aeneas, coming upon a Temple built in honor of Juno in Carthage, saw there a painting of the siege of Troy, wherein he observed Priam, Achilles, and many others, portrayed after the life, or rather, done in such a way as to be recognizable to him. Amongst various battles and retreats he saw how Troilus unluckily strode forth against Achilles; elsewhere how this same Achilles, having dragged Hector’s dead body round the walls of Troy, ransomed it for a parcel of gold; and many other particulars, done so well and so artfully that they did much move the heart of Aeneas, causing a great flow of tears to moisten his cheeks. Now may one avow: “Taken as a whole, this is Poetic devising and no History whereby to offer certain proof, being in nowise more sufficient than the previous tale.” This I allow, according to the worthiness of Virgil’s poetry. Yet, even though he did devise, such exceptional Poets, attentive to all things, would have considered as well whether in Trojan times, when Troy fell, painting had already been discovered—else might they be censured for thoughtlessness: the same is to be said about Homer. Having weighed this matter, I think that Homer could have written neither so forcefully nor definitively about the arts of Drawing and of Painting, had they not been known publicly in his time or earlier, and nor could he have [written] so widely about them had they not been highly in fashion and in use, at the very least in his lifetime.198

Remarkable is the way Van Mander appears almost to elide the functions of painting with words and painting with pigments, as in the sudden interpolation of the phrase “the black of which was made from blue” (“welcke swart waren van blaeuwicheyt”) to describe the blue-black soil, as “limned” by Homer, but also to describe Vulcan’s use of blue to render the rich blackness of fertile soil. Equally noteworthy is the clause “as Daedalus had formerly done in Crete,” which can be read as a reference to that which Vulcan has portrayed—a round dance performed in Ariadne’s honor—and how he has portrayed it, namely, with a painterly skill as great as that of the painter Daedalus: hence the marginal gloss stating that Daedalus was an excellent painter who predated Homer.199 In this same clause, the shield is suddenly construed as a painted image, the implication being that Homer’s ekphrasis describes a metal object fashioned so like a painting that it can be designated as such. The conclusion Van Mander draws ascribes to Homer’s ekphrasis an efficacy that wholly derives from painting, even while paradoxically exceeding it, to such an extent that no modern painting imaginable can be thought capable of reproducing Homer’s effects: “For what Painter is there who should be able to devise all this or bring it to pass in our time?” But far from invoking the conventional divide between text and image, Van Mander elides these paired terms: in asking who could “devise all this,” he leaves open the status of “this,” the object of imitation; does he mean Homer’s painterly ekphrasis, or is he referring to the kind of painting upon which Homer’s ekphrastic display is premised, and without which it could not exist? “This” would seem to denote the nexus of ekphrastic text and image: Van Mander inquires whether modern painters are competent to concretize an ekphrasis-like painting, a painterly ekphrasis, like the one traceable from the Shield of Achilles.200 (And in fact, his answer, as his account of Jan and Hubert van Eyck’s Ghent Altarpiece at the start of Book IV makes clear, is a resounding yes, given that this epitome of schilderconst is replete with the full range of verscheydenheden.)201 Van Mander’s version of Homer’s Shield of Achilles makes the synergy of text and image, or more precisely, of painterly text and ekphrastic painting, evident in another respect: if the copia of Homer’s ekphrasis, its amplitude and extraordinary richness of detail, are ascribed to the poet’s attentive relation to Teycken- and Schilder-const, so, conversely, Homer’s ekphrastic power proves indexical to the presence of the linked arts of drawing and painting, both at the time he wrote the Iliad and before then: “Nor could he have [written] so widely about them had they not been highly in fashion and in use, at the very least in his lifetime.” Underlying everything is Teycken-const, the art of drawing, which, on Van Mander’s view, sponsors the relation between the medium of ekphrasis and the visual media—graving, enamel, painting—that function jointly as ekphrastic subject and source.

Moreover, if picturing and poeticizing are appreciated as mutually contingent, this reciprocal relation is echoed by the implied connection between the ekphrastic trope—the schild (shield)—and the process of schild-eren (picturing, painting) figured by that trope.202 The etymology of schilderen, its supposed derivation from schild, speaks to the way in which the shield-trope, though empowered by what Van Mander imagines as the anterior viewing of pictorial images, tacitly testifies to the actual origins of schilderconst in shield-painting. The preliminary poem that initiates Book II, “Etymology, or exposition, wherein the word Painter, or Painting, has its source,” written in the form of a dialogue between Karel van Mander and his brother Adam, makes this case:

See, Adam, worthy brother, I surmise that this word
Schilder (painter), or Schildry (painting), comes forth from Schilden (shields):
For the brave noble heroes in the battle for Troy
Did cause their shields to be embellished with fine figural work,
Likewise the Romans, did indeed hang here and there
Their forefathers’ shields, in public places,
In the town hall, their own halls, or the temples of their gods,
In order to memorialize their ancestors’ pious deeds:
For they themselves stood there aplenty, done after the life.
This Schilde schildren (painting of shields), see, has never ceased to be,
Whereby it followed, came ever more to pass,
To say schildery, and to call us Schilders.203

Read in light of this poem, Van Mander’s paraphrase of Achilles’s shield describes the ur-shield whence painting originates (or the meta-shield whereby the origins of painting are discerned), while also providing the evidentiary basis for Van Mander’s assertion that painting underwrites the pictorial effects of Homer’s ekphrastic tour de force. The Shield of Achilles stands for the origins of painting, without which there could be no ekphrastic shield, but the ekphrasis also licenses or notionally engenders, like a fountainhead, the varieties of schilderconst to be discussed in Books IIIV of the Schilder-Boeck (the Ancient, Italian, and Northern “Lives”), and especially the vescheydenheden analogously practiced by the Ancients and brought to a second perfection by the Dutch, Flemish, and German masters: “Animals, Kitchens, Fruits, Flowers, Landscapes, Buildings, Perspectives, Cartouches, Grotesques, Night Scenes, Fires, Portraits after the life, Seascapes, and Ships, etc.” Painting and ekphrasis prove conjunctly enabling, the one capacitating the other.

The reciprocally vivifying effects of pictura and poësis must operate in tandem, in the form of a painterly poetry or a poetic painting. Van Mander was of course aware that in practical terms, the poet cannot paint a picture, nor the painter write a poem, with the possible exception of poet-painters such as the Poetelijcken Schilder Cornelis Ketel, whom he characterizes as sui generis.204 Indeed, in chapter 1 of the Grondt, Van Mander offers the following advice to aspiring young painters; they should strive to flee Rhetorica, the sweet-featured art of poetry, which is otiose and distracts from the “jealously demanding arts of Picturing” (“der Schilder-consten jalousie”):205

Howsoever merry and diverting [she may be];
Yet I myself have never entirely abandoned her,
Although I fear she has freely diverted me
From the Painter’s path.
She is a beautiful flower: were she to bear fruit,
Or bring wheaten flour into the Kitchen,
Then might one rejoice to practice her.206

The poetic impulse must be curbed if, exercised apart from painting, it threatens to impede the would-be painter’s training or the master’s ability to earn a living. But key to Van Mander’s cautionary remarks is the alternative possibility he imagines of poetry bearing fruit for the painter whose poetic practice of schilderconst—not of painting and poetry as parallel tracks, but of the two together as the “painter’s path”—secures both prosperity and joy.

In truth, the Schilder-Boeck demonstrates some of the forms that the harmonization of painting and poetry might take. For example, the “Life of Hans Bol, Painter of Mechelen” features an extended ekphrasis of Bol’s Daedalus and Icarus, painted in watercolor on canvas, which Van Mander had seen in the collection of his cousin Jan (Fig. 4).207 Taking his cue from Homer’s and Virgil’s many references to workmanship, he insistently foregrounds the picture’s “precision and able handling” (“suyverheyt, en een goede handelinghe”), its “firm and sure manner” (“vaste en ghewisse manier”), the “setting out and working up” of its constituent parts (“aen te legghen, en op te maken”). Here and elsewhere in the “Lives,” ekphrasis does more than describe a pictorial subject and the experience of beholding it: Van Mander also conveys how Bol manipulates his media, moving from handelinghe to schildery, pictorial means to pictorial image, and more than this, he indicates how the making of the image, its made qualities, become legible in and through the act of beholding. And as Ovid, in Book VIII of the Metamorphoses, draws a parallel between the reader of the poem and the audience within it, so Van Mander asks us to consider how our astonished viewing of Bol’s brilliantly rendered picture, in particular its figures and landscape, is analogous to the wonder shown by the shepherd and ploughman who, from within the image, observe the father’s soaring flight and the son’s sudden fall. More than simply avowing Bol’s ability to translate from poetic text to image, Van Mander makes known, by means of ekphrasis, how such a pictorial image comes to be made in close proximity to the poem that inspired it.

I have seen in the possession of my cousin Mr. Jan van der Mander, now Pensionary of Ghent, a large watercolor on canvas, the history or fable of Daedalus and Icarus, in which they fly through the open sky, having escaped their prison. There in the water lay a steep rock, overtopped by a castle, done in a way not to be bettered, so subtle and precise was the rock, moss-covered, washed over, so confident the handling of its many little colors; likewise the castle, its fabric ancient, strange, as if grown from [living] rock: it was all wondrously conceived / contrived (versierigh). Very well handled, too, was the distant landscape, and the water wherein the rock was mirrored, in whose brown shadows one saw the feathers from Icarus’s wings, fallen through the melting of the wax and floating on the water, very naturally. There as well, some beautiful foregrounds, and additional landscape: round about, in front, sat a shepherd with his flock, and a bit farther on, a peasant at his plough, looking up, astonished at this flight, as specified by the text.208

Typical is Van Mander’s use of bewassen (washed over) to refer jointly to the waves lapping at the cliffsides and the washes of watercolor applied to canvas, and his use of the term versierigh (conceived / contrived) to describe both the rock and its painterly handling. By the same token, these many references to handelingh remind the reader, repeatedly, that the ekphrasis responds to a pictorial image and to the traces of pictorial execution legible in its surface. Conversely, the ekphrastic account conjures up this image or, rather, the process that (re)produces it, after the fact, so to speak. The temporal relation between picture and ekphrastic picture is complex, moving from the anterior picture to its rhetorical double, or from the rhetorical picture to the pictorial image, now become posterior to the text. This temporal chiasmus reminds us once again that Van Mander, in his distinctive use of ekphrases, construes text and image as mutually constitutive.

Based in small on the lengthy ekphrastic paraphrases after Homer and Virgil that populate the Preface to Book II, this method of description largely differs from that utilized in Book III, the Italian “Lives,” where Van Mander assimilates Vasari’s more conventional rhetorical technique. Vasari emulates the ekphrastic paradigm codified by Leon Battista Alberti in De pictura, in his description of Apelles’s lost Calumny of Apelles.209 Like Alberti’s, Vasari’s ekphrases focus on composition, figural attitudes, gestures, decorum, and transmission of the affetti, rather than on the relation between making and viewing, rendering and representation.210 Even when Vasari, diverging from the norm, attempts to describe Venetian colore and attends to contingencies of setting and circumstance, his emphasis falls on embodied action and affect. Take Vasari’s ekphrasis of Palma Vecchio’s Transportation of the Body of St. Mark to Venice (formerly displayed in the Scuola Grande di San Marco), an abbreviated paraphrase of which Van Mander incorporated into his “Life of Jacopo Palma il Giovane”: the winds are treated like personified Winds, the waves like malign antagonists, and the picture as a whole judders no less violently than the men on shipboard (Fig. 5).

There was also an elder Jacopo Palma of Venice, who painted in oil a splendid rare work in the chamber where the Scuola di San Marco gathers, a picture wherein the dead body of Saint Mark is brought by ship to Venice. On one side is subtly portrayed a terrifying storm at sea; on the other, very well done, with the utmost care, ships and barques are assaulted by fell winds: likewise, a group of figures in the sky, the varied forms of evil spirits that blow like Winds round the ship, hindering it and its oars rowed strenuously against the raging waves. Here one sees the diligence and dexterity of the sailors, the violence of the winds, the motion of the nude figures, and the lightning falling from the sky, the water broken by the oars, and the force of the rowers bending the poles, something not to be improved or brought closer to nature: for it appears, in the beholding, that the whole picture shakes and shudders, as if everything painted therein were alive, taking place naturally.211

In this passage, references to mimetic subtlety and precision combine with affirmations of verisimilitude, yet terms such as “diligence and dexterity” apply not to the process of painting per se, but to the figures enacting the istoria. Throughout Book III of the Schilder-Boeck, Van Mander operates in a Vasarian mode, adopting his Italian forebear’s ekphrastic usage, with its clear emphasis on narrative action and affect. By contrast, the ekphrases in Books II and IV, the Ancient and Northern “Lives,” pay far more attention to the pictorial subjects and elements discussed in Book I, the Grondt, which includes chapters on landscape, animals, drapery, the optics of reflection, and wel verwen (coloring in the sense of Venetian and Lombard colorito). Above all, Van Mander attempts to relay “spirited” (geestigh) displays of descriptive skill, paying homage to painters’ ability to capture fugitive effects, especially the movement of hair, drapery, foliage, and sky.212 The term geestigh signifies liveliness, spiritedness of both the mind and the hand: with reference to acumen and lively wit, Cornelis Kiliaan, in Etymologicum Theutonicae linguae, translates g[h]eestigh into Latin as ingeniosus (ingenious) and argutus (lively, keen-witted); with reference to manual dexterity, as scitus and solers (skillful, adroit).213 Geestigh has as its corollary meanings bellus and venustas (fine, graceful, beautiful). Bol’s mossy rock, washed by waves, washed by watercolors, is one such epitome of geestigh handling, ingenious in contrivance, subtle and precise in manufacture; so, too, his clifftop castle is curious, strange, and wondrously conceived / contrived, so lively, so (in)spirited that it appears to have grown from stone. Steeped in handelingh, the ekphrasis articulates indeed operates at the threshold where verbal description and descriptive painting meet, where the boundary between verbal and pictorial image-making blurs.

6 Landtschap and byvoechsel: Van Mander on Landcape and History, Simulation and Dissimulation

Every Dutch art theoretician of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries responded in some fashion to Van Mander’s Grondt and his three sets of “Lives.”214 But if the Schilder-Boeck was determinative for the treatises on art published in its wake, the reverse is also true— namely, that these same treatises cast light on their originating source, offering readings of the Grondt that likewise illuminate his magnum opus for us. Take the painter-art theoretician Samuel van Hoogstraten, whose conspicuous use of metapictorial devices in his paintings, and discussion of experimental conceits in his treatise, the Inleyding tot de hooge schoole der schilderkonst: anders de zichtbaere werelt (Introduction to the academy of the art of painting: that is, the visible world) (1678), testify to his astute reading of Van Mander, who was himself a gifted painter whose art and theory fully coincide.215 As Celeste Brusati has shown, Van Hoogstraten marshaled these devices to display his command of reflexive processes of visual thought that were both the constitutive cause and the deliberative effect of schilderkonst, the art of painting, processes he also attempted to explicate in the Inleyding. Key to what one might call his artisanal hermeneutics are two devices in particular: first, the threshold frame that marks a painting’s dual capacity “to simulate and dissimulate at the same time,” i.e., to describe the visible world with the utmost exactitude and concurrently to deceive the beholder into confusing the image of some thing for that thing itself.216 Van Hoogstraten’s feigned paintings—the Feigned Letter Rack Painting of ca. 1670 in Karlsruhe, for instance—pictures that pretend to be actual pictures when in fact they are trompes l’oeil of such pictures—brilliantly elide this categorical distinction (Fig. 6). Second, there are the doorkijkjes (framed through-views), such as The Threshold View of a Passageway of ca. 1655–1660, in the Louvre, that articulate a telescoping optical corridor or, better, a multifocal ocular trajectory which viewers are invited to traverse as they look inquisitively first at one thing, then another, pausing to speculate upon the meaning of the relics of domestic life encountered along the way (Fig. 7).217 Paintings such as these, by extending the “eye’s reach like a lens or other optical device,” produce an effect of temporal dilation that immerses viewers in the experience of beholding and simultaneously, by exercising their perceptual and cognitive skills, make them intensely aware of the painter whose pictorial skill has engaged and animated their eyes, mind, and heart.218

In the Inleyding, Van Hoogstraten utilized many of the critical categories codified by Van Mander—welstandt, ordinantie, historie, landtschap, reflexy-const, to name but a few—ingeniously adapting them to suit his purposes.219 The Grondt provided Van Hoogstraten with the theoretical armature whereon he based his own distinctive account of the artifice of painting. Conversely, as it turns out, Van Mander was no less fascinated with the relation between simulation and dissimulation, and his discussion of pictorial desiderata such as the insien or doorsien—respectively, the view into or through environs leading, often tortuously, to an event or events positioned at some distance from the foreground—would prove fundamental to Van Hoogstraten’s conception of what makes a picture alluring and persuasive, which is to say eye-catching.220 The Grondt considers the topic of pictorial deception in chapter 5 on history, chapter 8 on landscape, and chapter 9 on animals, and it is on the first of this triad, “Van der Ordinanty ende Inventy der historien” (On the Ordonnance and Invention of Histories), that I want to dwell in the penultimate section of this introductory essay.

Chapter 5 stipulates that a well-ordered picture must be richly ornate, both copious and varied in its descriptive parts, not least its landscape setting. Midway through the chapter, Van Mander digresses at length on the topic of history-in-landscape, devoting sixteen out of eighty-eight stanzas, by far the largest tranche, to this historical genre or type.221 By means of byvoechselen (adjuncts, additions, appurtenances) such as landscape and its constituent elements—features like roads, rivers, woods, hills, and dales, and the supplementary figures and animals populating them—the historical invention becomes enticing, even seductive.222 Held spellbound, the eyes are drawn further and further into the image along various routes leading eventually to the embedded figural scenes, the proper histories, which Van Mander, borrowing the Latin term for “goal” or “target,” denominates the scopus.223 Whether historical or mythological, these storied episodes, by dint of the vreemdelijck (curious) device of having been implanted within their ambient circumstances, are made initially onkenlijck (unrecognizable), so that they must be sought out, discerned gradually, discovered like landmarks encountered en route on a protracted and circuitous journey.224 It is precisely by deferring this encounter, argues Van Mander, that the painter seizes hold of the viewer’s errant gaze, steering it indirectly yet ineluctably toward the scopus or scopi. The term byvoechsel, on this account, means something like an enriching ornament that functions descriptively and optically to amplify the historical subject: Van Mander thinks of byvoechselen as the chief means whereby verscheydenheyt (variety) is conferred on the historical ordonnance. In chapter 8, “Van het landtschap” (On Landscape), he explains how and why the process of amplification that embeds the scopus amongst various attendant appurtenances is crucial to producing a persuasive effect upon the beholder. Simply put, such a picture invites the eyes into an immersive, seemingly self-sufficient terrene, what Van Mander calls a “little world,” and literary scholars such as Harry Berger, Jr. have dubbed a “second or green world.”225 The enveloping circumstances mediate access to the scopus they do not so much frame as anticipate and at the same time forestall, operating like its extended threshold. Stanza 41 makes this case as follows:

It were good to know your little stories in advance,
Whether from Prose, or Poetry, as you please,
All the better to arrange your Landscape with respect to them,
But above all forget not
To place small Figures beside large Trees,
And, having constructed your little World, place some figures here ploughing,
Others there harvesting, over there loading wagons,
Yet others fishing, sailing, bird-catching, and hunting.226

The sixteen-stanza exemplum at the heart of chapter 5 takes the form of a very elaborate ekphrasis hailing from Jacopo Sannazzaro’s Arcadia of 1504. Van Mander appropriates it to demonstrate how an insien or doorsien is fashioned by means of byvoechselen leading, via a richly deflective, multifocal route, toward a reflexive scopus—“reflexive” in that it thematizes the pictorial work of dissimulation. The scopus, in other words, focuses on the theme of deception. Strictly speaking, the events comprised by this exemplum are poetic fictions rather than histories per se, but Van Mander uses Sannazzaro to model a mode of ordonnance that applies equally to historical and poetic subjects (and this holds true, too, for the ordinantie of his own paintings, drawings, and prints). We the readers of Van Mander’s Sannazzaro-derived text visualize the poet’s ekphrastic beholder, namely, the putative beholder who is seen to see the painting the ekphrasis conjures up, as if we were directly party to that beholder’s experience of beholding. Not only do our eyes elide into his, but the beholder himself, and we with him appear to vanish into the poetic fiction that presents itself to his / our eyes as if it were no mere painted image but the very persons, creatures, and things themselves, and the small world they inhabit, that stand revealed before us.

To give a better sense of Van Mander’s method of achieving the ekphrastic effect of enargeia (in Latin, illuminatio, i.e., vivid, evidentiary presence, on which I will have more to say in due course), let me track the visual itinerary he maps or, perhaps more exactly, plots in stanzas 45–60. Hendrick Goltzius explored the paradigm of history-in-landscape in a series of large finished landscape drawings executed in the 1590s, around the time the Schilder-Boeck was written, so, his Landscape with Venus and Adonis of 1596 (or 1598) is illustrated here to model the type of landscape—vreemdelijck, onkenlijck, verscheyden, scopic, and rich with byvoechselen—that I shall be discussing (Fig. 8).227 Van Mander begins by setting the ekphrastic conceit: the narrator Sannazzaro or, rather, his Dutch alter ego, along with several fellow shepherds, is visiting the shrine of the Arcadian tutelary goddess Pales, where, upon crossing the threshold, he sees hanging above them an intricate landscape painting. In it one descries hills and woods overgrown with trees (“heuvels en bosschen, met boomen verwildert”), cows grazing here and there on green grasslands (“weyden in de groene beemden veel kudden verspreyt”), herders milking cows, shearing sheep, and singing to the accompaniment of bagpipes (“eenigh op sackpijpen sachmen daer spelen, ander schenen, wilden oock in hun singhen t’ghluydt nae bootsen”).228 Amidst this pastoral setting, somewhere between woodland and meadow (“bosschen … daer sachmen weyden”),229 one catches sight of group of nymphs; half hidden behind a large chestnut tree, they dangle an oaken wreath in front of a goat, amusedly staring as it tries to gnaw at the leaves, oblivious to the blades of green grass growing at its feet.230 And while they peer at the goat peering at the wreath, unbeknownst to them a troop of goat-legged satyrs spies upon the nymphs from behind a mastic tree.

The nymphs take flight, swimming to the opposite shore of a nearby river, its banks overtopped by surging stormwater; and panting from their strenuous effort, having reached safety, they look back to mock their would-be captors (“zijnd’ over t’water ten anderen boorde, blasend’ … hen vervolghers met den werck’ ende woorde, bespottelijck verweten”).231 A bend in the same river, and yet another tree—this time a wild olive—leads to the next mythological episode: shaded by this tree, Apollo ostensibly watches over the flocks of Admetus; however, a pair of bulls, their horns locked in greeting, has distracted him, and looking intently at them, he fails to notice Mercury stealing away with the heifers entrusted to Apollo’s care (“niet siend’ hoe Mercurius den subtijlen, … hem zijn koeyen heeft ontstolen terwijlen”).232 By the river stands a large rock in the shape of a man pointing, the vestige of the old shepherd Battus who was turned to stone for attempting to deceive Mercury, betray his trust, and expose him as a thief (“in een steen verandert, op sulcker ghijsen, als schijnende metten vingher te wijsen”).233

As trees and a river led from the episode of nymphs and satyrs to that of Apollo, Mercury, and Battus, so large stones like landmarks lead from that episode to the next. Disguised as a herder, Mercury sits on a boulder and plays a rustic flute, craftily trying to lull Argus to sleep before killing him. His ulterior motive is to free Jupiter’s paramour Io, who has been turned into a snowy white heifer:

And he seemed, filled full with cunning,
To consider how best he might
Deceive the many-eyed Argus.234

On the other side of the boulder a true shepherd, asleep amidst his flocks, lies beneath a high oak tree, his dog sniffing the shoulder bag he uses as a pillow (“aen d’ander sijde was in slaep ghelegheen, een herder midden zijner geyten onder eenen seer hooghen eycken-boom”).235 The presence of the moon (either Diana or Selene), gazing raptly down at him, identifies this shepherd as Endymion, whose love Jupiter eternalized through the gift of perpetual sleep (“blijd’ ooghe de mane aensiende desen, vermoeddement Endymion te wesen”).236

Close by, beside an elm, yet another shepherd, this one as false in love as Mercury in intention, uses his sickle to carve the name Enone on the tree’s trunk. This is Paris, who abandoned Enone, his first love, when Venus, keen to win his favor, promised him Helen of Troy. Van Mander cleverly alludes to his broken vows when he says that Paris failed fully to inscribe Enone’s name, having been diverted from his task by the sudden arrival of Mercury with Venus, Juno, and Minerva in tow.237 The judgment of Paris then ensues: Van Mander construes the judgment scene as the picture’s true scopus, its chief episode and thematic center of gravity: “This now, that is, the judgment of Paris, is the scopus of the history.”238 But, as he soon makes patently clear, the true moral of the story has little to do with Paris proper, and instead redounds to the Grondt’s, indeed the Schilder-Boeck’s, larger theme of pictorial excellence as expressed in and through technical skill, above all the schilder’s ability to deceive the viewer’s eyes:

But what was very ingenious, pleasing, and apposite,
Worthy to be considered and seen,
Was the great attention with which
This judicious painter of fine sharp wit,
Had made Juno and Minerva to stand,
Each in her person exceptionally beautiful,
Each so utterly perfect that he himself could not
Have presumed to do better.239
Now, since he did not know how to make Venus
More beautiful than the other two, as becomes her,
He portrayed these two from the front,
But taking subtle advantage of the situation,
He, a wise artist (“wijs Artiste”), painted Venus subtly, with her back turned,
By this trick of artifice (list) licensing pleasure,
Giving one to think that were she to turn herself,
She would bring the others’ beauty to distraction.240

Landscape supplies the instrument whereby Van Mander arrives at his conclusion, his scopus: by stages the eyes travel from bosky hills and grasslands to a meadow beside which grow chestnuts and mastics, then across a turbulent river, before reaching an olive growing near a bend of said river, near to which there stand a stone in the form of a man and a second larger stone, and growing beside them a tall oak, and close by an elm, at the base of which the scopus of this sequence is enacted. Each of the places is the locus for an act of viewing: the nymphs’ of a goat, the satyrs’ of the nymphs, the nymphs’ of the satyrs, Apollo’s of the two steers, Battus’s of thieving Mercury, Mercury’s in disguise of Argus, the Moon’s of Endymion, and Paris’s of Mercury and the three goddesses, this last leading to an account of the Arcadians’ and, through them, of the reader-viewer’s act of beholding the fictive picture Van Mander / Sannazzaro is describing. Finally, enshrined within the concatenated sequence of places and of acts of viewing—in seventeenth-century parlance, a catena or ketene—there is the catena of themes bodied forth by the byvoechselen embedded within these prior loci: the satyrs’ attempted deception of the nymphs, Mercury’s deception of Apollo, Battus’s abortive deception of Mercury, Mercury’s guileful deception of Argus, Paris’s betrayal-deception of Enone, Venus’s ruthless deception of naïve Paris (which leads finally to his death during the siege of Troy), and at last, the painter’s deception of the beholder, who is tricked into thinking that the painter has portrayed Venus in all her beauty and seductive charm when, in fact, this feat of pictorial legerdemain was beyond his skill.241 Within this series of deceptions, Endymion, guileless and ingenuous, serves as a contrapposto (antithesis) that enhances by contrast the theme of deceit and beguilement. The nature of pictorial skill, then, its deceptive form and effect, is Van Mander’s pervasive scopic theme. His presentation of the scopus is couched in the pictorial language of the byvoechsel—the historical addendum or supplement inserted as an ornament within an encompassing landscape that itself does duty as a circumambient byvoechsel. The Judgment of Paris and all it implies about how an historical subject is best ordered and beheld become discernible as a function of the landscape, through the integration of its component parts, which facilitates the spatial and thematic process of enchainment and concatenation we have just tracked. Within this layered, compilatory system, landscape operates as the discursive field wherein a hermeneutic of deception is adduced as the pictorial basis for a theory of historical ordonnance. If ekphrasis allows Van Mander to evoke the enargeian force of a history picture thus ordonnanced, the way in which enargeia here devolves into an argument about deceptive means and ends drives home the point that no rhetorical figure, verbal or visual, can indefinitely maintain a fiction of presence that does not finally admit to its status as an artifice.

Van Mander’s ekphrastic source, as previously mentioned, was Sannazzaro’s Arcadia, specifically the third prose chapter, which follows the “Eclogue of Montano and Uranio” and precedes the “Eclogue of Galicio.” Embedded within this literary picture of verdant woods and hills dotted with “a thousand kinds of flowers,” there stretches a concatenated chain of mythological episodes, one scene of deception leading to the next, the entire sequence climaxing with the Judgment of Paris. This final epitome dovetails with the preceding episodes in that Venus, by offering Helen of Troy as a bribe, tricks Paris into declaring her more beautiful than Juno or Minerva; furthermore, Paris, as Sannazzaro implies, will ultimately deceive his current lover Oenone, ditching her for Helen: “Next to him was Paris who with his blade had begun to carve Oenone in the bark of an elm, and because of his judging among the naked Goddesses, who were standing before him, he had not as yet been able to finish it completely.”242 The theme of false judgment then allows Sannazzaro to circle round, yet again, to his deceptive theme, by way of a cleverly metadiscursive trope. As Paris judged Venus, so the viewer, if he properly appreciates the painter’s skill, will judge the beauty of his picture to be nonpareil: “But what was no less ingenious to the judgment than pleasurable to the eye was the circumspection of the prudent painter who, having made Juno and Minerva of such exceeding beauty that it would have been impossible to surpass them, and mistrusting his ability to make Venus as beautiful as necessity required, had painted her with her back turned, thus with his shrewdness excusing his insufficiency.”243 Sannazzaro would have expected his reader to know that the painter has resorted to a cunning device famously promulgated by the ancient Greek painter Timanthes, in whose Sacrifice of Iphigenia her father Agamemnon was shown veiled to evoke the intensity of paternal grief; precisely by not showing the father’s face, Timanthes tricked the beholder into thinking Agamemnon’s sorrow had been portrayed consummately.244 The viewer’s judgment, in other words, like Paris’s, is deceived by a clever artifice. Van Mander’s fascination with this protracted passage from Arcadia undoubtedly resulted from its subject—the power of beauty, and beautiful painting, to deceive the eyes and with them the heart and mind of the receptive beholder.

Why, one might ask, did Van Mander devote so much time and energy to crafting his version of Sannazzaro’s ekphrastic demonstration piece? The answer is fourfold: first, by generating an ekphrastic account that absorbs the reader into the process of slotting or, better, nesting mutually linked episodes into place within a continuous landscape, he epitomizes what he clearly saw as the history piece’s optimal mode of address—it should produce an ad vivum or nae[r] t’leven effect that fully draws the viewer into a seemingly firsthand encounter with the pictorial subject. The process of entering into and dwelling within the fiction the painting strives to impart—he calls this self-sufficient fiction a “constructed little world” in chapter 8, stanza 41, as cited supra—is the gist of what he tries to convey here. His ekphrasis, like Sannazzaro’s, though in a more concertedly instructional way, mainly turns on the second of two definitions of painting ad vivum current in the sixteenth and early seventeenth centuries. The first defines ad vivum / nae[r] t’leven as “after the life,” in the sense of an image made as a function of direct observation, whereby the visual record of the object of sight is seen as authoritative precisely because of the evidentiary method of recording. The descriptive richness of Van Mander’s ekphrasis might be said to accord with this sense of an image as closely simulative of nature observed. The second defines ad vivum / nae[r] t’leven as “to the life,” in the sense of producing an effect of vivid presence, as if one were propinquitous to the represented person or thing. This second sense, in that it produces an effect of real presence, is more dissimulative than simulative. As Sachiko Kusukawa has recently argued, the great naturalist Conrad Gessner attempts to describe this effect when he compares a nature cast to the sort of painting with which the ancient painter Parrhasius triumphed over Zeuxis: whereas Zeuxis’s still life of grapes had fooled a flock of birds, Parrhasius’s trompe l’oeil of a curtained painting fooled Zeuxis into trying to draw the fictive curtain. Such a painting, as Kusukawa puts it, “create[s] in the viewer’s eyes and mind a lively enough image of an object such that it would trigger a reaction akin to a viewer perceiving the object itself.”245 Van Mander’s Sannazzaro-like ekphrasis attempts to give an account of the engaging effect—at once enargeian and assimilatory—that an history picture can exercise on the beholder when it is painted in a landscape mode.

Second, Van Mander uses the ekphrastic technique of descriptive dilation to reveal how the well-ordered history can induce the viewer to grapple with an enigmatic theme when that theme is fully woven into the fabric of the picture’s multifarious parts, in the manner of a well-constructed landscape whose component elements are assembled integrally. His statement midway through stanza 45, “In such a manner that their significance could hardly be guessed,” drives home this point.246 The lengthy ekphrasis compels the reader to track continuously from one linked episode to another, and thereby to consider how and why the journey into and through the image remains coherent in extenso, over its considerable expanse and extended duration. How and why do its constituent parts come across as hypotaxic rather than paratactic, integrative rather than aggregative, with the climactic scene—the Judgment of Paris—supplying the thematic hinge that insistently and retrospectively joins everything together in respect to the theme of deception? The landscape, its natural features serving as signposts, provides the connective tissue that binds the history’s figural nodes.

Third, by tracking through the many byvoechselen comprised by the history-cum-landscape, Van Mander insists on the importance of copiousness and variety—not only of figures but also of setting and circumstances—in seizing and holding the viewer’s attention.

Fourth, he illustrates and greatly amplifies the structural device, described in chapter 5, stanza 12, of an insien or doorsien that leads the eyes to key figures positioned in the middle ground or beyond. Van Mander’s term for the motion of the eyes thus drawn into the image is ploeghen (to plough),247 and he makes clear that this is one of the main devices whereby an history painter can produce welstandt (i.e., exercise an opportune effect upon the beholder).248 The “Life of Hans Vredeman de Vries, Painter of Leeuwarden”, which inaugurates part two of Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, on living Northern masters, largely centers on that master’s ability to paint Perspectijven (perspective views) containing one or more doorsienen. Van Mander herewith implies that this optical motif is one of the hallmarks of modern Netherlandish art. Typical is his reference to a Perspectijf by Hans’s son Pauwels, featuring “a [painted] gallery looking toward a courtyard with fountain” (“doorsiende Gallerije in eenen Hof met een Fonteyne”): the picture is so captivating that it impels the work’s prime viewer, the Holy Roman Emperor Rudolph II, “to transit through it, as if taking no account of himself,” that is, to forget that the perspective view down which he peers is in fact a mere artifice.249 Only after encountering the painting itself, as a material object, does Rudolf come to his senses, seeing the view for what it is, a perspectival fiction. And yet Van Mander’s use of the term dickwils (often, repeatedly) stresses that the illusive effect recurs every time the emperor beholds the picture.250 So, too, Van Mander’s ekphrasis is so long-drawn-out that one becomes oblivious to its rhetorical status, construing it not as the verbal account of a painting but, impossibly, as a direct encounter with the fictive world the ekphrasis brings compellingly into focus; or, put somewhat differently, the ekphrasis describes the story of the viewer’s encounter with mythical events that are made so vividly present to the mind’s eye that they appear actually to have been seen. This is the sort of well-favored ordonnance, the “opportune effect” (welstandt) Van Mander here and in chapter 8, “On Landscape,” invites the aspiring schilder to master.251 In this and many other respects, he paved the way—I’m tempted to say, “opened up the passageway”—that Samuel van Hoogstraten boldly assayed in the Inleyding.

The kind of discernibly artificial yet persuasively illusive optical phenomenon Van Mander evokes, explicates, and endorses in chapters 5 and 8 of the Grondt entails mastery of a variety of descriptive effects closely associated with painting uyt den gheest (from the spirit), as he argues in the remarkable ekphrastic sequence that closes chapter 9, “On Cattle, Animals, and Birds.” Uyt den gheest, as we have seen, is the phrase coined by Van Mander to characterize a mode of pictorial invention based on prior visual experience, especially on images imprinted on memory through the action of drawing nae[r] t’leven (after the life, after nature).252 Like chapters 8 and 10, “On Fabrics or Drapery,” chapter 9 centers on one of the four pictorial subjects altogether associated with gheest, in “On Landscape,” stanza 37: “For leaves, hair, the sky, and drapery, / That is all spirit, and the spirit teaches how to fashion them.”253 The twelve epigrammatic ekphrases on Myron’s trompe l’oeil cow, an epitome of the geestigh (spirited) depiction of a furry (i.e, hairy) animal, that conclude chapter 9 can thus be seen to comment on the nature of an image produced uyt den gheest and on its attendant effects, just as the extended ekphrasis on Sannazzaro’s fictive lintel painting, a thematic linchpin of chapter 5, espouses the adjacency of history and landscape, exemplifies the structural value of an insien or doorsien, and licenses the incorporation of byvoechselen. Whereas the mythological landscape was comprised by a single protracted ekphrasis, a sequence of twelve synoptic epigrams, linked in tandem, conjures Myron’s heifer many times over. The bovine ekphrases differ from their Sannazzaran counterpart in another respect: they attempt to simulate the experience of viewing a trompe l’oeil effigy, restaging the viewer’s encounter with the bronze cow, as if it were an actual cow actually present, and yet also a work of art, restored to sight and touch, rather than irrecoverably lost to time, and transposed from ancient Greece to the here and now. The cumulative impact of these consecutive ekphrases insists on the statue’s semblance of life and lifelike presence, its convincing effect on all who saw / see it: this is to say that the statue, which stands proxy in stanzas 42–46 for a picture painted uyt den gheest, shares two key features of the landscape mode distilled in chapters 5 and 8—conjointly simulative (after the life) and dissimulative (to the life), it draws the viewer in, in the manner of an ad vivum / nae[r] t’leven image. Taken as a whole, these five stanzas cleverly give voice to Van Mander’s conviction that such a picture, though it originates from gheest, will produce an evidential effect virtually indistinguishable from the one produced by a picture executed nae[r] t’leven. Stanza 37 of chapter 8 implies the same thing: in learning to paint “leaves, hair, sky, and drapery” by means of pen, ink, and wash on colored paper, one begins by working after the life or, alternatively, after various manners of hand(ling), but inevitably discovers that merely copying nature or art cannot finally lead to the persuasive depiction of these often fugitive, pluriform, multiplicitous forms. As discussed above, they differ in this regard from the human body, the lineaments of which can be mastered by any draftsman who draws assiduously after a well-proportioned, muscular model.254 Instead, spirited things are best portrayed by relying upon the resources of gheest.

The connotative meaning of gheest, as applied by Van Mander in this context, can best be understood by reference to the Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae, where g[h]eest is defined both as esprit subtil (subtle spirit) and ingenium acre (sharp, ready wit), g[h]eesticheyt signifies vivacity, liveliness, and dexterity, and a g[h]eestich person is someone skillful, adroit, diligent, experienced, and judicious in art (Latin cognates: industrius, affaber, and scitus).255 This constellation of terms suggests that the phrase uyt den gheest, when it attaches to images descriptive of leaves, hair, sky, or drapery, connotes the clever ingenuity with which the painter has managed to capture their lively appearance; visual wit of this sort issues from sure, subtle handling, from a hand as adroit as it is practiced, capable of producing an ad vivum effect even while freed from the strictures of laboring nae[r] t’leven. The type of image Van Mander has in mind cleaves close to nature but also reveals the painter’s ready wit: originating in industry and experience, it yet appears subtly quick and skillful. The twelve ekphrases on Myron’s heifer play upon this curious amalgam of mutually disparate criteria—industry and ingenuity, diligence and skill, wit and judgment—by calling attention to the sculptor’s ability to operate at the threshold between nature and artifice. They were partially adapted from the set excerpted and translated from the Greek Anthology by Pierre Ronsard in his “Traduction de quelques épigrammes grecs, sur la Jenisse d’aerain de Myron, excellentement bien gravé.”256 On one hand, the ekphrases declare that Myron has sculpted (or, to use Ronsard’s more pictorial term, “engraved”) the image of a cow so true to nature, so convincing that it deceives men and beasts. On the other hand, they repeatedly round upon this claim, emphasizing that the cow is nothing more than an image, a consummate trompe l’oeil, an illusion by turns admirable and fit to be punctured.

The artifice of the ekphrases themselves, the “full complement of twelve” (to quote Van Mander) that convert the single image of a cow into a seeming herd of twelve, speaks to his dual conceit that this cow / these cows are creatures of nature and works of art. Several ekphrases convert the conceit into a paradox.257 Ekphrasis 2, “No image of a cow am I,” has the heifer speak as if Myron were ventriloquizing her: she at first asseverates that she is no mere image but then announces, almost in the same breath, that she is stilled rather than alive, more sculpture than cow, her feet having been anchored to a stone base by the vengeful sculptor.258 Ekphrasis 3, “What’s worthy of note,” turns on an enthymematic absurdity: if this is “no concocted image,” then Myron must be a cowherd, the cow apt for the plough.259 Ekphrasis 6, “Even though Myron did cast me,” opens with the cow’s admission that she is indeed fashioned from bronze and closes by asking us to imagine how she might have bellowed like a bull, her sex somehow changed, had Myron given her a tongue, which of course he did not.260 Ekphrasis 7, “A wasp, seeing this cow,” recounts the deception of a wasp that stung the cow’s hide and discovered it to be hard as bronze.261 Ekphrasis 9, “Why, Calf, do you creep,” chides a calf for sidling up to a cow whose udder, made by art rather than nature, is empty of milk.262 Ekphrasis 10, “Why, Myron, do you hold me fast,” reverts, like ekphrasis 1, to the trope of the stony base that hinders the bronze cow from ploughing the farmer’s fallow fields.263 Ekphrasis 11, “Unless a person were to touch,” puts the look and feel of the cow in opposition: whereas the cow appears real to the eyes, her hard bronze body becomes apparent to the hands of whoever touches it.264 Ekphrasis 12, “Myron does not quickly dislodge,” reminds the viewer that the cow, while she stands anchored to her plinth, remains materially dead as any statue, whatever its appearance to the contrary; only were it possible for Myron to set her freely grazing amidst other cows (namely, the other cows populating this epigrammatic herd) could she be seen as truly alive rather than a sculptural illusion of life.265

In his study of ekphrastic epigram in the Palatine Anthology, focusing on the thirty-six epigrams on Myron’s cow, Michael Squire argues that the “medial lability” of the bronze heifer—its recurrent quality of shuttling between the natural and the sculptural—functions in analogy to the metadiscursive character of these epigrammatic ekphrases: they purport vividly to recapture the experience of viewing Myron’s “living” cow but in fact call that experience into question by attesting to their own irrefutably literary ontology.266 The epigrams claim to derive from inscriptions in bronze (hence, the frequent use of first-person voice), but their transposition into a more purely literary form, a sequential anthology of correspondent epigrams, belies their monumental origins, exposing the epigram’s generic conceits. “The mimetic power of the images frames (and is framed by) reflection about the comparative mimetic resources of words,” so that the τέχνη (technē) of the sculptor comes to stand for the τέχνη of the poet; Myron’s ability to bring a bronze cow fully to life is echoed by the poet’s ability to make a silent image speak the words incised somewhere upon or beside it.267 But just as the “promise and failure of Myron’s naturalistic cow” controverts the illusion of life, exposing it as a trompe l’oeil effect, so the epigram’s ekphrastic power is shown to be a purely rhetorical ploy.268 Squire’s analogy is easily reversible: the promise and failure of the ekphrastic epigram reveal the medial artifice of Myron’s heifer and its illusory hold on life. The contradictory wit of the twelve epigrams, their assertions of life held in suspense by their apparent artifice, serve to reveal how the simulative and dissimulative functions of Myron’s sculpture jointly manifest, tussling for the upper hand.

The quality of suspension just mentioned, based as it is on an apposition of nature and art that gives saliency to both factors, applies equally to the range of uyt den gheest images under discussion. Appreciated in this way, the epigrams redound to the peculiar status of animals painted uyt den gheest (and by extension, also to landscape and drapery). Their ad vivum / nae[r] t’leven appearance can be seen as analogous to the unmediated effect of nature evinced by the epigrams and ascribed by them to Myron’s moo-cow, but it can also be recognized as a veracious fiction reducible to a trompe l’oeil effect, again like the sculpted cow and the epigrams evocative of it. This is because such images of animals, more particularly of their distinctive furry coats, are, if handled rightly, pure expressions of gheest. They look natural but emanate from a confluence of wit, ingenuity, skill, industry, experience, and subtlety, which is to say, from a ready spirit and a practiced, spirited hand. Stanza 47 and its marginal gloss drive home this point about the look of animals sourced from gheest: even when painting “monsters and dragons” (“monsters en draken”), the painter must not seem to stray from nature, but be that as it may, these animals must also be “subtly rendered” (“aerdich ghehandelt”), identifiably creatures of art.269 They walk the line between leven and gheest: “There’s nothing better than to paint all things after the life, and above all, to render everything subtly.”270 Throughout chapter 8, as previously noted, Van Mander emphasizes that artifice can be a natural phenomenon: in discussing uyt den gheest, however, he does something different; refusing to elide or harmonize the terms “nature” and “art,” leven and gheest, he places them side by side and demonstrates how they can be seen to work concurrently, in discrete conjunction, and to produce a mimetic effect at once utterly persuasive and ingeniously contrived. Playing at the threshold between simulation of dissimulation, Van Mander brilliantly paves the way for his beneficiary Van Hoogstraten.271

7 Précis: The Poem’s Fourteen Chapters

Chapter 1, titled “Exhortatie, oft Vermaninghe” (Exhortation, or Admonition), is one of the longest of the Grondt’s fourteen chapters.272 Van Mander speaks in the voice of a practiced painter, well versed in the ways of the painter’s workshop, attuned to the social mores of “Const-liefdigh … beminders” (art-loving enthusiasts, v. 24), pragmatic about the need to earn a living, and yet steeped in ancient and modern poetry, unhesitating in his assumption that his readers will be as familiar with Ovid’s Metamorphoses as with Ludovico Ariosto’s Orlando Furioso. Practitioners of Pictura (the arts of picturing, especially painting) are gifted by Nature with native ability, which inclines them irresistibly to fashion innumerable mental images, “inbeeldinghen ontallijck” (numberless interior images, v. 10). These images “leven,” they live in “gheest, sin en gheneghen” (thought, spirit, and affection, v. 10), which is to say that they are rational, animated, and emotive, issuing respectively from the faculties of mind, heart, and will. But for Van Mander, native ability is a prerequisite that leads nowhere if it is not assiduously honed by years of training: as he puts it, schilderconst is not “elcken te ghebiede” (biddable to all, v. 3), not even to those whom Nature inclines from a young age to take up “alle Const … ghereetschappen” (tools of every Art). Nature will have prompted them, as children, to draw, but if they fail to cultivate that prompting, and neglect to exercise the stylus and the brush, then their childhood promise and youthful ambition will come to naught. Prospective painters must flee idleness and, above all, the idle pursuit of “Bacchi cruyck en Cupidinis schichten” (Bacchus’s jug and Cupid’s darts, v. 13), i.e., drink and carnal desire, and their side effects, insobriety and irascibility.

Throughout chapter 1, the complementary relation between “Const en Ambacht” (Art and Trade, v. 5) is taken for granted. An inclination toward the visual arts or trades is a gift of Nature, for which the recipient must be thankful, and manual proficiency undergirds the practice of both the painter and the artisan. Schilderconst, like any “Ambacht,” is to be appreciated as a source of “nootdruft” (livelihood, v. 58), and for this reason, even though Van Mander expects aspiring painters to know their poets and be familiar with a myriad of mythological references—Minerva, the “vernufte maeght” (sage maiden), for example, or “Caballini water” (the Horse’s stream, i.e., Hippocrene, brought forth by Pegasus as a source of poetic inspiration, v. 56)—he warns them to steer clear of Rhetorica (the poetic art of persuasion, v. 47), “merry and diverting” though she be. He himself, as he admits, has indulged his love of poetry, and so, he speaks from experience when he declares that Rhetorica stocks no larder and, in this sense, diverts the painter from the task at hand. If that task involves mastering the tools of art, it also requires the painter to become engagingly sociable, ingratiating to lovers of art, obliging to his master, candid and helpful to his fellow apprentices and journeymen. These are matters of judgment, as Van Mander makes clear in stanzas 49–54: the young painter must “geeren buyghen onder t’ghemeyn oordeel” (gladly bow to common judgment, i.e., workshop consensus and public opinion, v. 49), must refrain from judging his master publicly, even if he spots faults in the master’s work, must be plainspoken and unbiased when exercising judgment of his peers’ efforts, but always with “beleeftheyt” (courtesy, v. 51), and last but not least, must be judicious and temperate with regard to himself, neither fulsomely praising nor reviling his own works. “Courtesy,” avows Van Mander, “vermach vele” (is equal to any task, v. 29). As painters by their art captivate viewers’ eyes and hearts, so must their refinement of behavior inspire “goede jonse, ghenade en vrientschap” (good favor, grace, and amity, v. 27) in all their dealings, within the workshop and beyond, principally with “beminders” (lovers of art, v. 24).

The principle and practice of art upon which Van Mander dwells the most, whereby the aspiring schilder can best improve himself, is appropriative imitation: he must “wel spelen Rapiamus personage” (play well the part of the personage Rapiamus, v. 46). The name Rapiamus, which derives from the Latin verb rapere (to seize, carry off, claim possession of), here personifies the action of laying claim to a model by imitating it. (The moniker, couched in the form of the present subjunctive, literally means “Let us seize.”) In stanza 46, the reference applies implicitly both to nature and to art, not only to the human body’s constituent parts—“arms, legs, torsos, hands, feet, and [other members]”—but also to works of art that epitomize them. Van Mander returns to the theme of rapere in stanza 75, where he urges his young readers not to return from their study tour of Italy until they have assimilated from Rome a “teyckenen zedich” (a fine / refined manner of drawing) and from Venice “t’wel schilderen” (the good [manner] of painting). And in stanza 84, Van Mander compares the composition or, better, ordonnance of the Schilder-Boeck to that of a picture fashioned after the manner of Rapiamus: the book has been drawn from numerous sources, as if its author had “suckled at various breasts” and gone “fish[ing] in other ponds.” But the treatise is no mere aggregate copied from disparate models: he has “exercised [his] invention,” thereby ensuring that the book, ascribable to him and thoroughly concocted, coheres as a whole, on the model of the proverb quoted in stanza 46: “Wel ghecoockte rapen is goe pottage” (Well cooked turnips make for a good potage).

Finally, having mixed procedural advice on how to imitate, with moral advice on virtues to be nurtured and, concomitantly, vices to be spurned, and having also admixed a bit of technical instruction, as in stanza 48, where he cautions against “over-tempering the smalts or ashes,” Van Mander brings chapter 1 to a close by offering practical advice about the journey to Italy, alternately praising Rome as “hooft der Picturae Scholen” (capital of the Schools of Pictura, v. 66) and disparaging its many moral dangers. He also gently mocks the Romans for failing to see that Netherlanders, though certainly proficient at landscape and grotesques, are capable figure painters in the same degree.

Chapter 2, “Van het teyckenen, oft Teycken-const” (On drawing, and the Art of Delineating), describes Teycken-const as the “Vader van t’schilderen” (Father of picturing / painting, v. 1), and then, taking up one of the themes of chapter 1, adds that many other arts, amongst them goldsmith’s work and architecture, trace their lineage from teyckenconst. Drawing thus mediates between the pictorial arts and their high artisanal sister-arts, consociating them. Having personified teyckenconst as male in stanza 1, Van Mander unexpectedly changes tack, identifying her as female in stanza 2 where she receives the title “Voedster aller Consten” (Wet nurse of all the Arts). Writing, too, since it entails tracing letters and characters, can likewise be appreciated as a species of drawing, and teyckenconst, in this particular sense, can be said to nourish all text-based literary arts as well. What’s more, as the source of Grammatica’s (Grammar’s) syntactical rules, her generative influence expands to embrace all seven “Vry Consten” (Liberal Arts, v. 1–2). Teyckenconst not only engenders the full range of arts, from artisanal to liberal, s/he also capacitates cognition. Van Mander states in stanza 3 that native ability, when fortified by the practice of drawing, begets and vivifies one’s understanding of that after which one draws. He further implies that drawing cultivates good judgment which, joined with understanding, facilitates the production of whatsoever mental images it pleases the hand to draw. Drawing, to the extent that it issues from such images, infuses them with the draftsman’s intention: in stanza 4, Van Mander calls such drawings, made after these images, “an expression, a striking elucidation of intention, a witness to it.” His chief point of reference, as he makes clears in stanzas 4–5, is “t’Menschen beeldt heerlijckst gheschepen” (the Human form, most precious of all created things, v. 4).

Stanza 6 initiates a discussion of Actitude (pose, attitude of the human figure) that will later constitute the chief topic of chapters 3, “Analogie, Proportie” (Analogy, Proportion), and 4, “Van der Actitude” (On Attitude). The bodily epitome Van Mander visualizes is a turning figure whose hip swings forward from a standing leg that bears the body’s whole weight. A printed model-book—an “A.b. boeck” (A.b.[c.] book, v. 6)—would be a welcome resource upon which young schilders would surely draw, were such a collection available. Why is it, laments Van Mander, that apothecaries, chirurgs, and practitioners of the liberal arts enjoy ready access to such how-to manuals, whereas young painters, who like new beakers await to be filled, have nothing comparable? The next best thing, therefore, is to find a “goet Meester” (accomplished Master, v. 9), from whom a “goede manier” (comely manner, v. 9) and the “seker vaste gronden” (sure, firm foundations) of one’s art can be learned; typically, Van Mander is specific about materials and techniques: first, a soft, forgiving medium like coal, later chalks and quills can be used to familiarize oneself with light and shadow, highlights, and the rudiments of “stellen, handelen, omtrecken, ronden” (disposition / attitude, handling / manner, contour, projection, v. 9). By placing these particulars in apposition to “comely manner,” he implies that they are the constituent features of “manier” to be learned from a capable master draftsman. He further specifies that strokes should be barely discernible except in those places where the shadows fall most densely. Remarks such as these would seem to indicate that he had the hatched strokes of a master draftsman-printmaker like Goltzius foremost in mind. The later reference, in stanza 20, to linear flexion, to hatches tapering and swelling from thin to thick, as a way of modeling muscular bodies, and as a good alternative to stumping with granular media such as chalk, makes this allusion to Goltzius even more apparent.

Van Mander urges his young readers to experiment with colored grounds and tonal transitions, all the better to concatenate between zones of bright light and zones of deep shadow. Returning to the theme of a printed A.b.c. book, he instructs the aspiring draftsman to utilize coal or chalk and to stump his strokes when drawing after prints, and also to differentiate the tints by tonal value. He may be referring to the use of colored chalks or, alternatively, to the effect of color that can result from relatively monochrome media, if they are deftly handled. To learn a fine manner of modeling tones, he recommends that the chiaroscuro prints of Parmigianino be consulted; studying their “daghen wel in het legghen” (well-placed highlights, v. 12), assimilating them so thoroughly that they become veritable offshoots grafted onto one’s person, is tantamount to working after sculpture in the round. And by these means, one will prepare oneself to go to the draftsman’s ultimate source, progressing from the helpful contrivances of art to the “gracious … unaffected sweetness” of nature, “that is, to life … the Lodestar whereby to steer our ship.” For Van Mander, the principal benefit of working after nature, “tot het leven” (to the life, v. 13) or “na[er] t’leven” (after the life, v. 13), is that it makes reference to living things whose life is perceptible “both in stillness and in motion.” These are living creatures, first of all “volcomen naeckten van Mans, en Vrouwen” (a fully nude Man or Woman, v. 14), secondly “Kinder-naeckten en alle Dieren” (children in the nude, and every kind of Beast, v. 14).

If from Nature one learns everything not supplied by native ability, as Van Mander avers in stanza 15—“actions, attitudes, foreshortenings, shapes in profile and overlapping shapes”—one must jointly train oneself to fashion forms “uyt zijn selven” (from out of oneself), “om inventie te hebben” (in order to possess invention). He underscores this point in stanza 16, stating that “inventy van jonghs moet oock med’ opwassen” (from an early age, invention must develop in concert [with Nature]). Invention generates “ordineren” (ordering, ordonnance, composition, v. 16) by looking not to “others’ storehouses” but to one’s own. By “cassen” (storehouses), Van Mander clearly means “memory,” which he personifies as “Memoria … de Muses Moeder” (Memoria … Mother to the Muses). Invention thus involves tapping or harnessing images stored in one’s mind, wherein the visual memories of things experienced at first hand are retained. Van Mander is setting the stage for his subsequent discussion of two key complementary categories of mimetic picture-making—nae[r] t’leven and uyt den gheest (after the life and from the mind / spirit)—which are variously applied throughout part two of Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, comprising the lives of Netherlandish and German painters still active when Van Mander was writing his treatise. Uyt den gheest, as he explains in chapter 8, “Van het Landtschap” (On Landscape), chapter 9, “Van Beesten, Dieren, en Voghels” (On Cattle, Animals, and Birds), and chapter 10, “Van Laken oft Draperinghe” (On Fabrics or Drapery), is the procedure that sources mnemonic images for the purpose of gathering them into a pictorial ordonnance, a well-ordered composition. That these images issue from the mental faculty of gheest (spirit) animates them, imparting the lively quality of spiritedness. This quality is fully compatible, of course, with the impression of life conferred by working after or to the life. Indeed, stanza 17 suddenly changes course, returning to the matched topics of stocking the “schatcamer der wetenheyt” (treasure chamber of knowledge) and “conterfeytende … u voorbeeldt” (portraying your model), topics broached in stanza 15. This is say that the topic of stanza 16 (and the closing line of stanza 15, on working from out of oneself)—invention and its mnemonic referents—is clearly seen by Van Mander to be inextricable from the topics of stanzas 15 and 17—portrayal of the living model as mnemonic inscription, as the plenishment of memory. His term for this sort of portraying is “conterfeyten” (to copy, imitate closely).

Van Mander concludes by returning to the trope of “Teycken-const van Schilderen Vader” (Drawing, the Father of Painting, v. 21), adducing the technique of drawing with colored crayons as incontrovertible proof that “no two things could resemble each other more” than Drawing and Painting. Nor is teyckenconst miserly in the benefits it bestows: on the contrary, every age and estate finds drawing useful, whether for learning to speak authoritatively about the visual arts or for describing places and their circumstances as need requires.

Chapter 3, “Analogie, Proportie, oft maet der Lidtmaten eens Menschen Beeldts” (Analogy, Proportion, or measurement of the Parts of a Human Body), expands upon the topic broached in chapter 2, stanza 14—the nude model as one of the building blocks of the draftsman’s art. Stanza 1 provides a succinct, elegant definition of proportion: it is “ghelijckmaticheyt puere” (a pure system of correspondent relation) that brings the constituent parts of figures, but also of buildings, into mutual conformation. Underlying the analogy between bodily and architectural structure is the biblical analogy, adduced in stanza 2, between the Temple and the Lord’s body, taken from John 2:19–22. In its application to the visual arts, the analogy operates through numerical ratios, the particulars of which Van Mander itemizes in stanzas 3–8, moving from the smallest to the largest intervals between body parts: for instance, one-eighth from crown to chin of a man’s head, one-sixth from brow to breastbone, one-fourth from crown of the head to the sternum. The parts themselves can likewise be enumerated: the interval between the hairline of the brow and the bridge of the nose, between the eyes, is one-third the length of the face, and the distance from heel to toe is one-sixth the length of the body. As the body and its members subscribe to arithmetical ratios and proportional measurements, so the body’s motions are notionally circumscribed within geometrical forms, such as the superimposed circle and square that define the limits of an extended male body, measuring from the navel as center to the tips of the fingers and toes. These geometries and proportional relations can be sensed or cognized by the attentive schilder, irrespective of measurement, as Van Mander states explicitly in stanza 8: “And as this perfect circular form is detectable in him, so one also finds present in him the likeness of a true square.”

Having cited Vitruvius, Pliny, and Dürer’s Four Books on Human Proportion in stanza 9, Van Mander changes tack in stanza 10, warning his readers that master painters and sculptors who cleave meticulously to numerical measurements will prove virtually inimitable to the students who aspire to follow them. Let these students, he advises, content themselves with the shorthand measurements of Vitruvius who, using the head as a module, simply defines the male body as eight heads high, or two faces wide, the female body as equally tall but wider at the hips (at two heads wide). After digressing on the topic of female flesh, its softness, delicacy, and dimpled hollows and creases, all of which the draftsman (and implicitly, the painter) must capture, Van Mander concludes with a caveat: the canons he has just detailed, whether complex, as in the case of Dürer, or simple, must be modified according to the “verscheyden proportien wedervaren … in’t leven” (various proportions encountered in life, v. 15), which will usually be found somewhat to diverge from strict numerical norms. Variation is a trait of nature, and the schilder, in describing persons squat or slim, must take this fact of life into account.

Chapter 3 concludes with a reference to the topic of chapter 4, “Van der Actitude, welstandt, ende weldoen eens Beelts” (On the Attitude, decorum, and decorous motion of a Human Figure): Van Mander announces his intention of examining the decorum of human actions by discoursing on how properly “to position a figure, set it to work, activate it.” Accordingly, the first four stanzas of chapter 4 explain why he considers a discourse on figural welstandt (decorum, good bearing or demeanor, well-ordered bodily attitude) indispensable. Beauty is a virtue, and artful Nature is beauty’s repository, and so too do Nature’s circumstances supply the “oorspronck en middle” (source and method, v. 1) whereby the pinnacle of beauteous perfection may be fashioned. Yet even in nature there are flaws, “omstandicheden faelgieren” (attendant circumstances that fall short), which thereby diminish beauty. In drawing after nature, the draftsman may find that his figures, even when their caroming contours produce a fine effect of projection, may prove lacking in other respects, their motions insufficiently stirring, their poses imbalanced, their parts indecorous in one way or another. But these defects of nature (and of drawing after the life) can be put right by looking again to Nature, this time for precepts, “ghewisse regulen en vaste Wetten” (certain rules and firm laws, v. 4), that can assist the draftsman to circumvent these flaws. The rest of chapter 4, stanzas 5–29 principally, furnish this corrective, disclosing Nature’s rules, her touchstones.

Van Mander begins with standing figures, first at rest, then in motion, and eventually introduces the attitude he adjudged the most beautiful: the serpentine figure, coiled and turning in space, its rotating limbs subsumed into a network of antitheses—rotation and counterrotation, convexity and concavity, projection and recession, advance and retreat. In stanzas 5 and 6, he describes an upright figure, its axis vertical, with limbs outstretched, and then compares the relation between a person’s head and body to that between a capital and a column. Stanza 7 instructs the draftsman to accustom himself to seeing this axis of orientation in his mind’s eye, as a notional plumb line, so that it need not actually be drawn. Stanzas 8 and 9 initiate the process of visualizing how properly to vary such a figure, first bilaterally: the body parts must be syncopated so that the head and torso do not bend uniformly, inclining to the same side; then spatially: the legs must be coordinated so that they rise and fall in tandem, with one foot in front, the other foot behind. The serpentine figure comes clearly into view in stanzas 10–12, where Van Mander recommends that persons, whether laboring or standing still, walking or running, be portrayed as if swaying. Irrespective of age, the arms and legs must always be seen to alternate, both before and behind, from side to side, and crosswise, with the face turned toward whichever arm extends outward, and the head turned away from whithersoever the torso swivels. The masters he cites as great paragons of this figural epitome of welstandt are Raphael, Michelangelo, and Giambologna.

Typically, he then spends several stanzas justifying variations from the norm: for example, whereas a turning pose embodies grace or, more precisely, focuses attention on grace as an effect of art, as an artifice that heightens the quality of grace in nature, conspicuous turning will detract from the modesty proper to sacred figures, hindering rather than enhancing devotion. It shall also be acceptable, as need arises, to diverge from the graceful norm, in the manner of Orpheus who played rough-sounding modes on his otherwise sweet-sounding harp, whenever his poetic subjects demanded them. This discussion of poetic modes—the graceful and fine juxtaposed to the ungraceful and rough—in their application to teyckenconst anticipates Van Mander’s defense of two painterly handelinghen (manners, modes), the one smooth, fine, and meticulously rendered, the other roughly brushed, the former best seen in close proximity, the other at a distance, in chapter 12, stanza 27. Another exception to the rule is any functional attitude illustrative of labor: when staves are thrust or ropes are pulled, the arms and/or legs will operate in unison, stretching outward together; under these circumstances, graceful alternation would prove inimical to persuasive narration.

Having defined various improprieties that contravene figural welstandt, in stanzas 18–22—excess foreshortening of the female face, for example, or an arm that pivots outward or upward from a shoulder dropped where the hip projects—Van Mander then cautions the would-be draftsman not to display extreme torsion in the human figure. Verging on contortion, such spectacles of artifice call to mind those “Camerspeelders” (Play-actors) who take to the stage and “springhen en beutelen” (tumble and somersault, v. 23), mistakenly “construing unnatural things of this sort as an art.” As they mar rather than beautify a play, so draftsmen who entangle their figures in corkscrew turns mar rather than embellish a picture. They should instead “houden matelijcke ganghen” (keep to the middle path, v. 25), “turning and bending” in an enhanced but not exaggerated version of nature. This holds just as true of figures whose motions illustrate functional tasks: they, too, can sometimes be shown turning but should never appear to move “buyten Natuer en gracy” (in excess of Nature and grace, v. 28); if they swivel, let it be “slightly, or nearly not at all.”

With reference to Pliny’s descriptions of ancient sculpture, to courtesy books such as Baldassare Castiglione’s Il Cortegiano, and poetic effictiones (enriched verbal descriptions of bodily appearance) such as Ariosto’s portrayal of the temptress Alcina, Van Mander concludes by touching upon topics that anticipate the subjects of chapter 6, “Wtbeeldinghe der Affecten” (Portrayal of the Affects), and chapter 12, “Van wel schilderen, oft Coloreren” (On painting well, or Coloring)—namely, the depiction of emotional states, such as Demon of Athens’s famous statue of two soldiers, one still exerting himself, the other exhausted, or the rendition of varieties of animate complexion, especially as pertains to maidens and matrons. These differentiated affects and effects must closely correspond to distinctions in enacted attitude, in accordance with “Persoons crachten en ghemoeden” (a Person’s strengths and temperament), so that a soldier appears noticeably different from a philosopher. And with that, the discussion of figural decorum, good bearing, and well-ordered attitudes closes, the scene having now been set for the disquisition on history painting in the subsequent chapter.

Chapter 5, “Van der Ordinanty ende Inventy der Historien” (On Ordonnance and the Invention of Histories), the longest in the Grondt, is one of two chapters focusing on the topic of pictorial composition—the ordinantie (ordonnance) of a picture, as a whole and in its parts—the other being chapter 8, “Van het Landtschap” (On Landscape). Throughout this chapter, as elsewhere in the Grondt, Van Mander includes both fact and fiction, events from history and mythology, under the sign of Historie. Two definitions of ordinantie coalesce in stanza 1, the first ontological, the second functional: if the virtue of every creature and thing consists in its God-given “gheregheltheyt” (arrangement), this structural principle, inherently expressed as the quality of ordonnance, is also actively expressed through the rational works of persons and the resourceful works of mute beasts (such as bees and ants), both categories of work being the result of “ordeningh” (ordering, orderly behavior). Stanza 2 states further that ordonnance can be appreciated, too, as a purposeful effect of the painter’s powers of Inventy (Invention), which must be exercised with “gheest, als verstandts doorgronden, aendacht, universael experiency” (as much with spirit as with depth of understanding, attention, [and] universal experience). The “Regulen en Wetten” (Rules and Regulations, v. 3) of composition that Van Mander now intends to set forth must issue first and foremost from the historical subjects the painter has chosen to portray: they must represent these subjects appositely, by means of “bootsen oft Beelden daer toe bequame” (models and Figures expedient to the task at hand, v. 4), which are to be mobilized according to the seven Motus (Motions) executable by the human body. In enacting these motions, as stanzas 6–7 specify, the figures should appear to move freely, neither uniformly nor constrainedly, in a manner dictated by the stories they narrate.

Starting with stanza 8, Van Mander elaborates upon the means whereby a graceful ordonnance can be achieved. The painter must attend not only to his “materie” (substantive material, i.e., subject) but also to its attendant circumstances, and then sketch everything as the imagination dictates. Letting the spirit of invention flow, he may follow the Italians in drawing a full-scale cartoon based on his sketches, always taking care, however, to avoid a “maniere die swaer is, en niet wel stellijck” (manner heavy, and poorly disposed, v. 10) or “al te ghestenteert, moeyelijck oft quellijck” (too labored, awkward and ponderous). Drawing after the life, one may also add the colors of nature to one’s cartoon, thereby giving it “welstandighe crachten” (an attractive force or, alternatively, a forceful concinnity). Above all, as Van Mander advises in stanzas 11–13, the painter who strives for harmonious ordonnance should insert framing figures at the sides of the pictorial field, leaving the middle-ground empty so as to stage smaller, more distant figures there. The provision of an optical corridor down which the eyes may advance toward background figures and distant landscapes, is the surest method of achieving a pleasing ordonnance, for painted histories lacking landscape backgrounds will appear awkward rather than graceful (vv. 11–12). Stanzas 14–18 go on to say, by way of qualification, that one may imitate the Italians—Tintoretto or Michelangelo, for example—in clustering figures into groups, on the model of battle scenes wherein they attack or retreat, even while taking care not to emulate Michelangelo, whose Last Judgment, though uncommonly varied in the forms and actions of its nude figures, includes no view into the distance. Van Mander hesitates to criticize Michelangelo but nevertheless implies that his great fresco, deprived of any landscape, lacks concinnity.

Stanzas 19–26 focus on the theme of variety: as musical harmony results from mixing a variety of sounds, so must the painter mix “veel verscheyden Beelden” (many varied Figures, v. 19), on the principle that “door verschedenheyt is Natuere schoone” (Nature is beautiful through variety, v. 20). The picture should therefore be as varied as a field full of flowers, or a banqueting table loaded with food and drink. With respect to history painting, the figures should be varied according to the seven axes of motion (defined in stanzas 4 and 5), as well as by “natuere, wesen, en gheneghen” (nature, condition, and temperament, v. 21). Van Mander especially favors a method of composition detailed in stanza 23: this involves setting the picture’s Scopus (nucleus, i.e., key figures) amidst a circle of onlookers who variously address or entreat the person at their center. In stanzas 25–26, fully equating copious variety with grace, he urges painters to incorporate animals of every sort, persons of either sex and every age, landscape, architecture, and other adornments, since “every kind of subtle fantasy issuing from Copiousness … makes for a fine alluring Harmony.”

Stanzas 27–42 distinguish between two historical modes, richly varied or austerely simple, which Van Mander compares to two modes of oratory, respectively based on a maximum or minimum of speech, and to two kinds of drama, comedy and tragedy, respectively enacted with many or few figures. Whereas stanzas 27–30 praise those great masters who favor the simpler and grander of the two modes, associated with masterful, deliberate, and considered speech, stanzas 31–37 instead enlarge upon the allure of the copious mode, which requires to be paired with delightful, frivolous, comedic subjects, such as mythological fables. Just as these subjects offer innumerable pleasures and enticements, so the mode best matched to them overflows with enticing variety, as in a picture of Zephyr and Flora kissing by the light of dawn, amidst a floriferous field brimful with every species of bloom—the anemone, crocus, bindweed, narcissus, and purple hyacinth. Stanza 32, as rich in lyric reference as the picture Van Mander asks us to envision, itself overflows with allusions to the Ovidian origin stories of these flowers.

Stanza 33 describes the experience of viewing such a captivating picture: like bees flitting amongst these flowers, the viewer’s eyes, enthralled by pictorial variety, will fly from sight to sight, gladly grazing in Pictura’s garden. Stanza 34 wittily analogizes the simple historical mode to one of Varro’s famously short guest lists, whereas the copious history will be as rich and sumptuous as the repasts he lavished upon the privileged few. Such a picture will display its particulars in the way a peddler’s stall advertises his wares, setting them out on shelves above, below, and at the sides of the buyer’s field of vision. Not only should it thus entice viewers to ogle its contents, it can also double their desirous gaze, by ranging depicted onlookers “op heuvels, boomen, oft op trappen steenich” (on hills, trees, or stone steps, v. 34; cf. stanza 23 supra), as if they were living counterparts of the peddler’s goods. Stanza 36 compares these witnesses to “Comic Actors on the stage,” the objects of whose gaze, often positioned above them (as in a thoon or tableau vivant), are made sufficiently conspicuous both to them and to the picture’s beholder. Continuing the theme of doubling, Van Mander advises the painter to exemplify in his picture the affective response he wishes to solicit from the beholder, by showing a figure who reacts with evident emotion to some turn of events, news of which is being conveyed to him. Surprisingly, just before, in stanza 37, Van Mander analogizes Historie itself, as a genre of schilderconst, to the copious mode he has been characterizing, as if the mode were subsuming the genre: painted history must comprise every category of art encompassed by schilderconst, such attitudes, affects, and varieties of reflected light, respectively the topics of chapters 4, 6, and 7 of the Grondt.

Stanzas 38–45 digress on the topic of how to maintain historical clarity, both formal and thematic, in light of the desideratum of copious variety. The sense of the history must ever be plain to see, its meaning discernible, even when the painter, following Horace, exercises a “power equal to that of the Poets,” depicting his subject as he wishes, playing upon the viewer’s curiosity, devising an ordonnance so replete with corollary elements that the true historical subject is cleverly and alluringly, though only momentarily, withheld. Once compelled to search out the scopus, the viewer will look here, there, and everywhere, traveling deep into the picture along its divagating optical pathways, looking for the true sense that is the pictorial raison d’être. This historical mode contrasts, states Van Mander in stanza 44, with that practiced by early Netherlandish masters when painting “devoot’ History” (devout History), which foregrounds the principal figures, never diminishing their prominence. He then exemplifies the optical and thematic complexities of the copious mode by means of a lengthy ekphrasis adapted from Jacopo Sannazzaro’s Arcadia, in stanzas 46–60, on which see section 6, supra, of this “Introduction,” “Landtschap and byvoechsel: Karel van Mander on Landcape and History, Simulation and Dissimulation.” The closing stanzas of this ekphrastic tour de force, along with stanzas 61–64, constitute a sustained analogy between painting and theater: histories richly embellished in the manner of Sannazzaro’s astonishing word-picture, so vivid it is more a painting than a poem, are as delightful to spectators as comedies interspersed with clownish interludes. Therefore, reasons Van Mander, “machmen eensaem History vermeeren” (one may amplify simple History) in this wise, indulging one’s inclination toward the richer of the two modes.

Chapter 5 closes, in stanzas 65–88, with helpful advice regarding various ornaments useful for augmenting and embellishing an historical subject: for instance, the painter may insert “gheestelijcke Beelden” (allegorical Figures, i.e., personifications, v. 65), such as Faith, Hope, and Charity in a Sacrifice of Isaac, or proleptic figures, such as Jeremiah, Isaac, and other prophets who foresaw the mystery of the Incarnation, as in Federico Zuccaro’s Annunciation (formerly in Santa Maria Annunziata, Rome, v. 67), or again, mythological figures, such as Apollo and Daphne, who stand for the Sun and the Moon in Rosso Fiorentino’s eschatological image of the Virgin in the Sun (v. 67). Amongst the ancient painters, Nealces was much admired for incorporating such an ornament, a crocodile signifying the Nile, in his great picture of the naval battle between the Persians and Egyptians, fought on that river. This brings Van Mander in mind of the statue of Father Nile he saw and studied in Rome, the attributes of which and their natural, geographical, and ethnological significance he expounds at length in stanzas 72–83. Accounts of other personifications worthy to grace history in an enriched mode follow: Father Tiber, for example, and beside him the she-wolf suckling Romulus and Remus, or the Rivers Eurotas and Numicius. He adds, in stanza 86, that just as rivers may be personified, so, too, may cities and lands: the volatile temperament of the Athenians may be transferred to the figural embodiment of Athens, the martial valor of the Romans to the figure of Rome. Van Mander concludes, in stanza 88, by promising to expand upon the subject of ordonnance once again in another place, perhaps an allusion to his treatment of Landtschap (and its relation to Historie) in chapter 8.

Chapter 6, “Wtbeeldinghe der Affectien, passien, begeerlijckheden, en lijdens der Menschen” (Portrayal of the Affects, passions, desires, and sorrows of Persons), returns to the topic broached in stanza 37 of chapter 5, where “dramatizing fear, wonder, and sorrow” and “revealing by [figures’] gestures the purport of their speech” are seen as a sine qua non of history painting. Stanza 1 explain how and why these affects become visible and representable: motions of the heart and sense impel the bodily limbs to move as external indices of these internal motions, making their “ghestalten, ghedaenten, oft wercken” (forms, qualities, or actions) discernible. Stanzas 2–7 focus on the unitary affects or passions—“liefde, begeerlijckheyt, vreucht, smert en tooren, commer en droefheyt” (love, desire, joy, sorrow and choler, distress and melancholy, v. 2)—which persons are by nature prone to express through their actions; these are singular rather than plural or layered, one passion not admixed with another. Known by the Greeks a ethoi, as Van Mander explains in stanza 3, these passions were first portrayed by the ancient painter Aristides, whose wounded woman and sickly man were epitomes of the affective art. Such Affecten are expressed first and foremost “met de leden van den aenghesichte” (with the features of the face, v. 4), ten in number: to communicate them legibly is a task as praiseworthy as it is difficult to achieve. Nature is the chief descriptive source of affective bodily motions, but Histrionica (the dramatic arts) offer a ready, complementary source of imitable affects, as Van Mander points out in stanzas 5–6. Amongst these, the first in order of importance is “Liefde” (Love), the enacted attributes of which are smiling faces, enfolded limbs, and intertwined bodies.

In stanza 8, Van Mander complicates the painter’s brief: his higher task is to portray complex, compound emotions, such as love mixed with shame, chagrin, and/or disquiet, as exemplified by the story of Antiochus who harbored and was tormented by a secret love for his stepmother Stratonice, recounted in great detail in stanzas 8–19. For Antiochus, the imagined pleasure of love consummated mingles with the sorrow and despair of unrealizable desire. In stanzas 12–13, Van Mander develops a witty analogy between the doctor who astutely reads Antiochus’s symptoms as mixed emotions attendant on forbidden love, and the painter who sets about the task of portraying the lovelorn lover. Stanza 19 brings this extended tale to a close by observing that just as the motion of the hand indicates the source of bodily pain, so the motion of the eyes transits to the object of loving desire. Here bodily motions prove symptomatic of the underlying causes of the affects they express.

Van Mander supplies further examples of mixed emotion in stanzas 20–44: there is Homer’s account of Paris, whose eyes, like covert gestures, imploringly revealed his love of Helen, or Mantegna’s nymph-satyress gazing with maternal fondness at her satyr-child; both Paris and the satyress express a compound of love so sweetly intense that it shades into aching pain (vv. 20–22). Even more layered were the mixed affects that the ancient painter Euphranor gave to Paris who, as judge of the three goddesses, lover of Helen, and slayer of Achilles, combined the character traits of judicious wit, fetching desire, and spirited valor (v. 24). As his wit likely lodged in his eyes, so was concupiscence evident in his laughing mouth, manly strength in his forceful attitude (v. 25). Citing Pliny and Albert the Great in stanza 26, Van Mander identifies the eyes as the primary seats of desire, both as source and attribute. The eyes, he goes on to say in stanza 27, are multifarious in their expressive range, which modulates between joy and sorrow, compassion and bitter grief.

Moving to other facial features while keeping to the theme of mixed emotion, Van Mander asserts in stanza 28 that the depiction of sorrow’s conversion into merriment, of heaviness into lightness of spirit, may be effected by means of the motions of the brow, which can be likened to the lambent air when storm clouds are swept away by the sun. This is one of many examples of Van Mander’s tendency to read the human body as if it were a landscape, and conversely, to read landscape as if it were a human body. But the brow, though by nature disposed to reveal what the heart feels, may yet be used by cunning persons to cloak their true intentions: the term for such wily men who deck “base rancor” with a “glad brow” is “dobbel voorhoofdich” (double-browed, v. 31). Similarly, the eyebrows are complex affective indicators: on this score, in stanzas 33–34, Van Mander adduces the ancient statesman Phocion, whose forbidding brows belied his good nature (or alternatively, whose mastery over himself curbed his irascible temperament), to refute the simpleminded assumption of the physiognomists that there is a direct correlation between the motions of the brow (and eyebrows) and human nature. The relation between affect and the stirrings of the face is far more complex, as stanza 34 warns.

The philosophical distinction between joy and sorrow is of no interest to Van Mander, as he avows in stanza 35; rather, his task as schilder is to communicate the “changes and movements of the limbs, whereby one may easily recognize what our Figures are feeling or doing.” He affirms in stanzas 36 that it is indeed possible to distinguish between laughing and crying faces, although painters who fail to consult nature will tend to confuse the expression of sorrow with that of joy. Let them heed the example of the ancient sculptor Praxiteles, who portrayed a sorrowful matron beside a lighthearted woman, the one clearly weeping, the other just as clearly laughing. Stanza 39, circling back to the notion that ethoi are like colors (v. 3) and to the discussion of Antiochus’s rosy-red face as a symptom of chagrin (v. 8), emphasizes that the complexion, in concert with the eyes, brow, and eyebrows, is a telling conveyer of affect. Through skillful manipulation of color, the ancient painter Demon manages to display the compound affective character of the Athenians, disclosing their volatility, prone as they were “to be inconstant, wrathful, angry, merciful, gentle, fearful, stalwart, humble, [or] majestic” (v. 39). More than this, Demon strove to combine these affects in a single figure, whereas his fellow painter Timanthes distributed various kinds and degrees of grief amongst the Greeks shown bearing witness to the sacrifice of Iphigenia—most signally, her father Agamemnon, the intensity of whose paternal grief was subtly implied (and intensified) through the device of veiling his face. Sometimes, as stanza 44 avers, a mere wrinkle is all it takes to indicate that one affect, such as pity or sorrowful compassion, is changing into another, such as fear.

Turning from the face to the head and the body’s other limbs, Van Mander now offers, in stanzas 45–54, a detailed account of how various affects may actively be transmitted. In stanza 49, he differentiates between the expressive personification and the exemplification of affect, citing as an epitome of the latter Aristides’s Sick Person, once displayed in the Roman Temple of Fever. Equally important is the ability to depict death as the complete absence of affect: the famed Meleager Sarcophagus in Rome is much praised, he states, because immobilized by death, the hero has been shorn of all affect.

Evinced formerly by the ancient Greeks and Romans, the ability to depict emotion is not now an endowment of contemporary masters only, for as Van Mander acknowledges in stanza 53, he once saw on the Capitoline in Rome a picture of the Horatii and the Curatii, about a hundred years old, in which the shifting emotions of the Romans and the Sabines were shown as effectively, though in an antiquated style, as in any contemporary painting. Consequently, the skilled depiction of affect is not to be appreciated as contingent on the times. Another example, taken from the recent past, is Pieter Bruegel’s Massacre of the Innocents, in which the herald charged with promulgating Herod’s cruel edict reveals how a “modicum of compassion,” fleeting but detectable, underlies the mortifying obduracy he applies to the task at hand (v. 54). Therefore, says Van Mander in stanza 55, the aspiring painter must master the full spectrum of simple and complex affects, the proper depiction of which will “t’ghewin den werckman croonen met eeren” (crown the workman’s profit with honor), thereby elevating the virtue of his art.

In stanzas 56–58, Van Mander returns squarely to the theme of mixed emotions, enhancing it by reference to the use of mixed materials: he cites the example of the ancient sculptor Aristonidas, who mixed (rusted) iron with bronze to portray the blushing remorse felt by Athamas, king of Thebes, who had thrown his own son from the city’s battlements in a fit of rage. Surely, adjures Van Mander in stanza 58, painters should try to achieve in paint what Aristonidas achieved in metal. This reference to color leads him to insist, in stanzas 59–69, that painters should strive, “by fashioning and refashioning the figures with your colors,” to reveal the heart’s affects, as did Michelangelo when, following Dante, he likened Charon’s irises to burning coals circled round by fields of white, and painted his cheeks fiery red with choleric heat (v. 60). Conversely, Ovid’s personification of Envy should be not rubicund but “deathly pale” (v. 61). Correspondingly, in stanza 62, Van Mander praises Lucas van Leyden’s engraving David Playing the Harp before Saul for its painterly suggestion of color: Saul, implies Van Mander, can be seen as either red with rage or pale as “dootverw’ ” (ground color), “afflicted interiorly by fear.” Just as admirable are Giotto’s “fearful, appalled, astonished” apostles, rendered in mosaic on the façade of Old Saint Peter’s (v. 63). And foremost amongst the ancient epitomes of mixed emotions was Aristides’s painting of a vanquished city, featuring a mother, mortally wounded, whose love for her infant child mingled with anxious care lest he suck her bloodied breast milk (v. 67). Here the intermingled milk and blood stand implicitly for the difficulty of the painter’s charge of laminating diverse affects. For his fellow painters’ benefit, Van Mander imagines the precise particulars of the mother’s facial features and paling complexion.

Stanzas 70–73 function as a peroration that incorporates a rejoinder to Vasari’s claim that Michelangelo’s Last Judgment is an inimitable canon of affects unequalled before or since, each affect aligned with a precipitating sin. Quite to the contrary, protests Van Mander, the Ancients had already in their time depicted every affective kind and degree, as Pliny attests. Read in relation to the Preface of the Grondt, which presents the Netherlandish masters as heirs to the Ancients in their varieties of pictorial expertise, this closing counterargument explicitly calls upon them to exercise themselves, too, in portraying every type of affect, from the most simple to the most complex, on the model of masters such as Aristides, Parrhasius, and Timanthes.

Chapter 7, “Van de Reflecty, Reverberaty, teghen-glans oft weerschijn” (On Reflection, Reverberation, re-reflected luster, or re-reflection), discourses on light—more specifically, on reflected light—as a fundamental source of pictorial imitation. The representational properties of painting in oil colors, as becomes evident by the chapter’s close, are closely aligned with, indeed set in motion by the action of light illuminating and interacting with the surfaces it strikes. Stanza 1 thus begins with the sun, whose incandescent light, reflected back by other heavenly bodies, such as the stars and planets, outshines any other type of light. Reverberant effects of reflected and re-reflected light provide a model for the kinds and degrees of reflection to be discussed later on. Stanza 2 invokes the dawn, when night, the absence of light, recedes, and one sees the first rays of sunlight reflected and re-reflected amongst banks of cloud. Not only is such a light an affective prompt to joy, it also produces the multitudinous colors of the morning sky and, by implication, of the world at large. At dawn, states stanza 3, the rising sun’s golden light bestows colors on the azure sky, tinting it with rose-reds and flowerlike purples. In referring to these colors as “roode Roosen” and “purpuren Blommen” (red Roses and purple Blossoms), Van Mander insists on the figurative affordances of light and on its substantive representational effects: it is as if light were productive of roses and blossoms, or at the very least of their vivid images. This stanza closes by remarking that painting’s capacity to describe light and color, thereby to gratify heart and sense, exceeds the descriptive potential of poetry. In stanzas 5 and 6, Van Mander further elaborates upon light’s tendency to alter or enhance colors: not only at sunrise but also at sunset, Aurora, the personification of the dawn, reddens that which she illuminates—“Towers, Houses, Trees, Mountains, and Clifftops”; and, by a “holder reflecty” (bright reflex of light), red things become more ruddy, “vierich en gloeyende” (fiery and glowing, v. 6).

Van Mander now describes, in stanza 7, the luminous effects of the rising sun, personified by Apollo, as it casts an intensely bright bank of light upon the sea. He then shifts position, so to speak, in stanza 8, focusing less on the light source than on the “limpidly lustrous crystalline” surface of the sea or any reflective body of water that, when clearly lit, mirrors the sky above it. Reflected light is seen to trigger or, better, enkindle this mimetic process of representation.

Stanzas 9–24 describe other luminous phenomena caused by light reflection, the double rainbow, above all, whose second bow, unlike the primary arc that signifies the covenant struck by God with Noah, instead simply exemplifies the action of re-reflection in its purest form (v. 11). Likewise, the “diversche Sonnen” (multiple Suns) sometimes seen at sunrise or sunset are nothing more than re-reflected images of the sun. In stanzas 14–16, with respect to the great waterfall at Terni, Van Mander considers the circumstances under which prismatic rainbows become visible in the falling water’s mists. And in stanzas 17–18, he puts forward the hypothesis that the rainbow’s colors are elicited from the elemental interaction of air and fire operative in rain clouds. After calling to mind, in stanzas 19 and 20, the sumptuous, lapidary colors of the rainbow described by the prophets Ezechiel and Jesus Sirach, and comparing them to the erubescent colors of the high priest Simon’s robes, Van Mander perpends, in stanzas 21–23, the sequence of colors comprised by the rainbow, one hue passing imperceptibly into another—purple to flesh-tint, whitish carmine to orange, then red, red to yellow and bright blue, and azure back to purple. In stanza 23, he provides technical advice, pointing out that the rainbow’s spectrum of tints reveals which colors are best matched to which. Painters, he continues in stanza 24, should lay out their palettes accordingly, also placing white close to hand so that lighter shades of each rainbow color can easily be mixed.

Stanzas 25–33 retail various effects of Reverberacy (Reverberation), Van Mander’s term for the process whereby light cast by some bright source—“moonlight, firelight, lightning, candlelight, [or] the flame of a forge”—illumines its surroundings, tinting objects (v. 25). Thus does moonlight with its glow “bestow a pale glow, wherever she reaches,” and lightning’s “bluish fire” causes darkness to take flight (v. 26). Alert to such phenomena, says Van Mander in stanza 27, the ancient painter Antiphilus painted a boy blowing upon a flame, his face flickering with reverberant light, and Echion, in an epitome of Reflexy Const (the Art of Reflection), portrayed a bride lit by the fiery glow of a matron’s torch. For Van Mander, reflected light carries an affective charge, as his account of Alcina lit by torchlight, her sweet enchantments thereby made all the sweeter in Ruggiero’s eyes (paraphrased from Ludovico Ariosto’s Orlando Furioso) demonstrates; this processional scene functions as an epitome of reflected light’s power to anticipate joy and magnify pleasure. But reflected light can also instill terror, as the description of a disastrous conflagration in stanza 31, of Vulcan’s fearsome forge in stanza 32, and of hellfire’s horrific glow in stanza 33, make patently apparent. Stanzas 34–35 supply further particulars for the depiction of fire: Van Mander counsels the painter that to intensify the phosphorescence of firelight, he ought to silhouette a fully shadowed figure against the flames—say, one of Vulcan’s Cyclopes. Stanza 36 qualifies this advice by reminding the painter that anyone standing behind the “fiery sparks must bear the livery of re-reflected light,” so that they are seen to be lit by reflections and coruscating re-reflections.

Stanzas 37–38 initiate a roll call of masters of Reflexy Const: by reference to Raphael’s Liberation of Saint Peter, Van Mander urges painters to observe closely how reflected light interacts with adjacent shadows. In stanzas 39–41, he lavishes praise on Jacopo Bassano for his depiction of “flames, torches, [and] fiery hanging lamps” as well as of kitchen implements—pots and pans of copper, tin, or iron—that reflect light variously. Van Mander thus calls upon painters to pay heed to how light not only colors surfaces but is also colored by them. In stanza 41, he also makes mention of Jacopo’s invention of another method of depicting reflected light, on slate panels highlighted in goldpoint; this leads him to bestow a like praise on the “Netherlandish-Italian painter” Gilles Cognet, whose nocturnes ingeniously incorporate “raised bits of gilt husk” to represent torchlight, as in a nighttime scene, set in Amsterdam, of a lottery drawing, or his scenes of hell or Troy ablaze. Stanzas 45–49, apropos of Cornelis Corneliszoon’s painting of Plato’s Cave and Hendrick Goltzius’s Venus, Bacchus, and Ceres, drawn in pen and ink on parchment, professes that Reflexy Const, formerly identified with the painters of ancient Sicyon, now finds its greatest practitioners in Haarlem (see chapter 7, infra, Figs. 3 & 4).

Stanzas 50–55 revisit the theme of how colored lights interact, first broached in stanzas 39–41. The flesh-tints of figures shown in full daylight, lying or sitting amidst greenery, will be tinted green (v. 50), just as “wool, silk, or linen” will cast their colors upon “faces and naked bodies” (v. 51); similarly, “gold or silver vessels, vases, … and glasses in which wine has been poured” will “stain [white linen] tablecloths with reflected lights” (v. 52). Van Mander adduces the paintings of Pieter Aertsen, based as they are on “Natuere, der Schilders Meestresse” (Nature, the Painters’ Mistress), in which he displays his mastery of Reflexy Const, showing how the colors of various objects mutually reverberate and re-reflect. Reflexy Const is what allows him to deceive the viewer’s eyes, confers seeming substance on the objects he portrays, and brings them convincingly to life, animating them through the lively motion of colored light. In consequence, Reflexy Const and the art of pictorial illusion go hand in hand, the former enabling the latter. When all is said and done, as stanzas 57–61 avow, painters, if they wish to master the art of reflection, must look to the occurrences of mirroring in Nature, whose still, watery places are often seen perfectly to reflect whatever lies at the water’s edge (v. 59). As the poet Ariosto, in his description of the hidden glade where Angelica, fleeing Rinaldo, sought shelter and lighted upon a mirroring stream, imitated Nature (vv. 58–59), so painters who enter Pictura’s labyrinth must let the skein of Nature guide them as they strive to master Reflexy Const, imitating all that Nature contains (v. 61).

Chapter 8, “Van het Landtschap” (On Landscape), develops the topic raised in stanzas 11–13 of chapter 5, where Van Mander apprises painters that graceful ordonnance entails the provision of distant landscapes captivating to the viewer’s eyes. As landscape invites the beholder to enter the image, allowing him to wander into the fictive setting and journey optically, so chapter 8 opens, in stanzas 1–7, by calling upon the young, aspiring schilder to rise at dawn, exit the city gates, and go walking in the countryside, alert to its many visual pleasures. Van Mander sets the scene in floriferous high summer; what the painter there sees recapitulates the sequence of sights just described in the opening stanzas of chapter 7: clouds tinted purple by dawn’s rosy light (v. 4), various color mixtures melding into the molten gold of the rising sun (v. 5), the sky becoming azure blue as the earth’s verdant greens intensify (v. 6). It is as if landscape were the pictorial subject that best combines the criteria of History and of Reflexy Const. The repeated commands (“Observe,” “See”) that initiate stanzas 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8, emphasize that landscape involves close viewing of nature’s sundry fugitive effects, first by the painter, then by the landscape painting’s attentive, enthralled viewers.

Stanzas 8–11 focus on the optics of viewing a distant landscape or landscape painting: as viewers’ eyes penetrate the landscape, tracking along the orthogonal axes of furrows and fields, they will find faraway mountains merging into ambient clouds, the clifftops virtually indistinguishable from the mists that enshroud them (v. 8). All things will recede toward the horizon, diminishing by degrees as they approach a notional vanishing point (v. 9). “Giving thought to the density of the blue-bodied Air,” one will depict sunlight filtered through cloud, dimming one’s backgrounds most moderately, not excessively (v. 10). Moreover, zones of sky, seen mirrored in bodies of water, will appear to blend “from above to below” (v. 11).

In stanzas 12–15, Van Mander expanding his inventory of landscape types, describes how inclement weather should be portrayed. He begins with an admonitory digression: if Apelles managed to depict thunder and lightning with the few colors at his disposal, should not today’s painters, equipped with a superabundance of colors, aspire to imitate the many “vreemde dinghen” (rare or curious things) Nature puts on show: “black thunder clouds, ill-favored and spectral … lightning bolts,” and other fearsome phenomena, “snow, hail, squalls, glazed frost, hoarfrost, and suffocating, oppressive mists”? Conversely, urges Van Mander in stanzas 15–18, painters should apply themselves, too, to the depiction of fair weather, when the radiant sun, as if wreathed round with red lakes and a purplish tint, dispels all-obscuring mists (v. 17).

How to enhance the pictorial illusion of depth by seamlessly weaving foreground into middle-ground, middle-ground into background, furnishes the topic of stanzas 19–23. The picture’s zones must appear undulant, their constituent parts no less imbricated than the waves of the sea (v. 20). And to facilitate the eyes’ motion from foreground to background, painters, even while imitating Pieter Bruegel, who tended to anchor his foregrounds with a conspicuous tree, should yet choose to leave their foregrounds somewhat open, and will avail themselves of half-tints, rather than placing hard darks next to sweet lights (v. 21). These precepts lead Van Mander to conclude, in stanza 23, that if verscheydenheyt (variety), “both of color and form,” is what makes for the beauty of landscape, one must nevertheless take care to preserve the “welstants ghenietens” (pleasurable consonance) of the picture’s many parts, their mutual concinnity. Stanzas 24–26 contrast the landscape type favored by Italian masters such as Titian, Tintoretto, and Girolamo Muziano, who organize their “solidly construct[ed]” pictures around a single view into the distance, with the multiple views of the landscape type perfected by Bruegel, who variedly mobilizes the eyes, leading them up the sides of high mountains, then down into dizzying valleys, as they make their headlong way toward the distant horizon, coiling past rushing streams (vv. 24–25). Bruegel is lauded, too, for his coloristic decorum—the skill with which he reserves browns for barren hillsides, greens for shady meadows and dales.

Stanzas 27–35 layer the description of springtime landscapes onto an account of seasonally appropriate oil colors—emerald and sapphire greens for grassy swards and burgeoning meadows, blonde yellow for fields of unripe corn and oats, celestial blue for flax flowering amidst waves of wheat, buckwheat, and clover. For Van Mander, landscape, more than any other pictorial subject, becomes a pretext for discussing pigments and paint handling. The proper appreciation of landscape painting involves a like appreciation of the painter’s materials and brushwork, as stanzas 32–33 make plain with their instructions to brush “blue-tinted woodlands” “with white” “on grounds of ash,” and to stipple small trees onto steep cliffs the color of “light ash.” In painting peasants’ huts and hamlets, one must cleave close to the colors of Nature, eschewing the artificial appearance of saturated reds, such as vermilion or red lead.

The reference to stippled trees climbing up mountainsides leads, in stanzas 34–35, to a discussion of how alpine peaks should be painted, their sides deeply cut by sinuous, serpentine waterways. Stanzas 36–39 then turn to the depiction of trees, the true test of a paint’s “manier” (manner, v. 36) and “handelingh aenghename” (pleasant handling, v. 37). Arboreal foliage, more than any constituent part of the landscape, requires an “aerdigh’ en fraeye manier” (subtle and fine manner) and a “goeden slach” (good stroke); therein lies the “cracht” (force) of the landscape (v. 36). In stanza 37, Van Mander lays stress on the fact that the painting of leaves, like the painting of hair, sky, and drapery, is a matter of gheest, not “leersaem Const” (teachable art). The spirited depiction of such things issues from native ability, from the painter’s lively spirit, and also from his memories of things seen in Nature (in Van Mander’s facultative psychology, gheest being operatively associated with the mnemonic faculty). Stanza 38 reminds painters that each species of leaf requires its distinctive color.

Recalling Van Mander’s canon of beautiful bodily motion in stanzas 10–12 of chapter 3, stanzas 39–40 advise the painter to make his trees rise from thick to thin, turning as they rise. This is another example of the way Van Mander entangles his accounts of figural and landscape painting. Stanzas 41–47, with specific reference to the ancient painter Ludius, famed for his landscapes interspersed with humorous anecdotal scenes, enjoins the painter to populate his landscape with “storyken[s]” (little stories) taken from poetry or prose. If he wishes to convert his landscape into a “cleyn Weerelt” (little World), a convincingly self-sufficient place, a self-contained fictional entity, he will punctuate it throughout with these diverting anecdotes. The type of landscape Van Mander here recommends strongly recalls the elaborate ekphrastic landscape punctuated by Ovidian scenes, with which he exemplifies the richly varied mode of historical ordonnance in stanzas 45–60 of chapter 5. This additional analogy between Historie and Landtchap gives yet more evidence of the mutually contingent conceptions of History and Landscape at play in the Grondt.

Chapter 9, “Van Beesten, Dieren, en Voghels” (On Cattle, Animals, and Birds), amplifying upon the theme of verscheydenheyt (variety), “both of color and form,” highlighted in stanza 23 of chapter 5, commences by adjuring the reader not to play the part of Dionisius Anthropographus, an ancient painter “who could fashion to his liking nothing but Human figures” (v. 1). Quite to the contrary, painters should instead strive to be “fraey … in alle dinghen” (skillful at everything), not least in portraying the animals described in this chapter (v. 2). Chapter 9, in its emphasis on the proper portrayal of hair or fur, like chapter 10, “Van Laken oft Draperinghe” (On Fabrics or Drapery), continues the discussion of gheestigh subject matter, begun in stanza 37 of chapter 8: “For leaves, hair, the sky, and drapery, this is all spirit, and the spirit teaches how to fashion them.” Van Mander starts with the noblest of beasts—the horse—the species most closely attuned to human beings in quality, temperament, and intention, by turns fearless and forceful, yet tractable (v. 4), capable of grief and compunction (v. 5), conformable to its master’s will, even unto death (v. 6). The horse, as it turns out, has an affective range nearly as great as the human figure.

In stanzas 8–12, Van Mander provides some basic technical advice on how best to depict a well-proportioned steed, even while stating that he dislikes hard and fast precepts and measurements, the rigorous application of which will usually result in a “swaer manier” (plodding manner, v. 9). Stanza 10, which specifies that well-formed hooves must be “lustrous jet black,” and stanza 12, which instructs painters “to give [a horse’s] hair its proper color,” anticipate the topic of stanzas 13–16 on equine coloring. Although Van Mander insists that the painter is always free to paint whatsoever colors he wishes—“piebald,” for instance, or “white and yellow”—he styles brown-red and blue-gray the most beautiful colors. Stanza 14 implicitly invokes Reflexy Const, calling upon painters to master the “luster and shine of hide … as revealed in Sunshine,” and to pay attention to the “flickering hair of the flanks.” Stanzas 15–16 encourage the painter closely to mark the vagaries of Nature, her propensity to counterfeit various materials on horses’ hides: some Neapolitan or Campagnan horses appear “coated in honey” (v. 15), some apple-grays give the impression of “scales” (v. 16), some flecked whites comes across as being spotted “with little flies” (v. 16). Stanza 17 reminds the reader that color and Actitude (Attitude) go hand in hand: Van Mander emphasizes that equine attitudes require as much mastery as human ones, if horses are to be shown moving in a “sweet, well-tempered way.”

Stanzas 18–23 rehearse multiple anecdotes about the depiction of a specific fugitive effect, the froth seen to issue from an active horse’s mouth: Protogenes, Nealcas, and other ancient painters often relied on luck, chance, or mere accident, says Van Mander, when portraying such things that (like leaves, hair, sky, and drapery) fall beyond the scope of set rules or practical diligence (v. 20). The moral of these linked anecdotes, distilled in stanzas 22–23, is that painters, in their efforts to imitate Nature, must not paint “met vlijt” ([too] diligently) or produce images that look “figuerlijck gheschildert” (painted in an artificially contrived fashion). Furthermore, in their persistent attempts to represent such apparencies, they must seize upon any ways and means that prove expedient, any modus operandi that yields a good result: “And howsoever such things be done, whether with the thumbs, or with a sponge, or in some other way out of the ordinary, if the result looks good, I hold it in esteem” (v. 23). Recalling the Plinian anecdote about Apelles, who left it to live horses, by their firsthand reaction, to judge whether his painted horses were true to life (vv. 24–25), Van Mander adduces several works of ancient art—the Capitoline Marcus Aurelius on Horseback, the bronze horses on the façade of Saint Mark’s, Venice, the Horsemen of Monte Cavallo—to demonstrate how expert and anatomically precise the Ancients were at portraying horses (vv. 26–27).

From stanza 28 onward, the topic shifts mainly to “bulls, oxen, and cows,” which, as Van Mander observes in stanza 29, “share a similar form” but must be differentiated according to color, temperament, and various features peculiar to the breed, such as horns (vv. 30–31), furry locks (v. 32), and shaggy coats (v. 33). With reference to the beauty of livestock, says Van Mander in stanza 34, one must look above all to Nature, “practic[ing] after this living thing and that.” In painting cattle and other beasts after the life, Jacopo Bassano is as worthy to be prized amongst the moderns (v. 36) as were Pausias and Nicias amongst the Ancients (vv. 37–38). After bestowing fulsome praise on the Farnese Bull, sculpted by Apollonius and Tauriscus of Rhodes and displayed in present-day Rome (vv. 40–41), Van Mander concludes, in stanzas 42–46, with twelve epigrams on Myron’s famously lifelike bronze heifer (paraphrased from Pierre Ronsard’s French translation of epigrams from the Greek Anthology), on the manner and meaning of which, precisely poised between truth to Nature and the display of artifice, a compound Van Mander very much endorses (see section 2, supra, of this “Introduction,” “The Sources, Title-Page, and Scope of the Grondt”). The final stanza (v. 47) takes up the epigrammatic theme of Nature and artifice in concert, advising the painter that even when he devises “Monsters en Draken” (Monsters and Dragons), he can “do nothing better than direct [himself] to Nature.” There he will find some animal on which to model his chimaeric creatures in how they “lie, lope, step, and amble,” taking care “to paint all things after the life” and, simultaneously, to paint “everything subtly,” that is, to reconcile Nature and artifice.

Chapter 10, “Van Laken oft Draperinghe” (On Fabrics and Drapery), concerns the representation of clothing—specifically, the texture, sheen, color, and drape of various types of fabric, as they interact with the human body at rest and in motion, their patterns of folds changing accordingly. Fabrics and drapery are the fourth of the gheestigh subject matters listed by Van Mander in chapter 8, and respectively treated there and in chapters 7, 9, and 10, where he discusses kinetic skies, leaves, hair and fur, and now textiles. Although the beauty of the nude transcends “every variety of linen, worm-spun silk, and garment of Tyrian purple,” declares Van Mander in stanzas 2–3, modesty and the exigencies of Northern climes compel us to clothe ourselves as befits our station—purple for kings, white for maidens, black for widows, roughly woven grays for herdsmen and mariners (v. 3). Therefore, one of the painter’s foremost tasks is accurately to render the varieties of woven cloth—woolens, twills, serges, silks, and other stuffs—either “hanging flat or lying creased” (v. 5). As prime examples, Van Mander cites Albrecht Dürer’s creased draperies and Jan Gossart’s finely-spun cloths (v. 6), but best to be imitated is Lucas van Leyden, whose fabrics resulted from ceaseless study after the life. What all three masters evince is the gheestigh nature of stuffs that, in the manner they are joined, girt, and bound, appear to be “matter[s] of ‘gheestigh soecken’ (spirited conjecture) [and] ‘versierich vinden’ (clever invention),” more so even than foliage or hair (v. 8).

Stanzas 9–11 argue that the seven motions characteristic of the human figure, in chapter 3, and of landscape and the way it is viewed, in chapter 8, are applicable, too, to drapery as it “stretches and dangles,” is folded “out and in,” “slip[s] out of sight,” or “recedes” (vv. 9–10) in accompaniment to the projection and recession of “shoulders, thighs, knees, belly, calves, or buttocks” (v. 11). As the disposition of trees is compared to the Actitude of bodies in chapter 5, so here, in stanza 12, networks of folds are analogized to the branches growing from a tree. With these criteria in mind, Van Mander heaps further praise on Dürer and Lucas in stanzas 13–16, singling out Dürer’s late Marian prints, in which brightly lit fields of flat fabric alternate with multifaceted shadows (v. 14), and Lucas’s Dance of the Magdalene, Triumph of Mordecai, and Temptation of Christ, which feature fine, flowing trains and dense networks of minute folds. In stanza 14, he insists that credit be given where credit is due: both masters, he protests, have been profitable objects of imitation to their Italian counterparts who, by slightly altering their sources, cunningly hide their accrued debt of borrowings. His misgivings, however, do not extend to the Venetians: in stanza 18, he lauds them for their skillful painting of “sijden en weerschijnsels verscheyden” (silks and various lustrous stuffs). In stanza 19, with the Venetian painters in mind, he previews the subject of chapter 11, “Van het Sorteren, en by een schicken der Verwen” (On Sorting and combining Colors), while also recalling the subject of chapter 7: he lists adjacencies of pigment that can be used to represent reflections—lakes with light blues, smalts with lake whites, light massicot with green, ash white with yellow-lake, purple with red or blue. Stanza 22, likewise anticipatory, gives an example of the kind of technical advice he will offer more abundantly in chapter 12: he counsels the painter to give his velvets and satins a “gloedich doorschijnen” (glowing transparency) by means of color combination, modulation, and, most importantly, masterful glazing. Stanza 23 follows up by noting how and why the reflective properties of silken velvets must be painted differently from those of satins.

Stanzas 24–26 then rate various Italian masters known for their painted stuffs, amongst whom Titian, whose widely circulated woodcuts attest his fine handling of fabrics, is principally eulogized. By contrast, asserts Van Mander in stanzas 27–29, the Ancients displayed slight skill at draping fabrics, as their statues, “with linens hanging wet, like cords,” reveal (v. 27). Schematic, repetitive, and leaden, their stuffs neither respond to the figure’s motion nor flutter with the breeze (v. 29). In stanzas 30–31, as an antidote to such deficiency, Van Mander reminds his readers that draperies, animated by Gheest, should proceed directly from the painter’s lively Idee—that is, “imaginaty, oft ghedacht” (imagination, or memory)—so as to move “in a subtle, true way” (v. 30) and to stream gracefully, as befits the veils of nymphs and the skirts of bacchantes (v. 31).

Color and coloring are introduced as topics of concern in chapter 5, associated with the depiction of affect in chapter 6, identified with gheestigh paint handling in chapter 8, and rise further into prominence in chapters 9 and 10, as we have just seen. Chapter 11, “Van het Sorteren, en by een schicken der Verwen” (On Sorting and combining Colors), takes up the subject raised in stanza 19 of chapter 10—how to apportion colors in such a way as to enhance their respective properties, by setting them side by side. Van Mander hastens to clarify, in stanza 1, that his chosen topic here is adjacencies, not mixtures of pigments. He directs painters, in stanzas 2 and 3, to call to mind, as an epitome of sorting, the ancient painter Pausias’s famed picture, known as the Stephanoplocos, in which he portrayed his beloved Glycera plaiting wreaths and gathering posies whose floral colors, “ten-thousandfold,” she was seen to combine in “constich voeghen” (artful congress). Like Pausias, the painter would do well to follow Nature, in whose springtime dales, as in the vale of Tempe, the vivid colors of florets “in their thousands” are easily discernible, none eliding into the verdant greens of the surrounding fields (v. 4). In art as in Nature, adds Van Mander in stanza 5, even the color green should stand out from green—trees from plants, plants from meadows, whether by day or by night.

Throughout chapter 11, the description of natural phenomena supplies a touchstone for the proper sorting of colors: for example, as the sky’s bright blue is said to enhance the sun’s golden radiance, so yellow and blue can be conjugated, and also red and green, red and blue, purple and yellow, and green and white, “no less than Vineyards accord with fields of Wheat” (v. 7). In stanza 8, Van Mander enjoins painters to cast their eyes on Nature’s colorful creations, such as seashells and birds, especially the parrot, in which she “sows [colors] by sorting them.” Nature further teaches that purple and green, like blue and purple and green and blue, are gracefully matched, and that all combine well with flesh-tints, unlike red, which sits better beside yellow, just as yellow abides well by green. In sorting colors, affirms Van Mander in stanzas 10–11, Bruegel was expert beyond measure, as his use of gray stuffs “shaded as if without shadows” demonstrates, from out of which a red or azure blue would occasionally blossom forth, in the manner of poets who season their stories and arguments with pregnant sayings. After citing another master of grays, Raphael da Reggio (v. 12), Van Mander speeds to his conclusion, mentioning as an aside that well sorted colors enhance the appearance of both flesh and fabric and heighten the effect of projection in “landscapes and buildings” (v. 13). He admits to marshaling his energies for the chapters to follow that will bring his magnum opus to a close.

Whereas chapter 11 centered on the juxtaposition of consonant colors, chapter 12, “Van wel schilderen, oft Coloreren” (On painting well, or Coloring), focuses on brushstrokes and mixing colors, especially the production of flesh-tints which Van Mander identifies as the most complex of color mixtures. Stanzas 1–3 define the relation between “teyckenen” and “schilderen” (drawing and painting), likening painting to the “Gheest oft de Siele” (Spirit or the Soul) that enlivens drawing’s “doode streken” (dead strokes), bringing them to life with the brush’s colored strokes. Or again, drawing is like the clay effigy moulded by Prometheus and adorned by Minerva, painting like the heavenly flame with which the titan brought that dead image to life. Van Mander conflates this effigy with Pandora, thereby implying that painting has the power to encompass (i.e., to represent) the “plenitude of every good thing” (v. 2). In a further analogy, he conceives of drawing and painting as paired, and compares their union to the marriage of poetry and music, whereby the affianced sounds of both are enhanced and vivified (v. 3).

Stanzas 4–8 describe two methods of combining drawing and painting to produce a picture. Some masters, “sure of hand, quick-witted, well-apprised,” will prefer to improvise directly, drawing on their panels the lineaments of whatever “Ide’ ” (Idea, i.e., mental image based in imagination and memory) they have pre-painted in their mind’s eye (vv. 4–6). Copious in invention, they will then quickly apply the colored underpainting, in the process revising what they have drawn (v. 5). In stanza 6, Van Mander warns that their bold, resolute method of “verwe handelen” (color handling), which moves briskly from intention to execution, will be appropriate only to those “Painter-Augustuses” whose command over their art is imperial, nonpareil. The second method, detailed in stanzas 7–8, results from “much effortful consideration”: sketches and preliminary drawings precede the application of the finished drawing in black lead over a “thinly tempered” priming. The underdrawing must be meticulously detailed and precise, “without the smallest stroke out of place,” and the oil colors should then be applied with the utmost care over this drawn template (v. 8).

Stanzas 9–15 digress at length on the Italian method of painting in fresco with the help of “well-studied” cartoons; Van Mander reports that Michelangelo considered this technique “manly” and, conversely, deprecated painting in oils as “Women’s labor or toil” (v. 11). He rejoins, in stanzas 12–13, that pace Michelangelo, fresco painting is little practiced in the Netherlands, where “hard weather” is so inimical to “stone-based plaster.” Having said this, he emphasizes that in principle he approves of the cartoon as a method of careful preparation serviceable to any technique of painting: howsoever one paints, the cartoon must be composed boldly, at the scale of the final picture, worked up tonally, and brushed in a “painterly way on the ground color” (vv. 14–15). Indeed, as Van Mander avouches in stanzas 16–18, early Netherlandish masters used cartoons as prototypes for their precisely painted panels, tracing them onto the polished white ground and then, on this basis, executing a finished underdrawing in black chalk or black lead (v. 16). Using diluted lamp-black, they then added details and subtle shading before covering the underdrawing with a “thin layer of priming … the color of flesh,” diligently bringing the picture to a semifinished state; finally, they added a thin layer of color, with an “application deft, lustrous, and pure” (vv. 17–18). He adds, in stanza 19, that Dürer, Bruegel, and Lucas were all masters of this technique, at which “first amongst the first” was Jan van Eyck.

By contrast, he complains in stanza 20, painters now work paint as if they were sculpting it, rather than laying their colors “cleanly, finely, and sportively” (i.e., with a sure but free hand). In stanza 21, Van Mander makes patently clear his preference for netticheyt (precision) in handling of the brush, so long as the brushwork, for all its precision, never fails to display “aerdt, gheest, en cloeckheyt” (subtlety, spirit, and ingenuity), appearing fully resolved and thus retaining its welstandt (concinnity) “from afar as well as close by.” Pictures made in this way will captivate the viewer’s eyes, causing them “to cleave fast with constant desire.” In stanzas 22–25, he adduces Titian as a paragon of netticheyt, on the example of his youthful works, executed precisely so as to please from any vantage point, near or far. His inimitable later works, however, though toilsomely brushed, appear from close up to consist of mere “patches and rough strokes,” showing their netticheyt only from a distance (v. 23). Here netticheyt is a paradoxical effect that results from brushwork as judiciously applied as its looks slapdash. Quoting Vasari, in stanza 25, Van Mander designates these late works by Titian paradigms of “labor … concealed by Great Art” (i.e., of the art that conceals art).

The discussion of Titian’s two manners, along with the earlier account of the two methods of combining drawing and painting, leads to the conclusion, stated in stanza 26, that Northern painters today have two manners at their disposal, as evinced by Titian’s early and late handelinghe (paint handling), diligently precise on one hand, rough yet judicious on the other. Van Mander, who clearly prefers the former of the two, urges aspiring painters from the start “to acquaint [themselves] with a fastidious manner and a precise beginning.” In stanzas 27–29, however, he issues a pair of caveats: if they wish their figures to “project in the round,” painters must eschew sharp highlights, instead relying on re-reflection and deft use of the ground color to effect smooth transitions from shadow to light; and equally important, they must carefully choose pigments and color mixtures conducive to producing “incarnadine flesh-tints” true to the body’s lustrous complexion, its vermilion bloom and glow (vv. 28–29). So crucial is mastery of “carnatie” (flesh-tint) that Van Mander devotes eight stanzas to it (30–37): “carnatie” must be varied according to age, sex, and station (v. 30); to achieve variation of this sort, vermilion must be layered over selected colors, such as yellow ocher for the depiction of sunbaked flesh (v. 31); highlights must take the form of flesh-tints, and pure lead white never utilized for this purpose (vv. 32–33). By way of example, Van Mander cites a Nativity by Titian, once described to him by Goltzius, in which a single flesh-tinted highlight shone forth from a shepherd’s brow, while all the adjacent colors “sped away into a haze of shadows” (v. 34).

In stanzas 35–35, Van Mander, admitting that the Italians are better at procuring the effect of living flesh than the Netherlanders, charges his fellow painters to redouble their efforts to paint flesh neither drily nor piscinely; they must first of all realize that any flesh-tint consists of “soo veelderley verwen” (a great variety of colors), and that in painting the human face, no less than in painting a “pleasing Landscape,” “green, blue, yellow, indeed every color” comes into play (v. 36). In deploying these many colors, the painter should hold fast to the apothegm that “everything must gently merge,” as Nature, who “always model[s] for the best,” clearly shows to any good painter who, working “after the life,” allows her to quicken him (v. 37). Therefore, adjures Van Mander, let bad habits and false opinions be dropped by all painters who have been misled; better for them to be untrue to whatever has falsely guided them, to improve themselves than to behave like obstinate, “contumacious sectarian[s]” (i.e., stubborn adherents of false doctrines).

Stanzas 38–40 enforce Van Mander’s cautionary remarks, appending a further admonition: painters should abstain from admixing lampblack with any other pigments, most of all with flesh-tints, since it will actively decay, spoiling every other color. So, too, he warns in stanzas 41–42, massicot, minium, and Spanish green should be banished from any flesh-tint, and, for the application of the purest pigments, brushes must be kept exactingly clean (v. 42). He closes, in stanza 43, with some highly technical advice regarding the use of pigments, such as smalts, prone to discoloration due to their unstable reaction to oil media.

Chapter 13, “On the origin, nature, force, and effect of Colors,” reflects upon the ontologies of colors, starting with their source in God, whom Van Mander presents as their first principle and efficient cause. He opens by proclaiming that all things have their proper colors, given them by their divine Creator, who like an “artful Sculptor and Painter” is the originator of every form and being (v. 1). As colors first came into being when God separated light from darkness, so now, even when obscured by shadows and indiscernible to human sense, they continue to exist as a distinctive quality of things (vv. 2–3). All accidental properties, asserts Van Mander in stanza 4, derive from the four elements, colors being no exception (v. 4).

Van Mander propounds a formal definition of color in stanza 5: color is the “furthermost clarity of any body from within which it is materialized” as the “substance of Light.” Bright daylight thus heightens the eyes’ innate ability to discriminate amongst the colors of things. In stanza 6, he affirms that no thing, howsoever strange or unusual its form, can exist without color. In stanza 7, he distinguishes between natural and artificial colors, those made by Nature and those made by human manufacture. And in stanza 8, he qualifies the definition just put forward in stanza 5, specifying with respect to the function of colors that they are the “natural quickening of [the surfaces] of all things” in human eyes; whether “monochrome, mixed, or polychrome,” these colored things “awaken the eye’s hungry gaze,” causing the beholder ravenously to crave that which he sees, as if it were food.

Colors not only supply the means whereby all things can be differentiated, they also exercise an affective force on persons, emboldening or startling them, oppressing or exhilarating (v. 9), even causing mothers to give birth to children colored like the things that once affrighted them (vv. 10–11). Stanzas 13–16 describe further affordances of color, which can seduce or beguile, refresh, please, or delight. So attractive are the colors of a woman’s body, avows Van Mander in stanza 17, that Scipio and Alexander came to be much admired less for their martial deeds than for controlling their rampant desire when faced by ladies of fine coloring. In stanza 18, he reminds the reader that black and white are colors, too: here he credits the affects triggered by texts written in black on a field of white, as much to their contents as to the colors of pen, ink, and paper. Paraphrasing Girolamo Benzoni’s History of the New World, in stanzas 19–22, he recounts how the natives of Peru, though they knew nothing about European writing, had their own impressive system of chronicling affairs of state by means of knotted cords, variously colored. As this and other examples show, various peoples respond to colors differently: black thus conduces to joy amongst the Javanese, white to sorrow, as Van Mander reports in stanza 23. In closing, he acknowledges the fine colors of “unalloyed God,” “unblemished glass,” and “rare gemstones” such as “Sardonyx and Jasper, Chrysolite, Hyacinth, Topaz, Amethyst, Emerald, [and] Chrysoprase,” which transport the heart and mind heavenward, allowing persons to glimpse the beauty of the new Jerusalem even in this life (vv. 25–26).

Chapter 14, “Bediedinghen der Verwen, watter mede beteyckent can worden” (On the Interpretation of Colors, and what they can signify), the last in the sequence of four on color and coloring, purports to examine the representative and signifying functions of colors, amongst which the color yellow is first in rank, not only because it is used to portray the radiant sun, chief source of the light that makes all colored things visible, but also because yellow, in that it represents the golden glow of sunlight, can also collaterally be seen to represent gold itself, the chiefest, most precious, and most desirable of metals (vv. 1–2). Although the “intemperate desire” for gold has spawned much evil, this does not necessarily redound to gold’s discredit, reasons Van Mander in stanza 3; the metal, in and of itself, is not iniquitous. Stanzas 4 and 5 dwell on the etymology of the term “gold”: derivative from Aurora (saffronlike and glowing) or Aura (luster), it can also connote the human inclination readily “to behold … whatever shines gaily, with clarity and brightness” (v. 5). From stanza to stanza, Van Mander explores the denotative and connotative values of gold, constructing a loosely associative chain of signifying functions, mutually, sometimes tangentially linked via relations of analogy: for instance, in stanza 6, the color yellow, by dint of representing the golden light of the sun, stands also for golden-haired Phoebus, who in turn signifies the Godhead, the “fountainhead of all beauty”; and since beauty in all its forms, visible and invisible, comes from God, yellow can be said, too, under certain circumstances, to signify that divinely “beauteous beauty” which consists in “what is invisibly beautiful.”

In fact, twenty-one of chapter 14’s thirty-two stanzas consider the meanings of gold and of the colors used to portray it, starting, as we have seen, with yellow. Stanzas 7 and 8 list the royal connotations of gold, the most “beautiful color,” as well as ascribing the invention of cloth of gold jointly to King Attalus and the Babylonians. Stanzas 9 and 10 inventory some of gold’s uses in Scripture: to ornament Solomon’s Temple, making it “cheerful and beautiful beyond measure, indeed incredibly precious”; to signify the fidelity of Rebecca, in Genesis 24, and the Bride of the Lord in Psalm 44 (45); and to urge the Church of Laodicea to renew its faltering faith, in Revelation 3. In heraldry, says Van Mander in stanza 11, quoting liberally here as elsewhere from Hippolyte Cocheris Sicille’s Blazon of Colors and Arms, Liveries, and Devices, gold, the highest metal, “denotes wealth, high birth, magnanimity, and magnificence.” In stanza 12, he briefly comments on the heraldic significance of the colors blue, gray, green violet, and black; and in stanza 13, he mentions that the meaning of gold somewhat changes when it is displayed beside these and other colors: alongside flesh-tints, for example, it signifies “sober affluence” and a “rational person of good estate.” Summing up, he states in stanza 14 that for all these reasons yellow, especially when it verges on white, was construed in the days of Moses and Solomon as the most eminent of colors.

He distinguishes the latter-day proliferation of yellows from the four-color palette of the Ancients, in stanza 15: whereas they had only yellow ocher, painters now have access to five species of the color yellow—massicot, schiet-yellow, and the two orpiments, in addition to ocher. He adds, in stanza 16, that minium, too, can be used whenever painters need to describe a golden yellow “tilting toward orange,” but on no account should they rely on gold itself to depict gold. Stanzas 17–21 develop this theme: the magnificent golden ornaments worn by Virgil’s Dido as she sallied forth to hunt will be prized when pictured in colors rather than gilt; although golden frames enhance a picture’s beauty, within the well-made picture proper, gold foil should be forbidden.

Stanzas 22–23 turn from gold to silver, the metal most highly placed after gold, the beauty of which can best be portrayed by the color white. Stanza 24 enumerates further heraldic meanings of gold and silver used in conjunction with red, blue, green, purple, and / or black. According to stanza 25, no coat of arms should contain these colors in the absence of gold and / or silver, and conversely, gold and / or silver are never found in such devices without one or more of these adjacent colors. Van Mander brings the chapter to a close in stanzas 26–30, wherein he respectively correlates various colors, gold and silver included, to the planets (v. 26), the virtues (v. 27), the ages of man (v. 28), the temperaments (v. 29), the elements (v. 29), and the four seasons (v. 30). Finally, chapters 31 and 32 constitute a compendious peroration on Van Mander’s poetic project, now ended, of writing a verse treatise on schilderconst. He apologizes that had circumstances permitted, he would have written more chapters—say, on architectural painting; instead he simply refers the reader to books complementary to his own, such as Sebastiano Serlio’s General Principles of Architecture According to the Five Types of Edifice, as translated by Pieter Coecke van Aelst, and to Hans Blum’s Five Columnar Orders of Architecture, That Is, the Tuscan, Doric, Ionian, Corinthian, and Composite. For particular exempla of the many points he has raised in chapters 1–14 of the Grondt, he now refers young aspiring painters to Books IIIV of the Schilder-Boeck, the Lives of Ancient, Italian, and Netherlandish and German Painters. By reading, they shall at the same time learn to paint.

1

Translator’s note: In addition to consulting the standard lexicographical sources, such as the Dictionarium tetraglotton (1562), Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae (1573), Etymologicum Teutonicae linguae (1599), Cotgrave’s Dictionarie of the French and English Tongues (1611), and Hexham’s Groot woordenboek (1648), I have made ready use of De Bo’s Westvlaams idioticon, Stoet’s Nederlandsche spreekwoorden, Verdam’s Middelnederlandsch handwoordenboek, and, of course, the Woordenboek der Nederlandsche Taal, as well as Charles du Cange’s Glossarium mediae et infimae Latinitatis, supp. G.A.L. Henschel, P. Carpentier, and J.C. Adelung, ed. L. Favre (Niort: 1883–1887; reprint ed., Bologna: 1982). I have also compared Van Mander’s usage in the Grondt to that in his other publications, especially De kerck der deucht (ca. 1600). Full citations of these various works occur in the footnotes to this “Introduction” and endnotes to the poem’s fourteen chapters.

Karel van Mander, Het Schilder-Boeck, waer in Voor eerst de leerlustighe Iueght den grondt der Edel Vry Schilderconst in Verscheyden deelen wort Voorghedraghen. Daer nae in dry deelen t’leven der vermaerde doorluchtighe Schilders des ouden, en nieuwen tyds. Eyntlyck d’wtlegghinghe op den Metamorphoseon Pub. Ovidij Nasonis. Oock aerbeneffens wtbeeldinghe der figueren. Alles dienstich en nut den schilders, Constbeminders, en dichters, oock allen staten van menschen (Haarlem, Paschier van Wes[t]busch: 1604). The full text of the 1604 edition of the Grondt is available through the Getty Research Portal—Internet Archive: https://archive.org/details/frick-31072001181868/page/n1/mode/2up (accessed April 2, 2022); a full transcription of the poem, again from the 1604 edition, can be found by consulting Digitale Bibliotheek van de Nederlandse Letteren: https://www.dbnl.org/tekst/mand001schi01_01/ (accessed January 5, 2022). The general reader may find it useful to concentrate on sections 1–4 and 7 of my introductory essay; sections 5 and 6 discuss more specialized issues: respectively, Van Mander’s ekphrastic usage and his arguments for the close relation between history and landscape painting.

2

Painters, sculptors, glass painters, and printmakers, along with art collectors such as Peeter Stevens of Antwerp and liefhebbers (lovers of art) such as Cornelis de Bie of Lier and Antwerp, and also schoolmasters such as David Beck of The Hague, were the primary owners of the Schilder-Boeck, either the 1604 or the 1618 edition; see “Indicative List of Ownership of Carel van Mander’s Schilder-boeck, 1604–1750,” in A. de Vries, “Hondius Meets Van Mander: The Cultural Appropriation of the First Netherlandish Book on the Visual Arts System of Knowledge in a Series of Artists’ Portraits,” in H. Damm, M. Thimann, and C. Zittel, eds., The Artist as Reader: On Education and Non-Education of Early Modern Artists, Intersections 27 (Leiden and Boston: 2013), 259–304, esp. 300–301. In addition, the city councils of Haarlem and Maaseyck purchased copies, presumably to commemorate distinguished native sons. On Beck’s fondness for the Schilder-Boeck, upon the contents of which he was often wont to speculate (“speculeerden een wijle in mijnen Vermander”), see D. Beck, Spiegel van mijn leven. Een Haags dagboek uit 1624, ed. S.E. Veldhuijzen (Hilversum: 1993), 54, 128; and De Vries, “Hondius Meets Van Mander,” 264. On the form and function of Stevens’s annotated copy, see J. Briels, “Amator pictoriae artis: De Antwerpsche kunstverzamelaar Peeter Stevens (1590–1668) en zijn constkamer,” Jaarboek van het Koninklijk Museum voor Schone Kunsten Antwerpen (1980): 137–226.

3

On the typographical and bibliographical features of the Schilder-Boeck, see W. Waterschoot, “Karel van Manders Schilder-Boeck (1604): A Description of the Book and Its Setting,” Quaerendo 13 (1983): 260–286.

4

See, for example, J. Stumpel, “A Note on the Intended Audiences for Van Mander’s Schilder-Boeck,” Simiolus 35.1/2 (2011): 84–90.

5

Wtlegghingh op den Metamorphosis Pub. Ovidij Nasonis. Alles streckende tot voordering des vromen en eerlijcken borgherlijcken wandels. Seer dienstich den Schilders, Dichters, en Constbeminders, oock yeghelyck tot leering by een gebracht en gheraemt (Haarlem: Paschier van Westbusch, 1604), fol. * ij verso: “mijn SchilderBoeck (als voeghlijck geselschap) beneffent: op dat, onder ander oorsaken, den Schilder zijn gheschilderde Ovidij historien self verstae, en anderen wete te beduyden.” The foreword is dedicated to Gedeon Fallet, notary and city secretary of Amsterdam.

6

Wtbeeldinge der figueren: waer in te sien is, hoe d’Heydenen hun Goden uytghebeeldt, en onderscheyden hebben: hoe d’Egyptsche yet beteyckenden met Dieren oft anders, en eenighe meeninghen te kennen gaven, met noch meer omstandicheden. Alles seer nut den vernuftighen Schilders, en oock Dichters, hun Personnagien in vertooninghen, oft anders, toe te maken (Alkmaar: Jacob de Meester, for Passchier van Westbusch, 1604), fol. Qiii verso: “om dat den Schilder-gheest … geern gherust en stil is, om dat door zijn heymlijck werck d’inbeeldinghen in den ghedachten eerst hebben t’overlegghen […] wat daer nae de handen, als ghehoorsaem dienaren, hebben uyt te richten oft te doen.” On this passage and the significance of the term “d’inbeeldinghen,” see note 29 infra.

7

“Het eerst Boeck,” in ibid., fol. Qiiij recto: “des Menschen verlustenden gesicht, sin, vroylijck comen vermaken.”

8

On Wijntgis, see H. Miedema, Karel van Mander, Den grondt der edel vry schilder-const, uitgegeven en van vertaling en commentaar voorzien, 2 vols. (Utrecht: 1973), 2:324.

9

On Razet, one of Van Mander’s closest friends, along with Hendrick Goltzius and Cornelis Ketel, as he avers in his poem De kerck der deucht (Haarlem: n.p., ca. 1600), see ibid., 2:90–93.

10

On Ferreris, see H. Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, The Lives of the Illustrious Netherlandish and German Painters, trans. D. Cook-Radmore, M. Hoyle, J. Pennial-Boer, and C. Ford, 6 vols. (Doornspijk: 1995), 3:23–24.

11

On Ban and Vlasman, see ibid., 2:180–181.

12

On Fallet, see S.A.C. Dudok van Heel, “Onwaarschijnlijke verwantschappen van de familie Fallet,” De Nederlandsche Leeuw. Tijdschrift van het Koninklijk Nederlandsch Genootschap voor Geslacht- en Wapenkunde 114 (1997): 167–176.

13

On Ketel, see Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 5:116–160, esp. 116–127.

14

“Aen seer Achtbaren, Erentfesten, en Const-liefdigen Heer Melchior Wijntgis: eerst Raedt, en generael Meester van der Munten der vereenighde Nederlanden: nu Meester van de Munt des Landts, en Graeflijckheyt Zeelandt, mijnen besonderen Heer en goeden vrient,” in Grondt, fol. * iij v: “Want en hadde sy geen sulcke edel beminders, sy self, en haer constighe ghebruyckers, sonder in eeren opstijghen oft verheven worden, souden onder ander grove handt-wercken en handt-werckers gherekent, in oneeren en verachtinghe midden t’onwetende verstandloos volck moeten blijven. Maer t’gheluck oft goedertieren Avontuere voeght gemeenlijck in alle Eeuwen oft tijden, dat onse Const, en haer constighe oeffenaers, eenighe treflijcke goede Liefhebbers zijn toeghedaen …. Protogenes, Schilder van Caunus, hadde den Egyptschen Coningh Demetrium. Pamphilus en Melanthus hadden Aratum en Tholomeum. Apelles hadde Alexandrum, en Zeuxis de’ Agrigentijnen. Voort nae dese oude, Ioannes van Eyck hadde den Graef Philips van Charlois: Albert Durer, Carolum Quintum …. Sprangher, en Hans van Aken, den Keyser Rhodolphum, en wy hebben Melchior, mijnen Mecoenas, oft om beter seggen, Apollo, welcken ick mijn slecht onghehavent ghedicht, een eenigh Schaepken te ghelijcken, nu gantsch opdraghe en offere.”

15

“Aen Eersamen, den Schilder-const-liefdighen, en den Schilders seer toeghedanen Heer, Iaques Razet, Notarius publicus, en Secretarius op de Convoye tot Amstelredam, mijnen besonderen goeden vriendt,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 59v: “Mijn segghen wordt noch te meer bevestight, door dat V.E. zijn constighe stucken boven gheldt bemint, en veel overhoop byhoudt, als hebbende daer in sinlijckheyt.”

16

Ibid., fol. 59r: “En sal hem aenghenamer zijn, dan of ick hem aanbode in gheleerderen en constigheren stijl al d’oude half-Godtsche Krijghhelden met de ghestaefde viercantighe Slagh-ordenen, aenvallen, en bloedighe verwinninghen.”

17

Cf. the passage, in “Preface to the Lives of the Renowned Netherlandish and High German Painters,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 198r, where Van Mander asseverates that his calling was to describe “Brush-strokes and Panels,” not to compile a “Heroes’ book” full of war and saltpeter’s explosive cruelty: “T’is u werck niet, oft, ten voeght u niet, t’Helden-boeck den krijgh, oft t’salpeters krakende wreetheyt, maer wel Pinceel-streken en Tafereelen, te beschrijven.”

18

For a fuller discussion of this poem, penned by a poet whose motto was “Elck Man doe recht” (Let each man do what is right), see section 5, infra, of this “Introduction,” “Ekphrastic Usage in the Schilder-Boeck,” and notes 151–152, infra.

19

“Voor-reden, op den grondt der edel vry Schilder-const,” in Van Mander, Schilder-Boeck, Book I, fol. * vi recto: “Maer boven al behoort oft behoeft yeder op t’uyterste yverigh en vyerigh te trachten, om d’eenighe opperste heerschappije onser Consten tot hem te trecken en te vercrijghen, waer toe men sonder eenigh ghevaer, krijgh oft bloetvergieten, gheraken can, als men maer ernstigh met stadighen vlijt de milde Natuere te baet comt.”

20

See ibid., fols. *v verso-*vi recto: “Gelijck de voortijtsche Roomsche Hooftmannen plochten, die door constighe vermaninghen, aen t’spies-swicken der krijghslieden, hun vrymoedicheyt levende verweckt te wesen conden mercken: Soo bespreeck ick, datse overtsaeghdlijck toetreden, en aengrijpen voor eerst het besonderste deel der Consten, te weten, een Menschlijck beeldt te leeren stellen, oock eyndlijck alle ander omstandighe deelen t’omhelsen, oft immers als Natuere en Geest anders niet willen toelaten, eenigh besonder deel om daer in uytnemende te moghen worden: want het niet daeghlijcx gheschiet, dat een alleen alles vermagh, leeren, begrijpen, oft in alles uytnemende worden can.

“Sulcx bevintmen onder onse Const, van in den ouden oft Antijcken tijt te wesen toeghegaen dat d’een in d’een, en d’ander in d’ander geschickter en beter Meester gheweest is, gelijck men in hun levens sal vinden …. De selve verscheydenheden salmen oock vinden by den dees-tijdtsche Italianen en Nederlanders te zijn geweest, hier te lang te verhalen: waer by de Jeught gheleert sal wesen, om in de Const volherden, te grijpen nae t’ghene Natuere meest aenbiedt. Ist niet de volcomenheyt in beelden en Historien, soo mach het wesen Beesten, Keuckenen, Fruyten, Bloemen, Landtschappen, Metselrijen, Prospectiven, Compartimenten, Grotissen, Nachten, branden, Conterfeytselen nae t’leven, Zeen, en Schepen, oft soo yet anders te schilderen. Maer boven al behoort oft behoeft yeder op t’uyterste yverigh en vyerigh te trachten, om d’eenighe opperste heerschappije onser Consten tot hem te trecken en te vercrijghen, waer toe men sonder eenigh ghevaer, krijgh oft bloetvergieten, gheraken can, als men maer ernstigh met stadighen vlijt de milde Natuere te baet comt.”

21

Schilder-Boeck, Book III, fol. 151v.

22

“Het leven van Lucas van Leyden, uytnemende Schilder, Plaet-snijder, en Glas-schriver,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 212r: “In dit, en al zijn ander printen, sietmen veel aerdige verscheydenheden van tronien en cleedingen na den ouden Wet, hoeden, mutsen, en hulselen, al meest d’een d’ander niet ghelijckende, sulcx dat groote Meesters van onsen tijdt in Italien met zijn dinghen hun grootlijck hebben weten te behelpen, zijn dingen met somtijden een weynich te veranderen in hun wercken ontleenende, en te pas brenghende.”

23

Grondt, fol. 16v (marginal gloss to stanza 20): “Door de verscheydenheyt is Natuere schoon.”

24

See section 6, supra, of this “Introduction,” “Landtschap and byvoechsel: Karel van Mander on Landcape and History, Simulation and Dissimulation.”

25

Ieronimus Benzonius, De historie, van de Nieuwe Weerelt, te weten, de beschrijvinghe van West-Indien. Waer in verhaelt wert, van de eylanden ende zeen nieulicx gevonden, ende van den nieuwen steden die hy daer selfs ghesien heeft, ende tghene daer is ghebeurt te water ende te lande, in veerthien Jaren tijts, die hy aldaer gheweest is, ed. and trans. Karel van Mander (Haarlem: Paeschier van Wesbusch, 1610). On Van Mander’s frequent use of information gleaned from Benzonius throughout the Schilder-Boeck, see B. Schmidt, “ ‘O fortunate land!’: Karel van Mander, ‘A West Indies Landscape,’ and the Dutch Discovery of America,” New West Indian Guide / Nieuwe West-Indische Gids 69, no. 1/2 (1995), 5–44, esp. 15–18, 127–131. On the two “city-views” of Haarlem in verse, see K. van Mander, “Het beelt van Haerlem de stadt, waerin is te lesen haer gelegentheijt, aert, en out, heerlijck wesen.” “Het tweede beelt van Haerlem. T’ Stadt Haerlems beeldt, in welck men speurt met lesen: haer oudtheyt, aerdt, ghedaent’ en heerlijck wesen.” In J.D. Rutgers van der Loeff, ed., Drie lofdichten op Haarlem (Haarlem: 1911), 19–47.

26

“Aen Const-rijcken, cloecksinnighen Mr. Cornelis Ketel, Schilder en Dichter,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book VI, fol. 123v: “want den aerdt onser Consten daer toe te edel is, soeckende oft lievende haers ghelijcke, dat is, beleeftheyt, en vriendtlijckheyt.”

27

“Voor-reden op t’Leven der Nederlandtsche en Hooghduytsche vermaerde Schilders,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 198r; see note 17, supra.

28

On the Aristotelian psychology of soul that underlies the relation between mind and body (and thus mind and hand) in De anima and De motu animalium, see R. Sorabji, “Body and Soul in Aristotle,” Philosophy 49 (1974): 63–89; M.C. Nussbaum, “The Sumphuton Pneuma and the De Motu Animalium’s Account of Soul and Body,” in Nussbaum, ed. and trans., Aristotle’s De Motu Animalium (Princeton: 1978), 143–164; H.M. Robinson, “Mind and Body in Aristotle,” Classical Quarterly (N.S.) 28 (1978): 105–124; C. Shields, “Soul and Body in Aristotle,” Oxford Studies in Ancient Philosophy 6 (1988): 103–137; R. Heinaman, “Aristotle and the Mind-Body Problem,” Phronesis 35 (1990): 83–102; and J. Sisko, “Material Alteration and Cognitive Activity in Aristotle’s De anima,” Phronesis 91 (1996): 138–157.

29

“Aen const-rijcken … Mr. Cornelis Ketel,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book VI, fol. 123v: “En ghelijck Plutarchus vriendtschap seght te wesen, t’edelste in der Natuere, soo is onse Schilder-const geern gemeensaem met soo edel deught, om dat den Schilder-gheest, ghelijck oock des Poëten, geen soo giftighe beroeringhen en can verdraghen, maer geern gherust en stil is om dat door zijn heymlijck werck d’inbeeldinghen in den ghedachten eerst hebben t’overlegghen en besluyten, als in een Borgherlijck Stadts Raedt-huys, wat daer nae de handen, als ghehoorsaem dienaren, hebben uyt te richten oft te doen.” The term d’inbeeldinghen derives from the verb inbeelden, which In Latin signifies “to imagine, fashion in spirit, depict or observe in thought,” and in French “to visualize to oneself, apprehend in memory, or to fantasize,” in the sense of “to conceive a mental image.” See A. Maldoets, C. Kiliaan, Q. Steenhart, and A. van Hasselt, Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae. Schat der Neder-duytscher spraken (Antwerp: Christopher Plantin, 1573), fols. Z2 verso-Z3 recto: “Inbeelden. Imaginer en soy, pourpenser, ou comprendre en sa memoire our penser par fantasie. Imaginari, depingere congitatione, animo fingere, cogitatione percipere.”

30

“Aen Eersamen, den Schilder-const-liefdighen … Iaques Razet,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 59v: “Ghelijck van V.E. liefd’ ter Schilder-const betuyghen veel spraeckloose luyden, daer V.E. huys vol van is: Ick meen gheschilderde, van verscheyden gheleerde constighe handen.”

31

See Leon Battista Alberti, On Painting: A New Translation and Critical Edition, ed. and trans. R. Sinisgalli (Cambridge: 2011), 46. Van Mander consulted Dupinet’s edition of the Naturalis historia; see L’histoire du monde de C. Pline Second, ed. and trans. Antoine du Pinet, 2 vols. (Lyon: Antoine Tardif, 1584), 2:658–659. On the origin stories in Pliny and Quintilian, see J. Overbeck, ed., Die antiken Schriftquellen zur Geschichte der bildenden Künste bei den Griecken (Leipzig: 1868), 67–69; and R. Rosenblum, “The Origin of Painting: A Problem in the Iconography of Romantic Classicism,” Art Bulletin 39 (1957): 274–290, esp. 274.

32

“Voor-reden, op het Leven der oude Antijcke Doorluchtighe Schilders,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 61v: “Wort van eenige ooc aerdich versiert, datse haer afcomst heeft van Narcisso, die in een bloem is verandert, ter oorsaec dat sy de bloem van alle Coonsten is, dat daerom de gantsche Fabel van Narcisso niet ongevoeglijc op de selvige geduyt en can worden: want wat mach beter rijmen op de schoon gestaltenis deses Iongelings in de Cristallinige clare Fonteyne schaduwende, dan een constich geschildert Beelt uytnemenende wel na t’leven gedaen, van een geleerde hant eens Const-rijcken Schilders? Ic verwondere my self al schrijvende, hoe wel dit te pas comt, bevindende onse Const alree een schaduwe van t’rechte wesen, en den schijn van het zijn vergeleken: want by dat eenige schrijven, soude dese edel natuersche Hemel-gave de dochter zijn van de Schduwe. Mijn getuyge is den geleerden Quintilianus, wiens meyninge is, datse haren oorsprong heeft uyt de schaduwe die de Son geeft, waer naer de Oude de hooft-trecken genomen souden hebben, omtreckende dese schaduwe. Plinius ooc in zijn gemelde 35e. Boeck, Cap. 12. verhaelt van de dochter van een Potbacker, Deburates, welcke verlieft op eenen Iongeling, trock metter kole den pourfijl van zijn tronie, die van t’keerslicht schadude op eenen muer, om hem altijts voor oogen en in haer gedacht te hebben, waer op de Vader de eerste tronie soude van aerde verheven gemaect en gebacken hebben: waerom de Teycken-const de voor-geboorte tegen t’Beelt-snijden haer te roemen soude hebben: en volgens t’voor-verhaelde soude de Schilderije geteelt wesen van Phoebo oft Vulcano, te weten, uyt de schaduwe van Son oft vyer.”

33

Philostratus argues that painting and sculpture are the most naturelike of human inventions, that painters have contributed no less than poets to humanity’s accumulated knowledge of heroes and heroic deeds, that painterly symmetry of proportion partakes of reason, and that painting is as godlike as the seasons’ “painted” meadows or the astral manifestations “painted” in the heavens; see Elder Philostratus, Imagines, ed. J. Henderson, trans. A. Fairbanks (Cambridge, MA: 1931), 2–3.

34

“Aen den achtbaren en edelen Heer, Mr. Gedeon Fallet,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book V, fol. * ij recto: “Soo misdoen tegen de waerheyt der gheschiednissen, en Poeetsche leeringen, die de Schilder-const niet omhelsen … dewijle dese t’samen tot ghelijcken eyndt streckende, ons voorbeelden en beschrijven de betreckselen en daden der deughtsaem vemaerde Mannen.”

35

Ibid.: “Want ghelijck met verwighe Pinceel-streken den Schilder t’voorleden ghelijck tegenwoordich geschiedende te kennen geeft: also doet den Dichter met schoon-talighe redenen en onderscheydige woorden: waerom sy maer verschillen in de stoffe der voorstellinghen oft uytbeeldinghen. Soo dat den Schrijver, t’beloop zijner vertellinghe in goeder ghestaltnisse uytvoerende, wort bedanct: min noch meer als den Schilder, die zijn stuck, met gemoedt bewegende beeldinghen aerdigh te weghe brengende, voor oogen stelt.”

36

“Voor-reden,” in ibid., fol. * iij verso: “Iae sy is soo veel, dat ick ben veroorsaeckt te segghen, dat de wijse Poeetsche versieringhen, diepgrondighe en vernuftighe ghedichten, hebben uytnemende wercklijcke en nutte crachten, dewijl oorkitteligh sy t’herte streelende, den Mensch soetlijck zijn beeldt beter verbeelden, zijn ghedacht matighen, begheert en lust temmen, sin stadighen, ghemoedt stillen, gheest beredenen, zeden gladden, en eyndlijck de schadighe Siel-sieckten ghenesen: om ghesondt en suyver in wille, woordt en werck, met onschult ghewapent, Manlijck, onberoert, en onverhindert den ghevaerlijcken duysent noodtschen roof-bosch, en moordighen donckeren wandel-padt deser Weerelt, te doorreysen, om eyndlijck tot de gheest-vredighe Siel-rust te gheraken.”

37

Ibid., fol * iiij recto: “Nu heeftmen doch te bedencken, datter wat anders mede ghemeent, en te kennen ghegheven wordt. Ghelijck ons elder wordt afghebeeldt t’woordt Gods met een saey-graen, den onverstandighen met den wegh, den onvolherdighen met steen-grondt, den gierighen met doornen, den Godtvruchtighen met goet landt, de Weerelt met den Acker, d’Enghelen met de Maeyers, het Oordeel met den Ougst, de Helle met den Oven, den Hemel met de schuere, de goede met Tarwe, de quade met oncruydt, oock met Schapen en Bocken.”

38

Ibid., fol. * iiij verso: “Daer cloecklijck met groot opmerck alle eyghenschappen, en de veelwerwighe versieringhen met grooter Const aen een gheschakelt zijn.”

39

Ibid., fol. * 5r: “… ghelijckigen claer glandsenden spieghel der leeringhen, hem voor ooghen ghestelt van een Heydensch Poeet …. dat hy heel beter ghestaltigh ghemetamorphosijt, oft herschapen wesende, niet in hoogher achtinghe ter Weerelt weerden noch liever conde hebben, dan een recht, treflijck, deghelijck, vroom-manlijck leven.”

40

Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 61r: “Of men nu seggen wil, dat dit werc niet en was geschildert, maer gegraven, oft metter hitten geamailleert, het mocht zijn so het mocht, ten was niet mogelijc alle de verhaelde dingen int werc te brengen, of de Teycken-const en most doe al in seer groote perfectie wesen: was sy in groote perfectie, so ist niet mogelijc of de Schilder-const most mede al gebaert en in wesen zijn, en ooc niet onvolcomen, als wel te ramen is …. Nu dit overgeslagen, is te bedencken, dat Homerus niet en conde schrijven so heel werckelijck en bescheydelijc van de Teycken oft Schilder-const, haddese te zijnen tijde, oft te vooren niet openbaer en in kennisse geweest, jae ooc niet so heel breet daer van, haddese niet rijckelijc en hooglijck in swang en gebruyc geweest, ten alderminsten in zijnen tijt.” For a fuller discussion of Van Mander’s theory and practice of ekphrasis—the rhetorical figure of heightened description, closely connected to enargeia as a kind of painting, see section 5, infra, of this “Introduction,” “Ekphrastic Usage in the Schilder-Boeck.”

41

Ibid., fol. 61v: “… gelijc sy een edel vry Const is … niet wesende gerekent onder den hantwercken oft Ambachten, dewijle sy de stomme suster is van de seer geestige Poeterije.”

42

Ibid., fol. * iiij r: “De seer vermaecklijcke vernuft-barende edel Schilder-const, natuerlijcke Voedster van alle deughtsame Consten en wetenschappen … was by den meesten Heeren, en hoogh-gheleerden, oyt in seer hoogher eeren en weerden: …. Maer of nu in oft door dit t’saemvoeghen onse uytnemende Schilder-const, door haer weerdighe tegenwoordicheyt oft bycomst den anderen Consten niet meerder eere heeft toegelangt, dan sy van henlieder gheselschaps weerdicheyt weghen heeft ontfanghen, wat ick daer van ghevoele wil ick geeren verswijghen, om niet met dweersen ooghen te worden berispt, qualijck ghedanckt, oft veel tistenissen te veroorsaken.”

43

On the Effigies, see J. Puraye, ed., Dominique Lampson: “Les effigies des peintre célèbres des Pays-Bas” (Bruges: 1956); T.A. Riggs, Hieronymus Cock (1510–1579): Printmaker and Publisher in Antwerp at the Sign of the Four Winds (New York: 1977), 192–194, 203; W.S. Melion, Shaping the Netherlandish Canon: Karel van Mander’s Schilder-Boeck (Chicago and London: 1991), 143–145, 253, 289; J. Woodall, “ ‘Dem dry bones’: Portrayal in Print after the Death of the Original Model,” in Woodall and S. Porras, Picturing the Netherlandish Canon, Courtauld Books Online: https://courtauld.ac.uk/research/research-resources/publications/courtauld-books-online/picturing-the-netherlandish-canon/ (accessed February 28, 2022), 45–52; and E. Wouk, ed. and trans., The Life of Lambert Lombard (1564) and Effigies of Several Famous Painters from the Low Countries (1572), Getty Research Institute Texts and Documents (Los Angeles: 2021), 31–43, 52–55, 106–155.

44

See ibid., 32–33.

45

See ibid., 150.

46

See ibid., 146.

47

See Anton Francesco Doni, Disegno del Doni (Venice: Gabriel Giolito de Ferrari, 1549), fol. 16v.

48

See Wouk, Effigies, 130.

49

On the inverted use of Michelangelo’s dictum in the Van Amstel epitaph, see ibid., 41, 130; and H. Perry Chapman and J. Woodall, “Introduction: The Netherlander Has Intelligence in His Hands,” Nederlands Kunsthistorisch Jaarboek 59 (2009): 7–43.

50

See Wouk, Effigies, 41.

51

On Goltzius’s Marriage of Cupid and Psyche after Sprangher as an epitome of his “gheleerde handt,” see note 99, infra. Also see note 75, infra, on the “learned hand” of Frans Floris.

52

See note 30, supra.

53

On De Heere’s Hof en boomgaerd, see W. Waterschoot, “Lucas d’Heere en Marcus Vaernewijck voor het Lam Gods,” Jaarboek ‘De Fonteine’ 16 (1966): 109–118; and idem, “Inleiding,” in Waterschoot, ed., Den hof en boomgaerd der poësiën (Zwolle: 1969), IXXXIX. On Van Vaernewyck’s Spieghel der Nederlandscher audtheyt, see L. Kleine Deters, “ ‘Paintings that can give great joy to the lovers of art’: Marcus van Vaernewijck’s Notes about Art and Artists (1568),” Simiolus 42 (2020): 89–145, esp. 89–104.

54

See Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 198r: “My gedenckt, dat eertijts mijn Meester, Lucas de Heere, van Gent, in Rijm dese stoffe, van het leven der vermaerde Schilders, by der handt en aengevangen hadde: maer … is niet voor den dagh te verwachten, welck my andersins groot behulp te minsten hadde moghen wesen, daer ick nu met grooter moeyt veel dingen hebben moeten op speuren en becomen.”

55

On De Castelein’s Const van rhetoriken, see S.A.P.J.H. Iansen, “Speurtocht naar het leven van Matthijs Castelein: archivalia en onzekerheden,” Verslagen en mededelingen der koninklijke Vlaamse academie voor taal- en letterkunde (nieuwe reeks) (1970): 321–446; D. Coigneau, “Matthijs de Castelein (1485?–1550),” Jaarboek De Fonteine (1985–1986): 7–13; M. Spies, Rhetoric, Rhetoricians, and Poets: Studies in Renaissance Poetry and Poetics, ed. H. Duits and T. van Strien (Amsterdam: 1999), 40–44; and W.S. Melion, “Parabolic, Periphrastic, and Emblematic Ekphrasis in Hans Bol’s Emblemata Evangelica of 1585,” in K.A.E. Enenkel and Melion, eds., Landscape the Visual Hermeneutics of Place, 1500–1700, Intersections 75 (Leiden and Boston: 2021), 23–85, esp. 25–28.

56

On the rhetorical effect of presence and its function in establishing a common ground for the spectator’s imaginative involvement with a painting, see C. van Eck, Classical Rhetoric and the Visual Arts in Early Modern Europe (New York and Cambridge: 2007), 26–28, 73–83. On De Castelein, whose poetics subsumes the principles of classical rhetoric as codified in Cicero’s De oratore and Quintilian’s Institutio oratoria, see B. Ramakers, “Between Aea and Golgotha: The Education and Scholarship of Matthijs de Castelein (c. 1485–1550),” in H. de Ridder-Symoens, K. Goudriaan, J.J. van Moolenbroek and A. Tervoort, eds., Education and Learning in the Netherlands, 1400–1600: Essays in Honour of Hilde de Ridder-Symoens (Leiden: 2004), 179–199. On the didactic and argumentative functions of the types of poetry cultivated by Dutch and Flemish exponents of Rhetorijcke (the art of rhetoric), see A. van Dixhoorn, “Writing Poetry as Intellectual Training: Chambers of Rhetoric and the Development of Vernacular Intellectual Life in the Low Countries between 1480 and 1600,” in ibid., 201–222; and F. Hemelaar, “For the Illustration of Rhetoric: Cornelis van Ghistele, Virgil, and the Ideology of Learned Rhetorijcke,” in B. Ramakers, ed., Understanding Art in Antwerp: Classicising the Popular, Popularising the Classic (1540–1580) (Leuven: 2011), 131–150.

57

See “Introduzzione,” in Vasari, Vite, 3 vols. (Florence: 1568), 1:10–66. On Vasari’s Aristotelian understanding of disegno as knowledge of universal forms and as the graphic means that renders those forms to sight, see K.-E. Barzman, The Florentine Academy and the Early Modern State: The Discipline of Disegno (Cambridge: 2000), 143–180, esp. 149–150. On the “tre arti del disegno,” see W. Kemp, “Disegno: Beiträge zur Geschichte des Begriffs zwischen 1547 und 1607,” Marburger Jahrbuch für Kunstwissenschaft 19 (1974): 219–240; and C. Farago, “The Classification of the Visual Arts in the Renaissance,” in D.R. Kelley and R.H. Popkin, eds., The Shapes of Knowledge from the Renaissance to the Enlightenment (Dordrecht: 1983), 23–47.

58

Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 66v: “Dat ick, ghelijck den uytnemenden Schrijver Plutarchus, hadde voorgenomen, de doorluchtighe Mannen, Griecken en Italianen, tegen malcander te verghelijcken, soo en soude teghen Michelangelo niet qualijck dienen gestelt den Atheenschen Apollodorus.”

59

Grondt, fol. 32v (chapter 7, stanza 45):

Voorts ghelijck Pictura nu wel Bataven

Soo ionstich is, als voortijts Sycionen,

Heeft de Natuere ter Haerlemmer haven

Comen uyt schudden den schoot haerder gaven,

In de boesemen van twee die daer wonen,

D’een is te recht een Schilder, van den gonen

Is t’Amsterdam de Spelonck Platonis,

In welcke dat Conste meer als ghewoon is.

60

Quintilian is omnipresent in the Grondt, perhaps most notably in chapter 6, “Portrayal of the Affects, passions, desires, and sorrows of Persons”; see there notes 2, 3, 26, and 45. On the form and function of the Institutio, see F.H. Colson, M. Fabii Quintiliani institutionis oratoriae liber I (Cambridge: 1924), xliii–lxxxix; on Quintilian’s conception of the history and parts of oratory, see G. Kennedy, “Quintilian as a Critic,” in Quintilian (New York: 1969), 101–122.

61

The second titlepage, which fronts Books V and VI, indicates, as do a number of surviving copies, that the publisher Paschier van Wesbusch occasionally marketed them separately. In this form, they could function for poets, painters, and emblematists as handy iconographical manuals. On the book’s material construction, print run, and marketing, and on surviving copies, in various configurations, as Books IVI, IIV only, or VVI only, see Waterschoot, “Karel van Mander’s Schilder-Boeck (1604),” 273–274.

62

Miedema, in his analysis of the title-print, in Karel van Mander, Grondt, 2: 316, adverts to the liveliness of Cybele, noting that in portraying her, Painting enacts the definition of painting put forward in the “Life of Masaccio,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book III, fol. 102r: “That the art of painting well, in respect of her perfect force, consists as a whole in the portrayal of natural and living visible things.”

63

Grondt, fol. 8v: “Want Teycken-const omhelsend’ alle dinghen, / Houdt alle Consten in matighe stringhen.” And ibid.: “Leerend’ haer letters en caracten halen.”

64

Ibid.: “Sy is een Voedster aller consten goedich.”

65

“Aen Eersamen, seer achtbaren Heer, Bartholomeus Ferreris, Schilder, en Schilder-Const liefhebber, mijnen besonderen goeden vriendt,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book III, fol. 72r: “Weerde Heer, en goede vriendt, dat by velen in dese tegenwoordighe al t’ondanckbaer Eeuwen, met te weynigh onderscheydt worden vergheleken ghemeen oeffeninghen met de heel uytnemende Hemel-gaven in der natuere, als in’t besonder is de natuer-uytbeeldende volcomen Teycken- oft Schilder-const, meynende haer niet alleen licht-leerlijck, en doenlijck, maer oock gantsch onnoodigh te wesen, comt alleen uyt onverstandigh verkeert oordeel. Want aenghesien in onse volck-rijck Europa, niet Barbarisch, beestelijck, maer Borgerlijck, eerlijck, en vernuftigh de Menschen zijn ghewent te leven: Soo en isser haest niet behoeflijcker noch nutter, om cleen by groot, en groot by cleen onderlinghe te gheneeren, als de voorverhaelde Teycken- oft Schilder-const.”

66

On natura, ars, and exercitatio as poetic-rhetorical categories and their philosophical basis, see M.A. Grant and G. Converse Fiske, “Cicero’s ‘Orator’ and Horace’s ‘Ars poetica,’ ” Harvard Studies in Classical Philology 35 (1924): 1–74, esp. 7, 50, 69. On the application of these categories by Dutch painters, see J.A. Emmens, “Natuur, onderwijzing en oefening; bij een drieluik van Gerrit Dou,” Album discipulorum aageboden aan professor Dr. J.G. van Gelder ter gelegenheid van zijn zestigste verjaardag 27 februari 1963 (Utrecht: 1963), 125–136; and on their application in the Grondt, see Miedema, Karel van Mander, Grondt, 2:315.

67

On these three methods of comparative argument, see S. McCormick, “Argument by Comparison: An Ancient Typology,” Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric 32.2 (2014): 148–164.

68

“Dat eerste Capittel”: “Exhortatie, oft Vermaninghe, aen d’aencomende Schilder-jeucht” (Exhortation, or Admonition to up and coming young Painters).

69

“Het tweede Capittel”: “Van het teyckenen, of Teycken-const” (On drawing, or the Art of Delineating); “Het derde Capittel”: “Analogie[,] Proportie, oft maet der Lidtmaten eens Menschen Beeldts” (Analogy, Proportion, or measurement of the Parts of a Human Body); “Het vierde Capittel”: “Van der Actitude, welstandt, ende weldoen eens Beeldts” (On the Attitude, decorum, and decorous motion of a Human Figure); “Het vijfde Capittel”: “Van der Ordinanty ende Inventy der Historien” (On the Ordonnance and Invention of Histories); “Het seste Capittel”: “Wtbeeldinghe der Affecten, passien, begeerlijckheden, en lijdens der Menschen” (Portrayal of the Affects, passions, desires, and sorrows of Persons).

70

“Het sevende Capittel”: “Van de Reflecty, Reverberacy, teghen-glans oft weerschijn” (On Reflection, Reverberation, re-reflected luster, or re-reflection).

71

“Het achtste Capittel”: “Van het Landtschap” (On Landscape); “Het neghende Capittel”: “Van Beesten, Dieren, en Voghels” (On Cattle, Animals, and Birds); “Het thiende Capittel”: “Van Laken oft Draperinghe” (On Fabrics or Drapery).

72

“Het elfde Capittel”: “Van het Sorteren, en by een schicken der Verwen” (On Sorting and combining Colors); “Het twaelfde Capittel”: “Van wel schilderen, oft Coloreren” (On painting well, or Coloring); “Het derthiende Capittel”: “Van der Verwen oorsprong, nature, cracht en werckinge” (On the origin, nature, force, and effect of Colors); “Het veerthiende Capittel”: “Bediedinghen der Verwen, watter mede beteyckent can worden” (On the Interpretation of Colors, and what they can signify).

73

Although this is a prose translation, I have followed Rudolf Hoecker and Jan Willem Noldus in retaining the form, though not the meter or rhyme, of Van Mander’s ingeniously wrought octaves; see Hoecker, Das Lehrgedicht des Karel van Mander: Text, Übersetzung und Kommentar nebst Anhang über Manders Geschichtskonstruktion und Kunsttheorie, Quellenstudien zur holländischen Kunstgeschichte 8 (The Hague: 1916); and Noldus, Karel van Mander, Principe et fondement de l’art noble et libre de la peinture (Paris: 2009/2009). Although I have tried, wherever possible, not to diverge from the line-by-line sense of Van Mander’s verses, deviations ultimately proved unavoidable.

74

On these biographical data, see Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 43–96. Van Mander moved from Haarlem to Zevenbergen House in Noorddorp near Heemskerk for about a year, between 1603 and 1604, there completing the Grondt (June 3, 1603), the Ancient “Lives” (June 8, 1603), the Italian “Lives” (August 31, 1603), and the Wtlegginghe (March 14, 1604). Having moved to Amsterdam in 1604, he there finished the Northern “Lives” (July 28, 1604) and perhaps also the Wtbeeldinge (n.d.).

75

On the terms Const and Ambacht, see notes 41–42 supra and 78–80 infra. In a felicitous turn of phrase, Annette de Vries has recently called attention to the “Vergeistigung of the hand” throughout Books I and IV of the Schilder-Boeck, in which, far from opposing mind and hand, Van Mander instead demonstrates how the skilled motions of the master’s hand instrumentalize thought; see De Vries, “Hondius Meets Van Mander,” 259–304, esp. 264. In “Life of Frans Floris, excellent Painter of Antwerp,” fol. 239v, for example, Van Mander equates erudition with this master’s well-trained hand, stating that early in his career, soon after he established his Antwerp workshop, Floris “displayed great diligence and excellence in art, by means of his learned hand (‘geleerde handt’).” De Vries further argues, correctly in my view, that Van Mander, in his Northern “Lives,” insists on showing the many ways whereby innate ability is “materialize[d] in actual artistic performances”; see “Hondius Meets Van Mander,” 287.

76

Schilder-Boeck, Book III, fol. 72r: “Hier door wordt het seer gherijvigh gheldt met beelden, wapenen, en teyckenen onderscheyden. Door dese Moeder aller vercieringhen ontfanghen alle constighe handtwercken de hooghste en uyterste volcomen schoonheyt, het zy watter ghesmeedt, ghegoten, ghehouwen, ghesteken, ghebouwt, ghetimmert, ghemetselt, gheweven, ghenaeyt, gheborduert, betrocken oft ghewrocht wordt: also dat Goudt en Silver, om het aerdigh fatsoen, de helft boven zijn gheschattede weerde geern betaelt wordt, en een Coperen besneden plaet teghen Silver opgheweghen can worden. Jae datmen hadde van t’slechtste metael oft loot een plaet, die voor ghewis waer betrocken oft beschildert van den vermaerden Apelles, Parasius, oft Zeuxis, sy waer licht soo veel fijn gouden geldt weerdt, als sy swaer waer.”

77

“On various Netherlandish Painters, living at the present time,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 300v.

78

Cited in Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 2:44; see Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 262r–v: “Een beter ghewente bevind’ ick by ons Nederlanders, als wel by ander volcken in gebruyck te wesen, dat de Ouders, of sy schoon machtigh van rijckdom zijn, hun kinderen veel tijts vroegh oft in hun jeught laten leeren eenige Const oft Ambacht, het welck besonder in tijt van krijgh, en vervluchten wonder wel te pas can comen: want wy oock bevinden, dat de quade avontuer oft ongeluck van dese Weerelt minder macht heeft over de Const, als over den rijckdom, en dat de Const, die men in zijn jeught heeft gheleert, dickwils den uytersten plicht-ancker in den noot, en een troostlijcke toevlucht wort, om d’ellendighe schipbreuck van de perssende armoede voor te comen.”

79

See A. van Buchell, Diarium, ed. G. Brom and L.A. van Langeraad (Amsterdam: 1907), 461: “Utebatur hic Spieringius plurimum notatis et exemplis Karoli Vermandre, Haerlemiae habitantis, egregii pictoris; cujus tam versatile dicebat ingenium, ut cujuscunque artificii magistris, quod mutarentur, praescriberet, pictoribus, sculptoribus, vitrariis, tapetiariis sive phrygonibus, architectis, aurifabris, textoribus.” On this passage, see Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 2:80. The reference to “clever/ready wit” (“behendich vernuft”) and to the “innumerable living images” comprised by the schilder’s “spirit, mind, and affection” (“in uwen gheest, sin en gheneghen / … inbeeldinghen ontallijck”) appears in Grondt, fol. 2r (chapter 1, stanza 10).

80

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 251v: “O Pictura, edel en alder vernuft-barenste Const in der Natuere, Moeder aller vercieringen, en Voedster aller edel deughtsamer Consten, die geene uwer Mede-susters, die men vrye Consten noemt, te wijcken hebt, die by den edelen Griecken en Romeynen soo heel in weerden waert, en u constighe Oeffenaers over al soo heel welcom, wel ontfangen, en van den Heeren en Oversten soo geern voor Borgers aengenomen. O al te ondanckbaer tegenwoordige Eeuwen, datmen door aendringen van onaerdige brodders, sulcke schandlijcke Wetten, en dergelijcke afjonstige ordeningen, in den Steden plaetse heeft ghegheven, dat over al schier (sonder schier alleen te Room) van de edel Schilder-const wort een Gildt ghemaeckt …. Te Haerlem, daer altijt veel edel gheesten in onse Const zijn geweest, daer zijn de Ketel-bouters, Tin-gieters, en oude Cleer-vercoopers, onder het Schilders Gildt.” See Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 1:265, and, on Van Mander’s disparagement of handt-wercken in this context, 4:121.

81

On Van Mander’s adherence to ottava rima and his slight divergence from its use of the caesura and rhyme scheme of ab ab ab cc, see Miedema, Karel van Mander, Grondt, 2:336–338.

82

Grondt, fol. 8v (chapter 2, stanza 4): “Bestaet in trecken, betrecken, omtrecken / Van alles watter binnen de bestecken / Des ghesichts ter Weerelt mach zijn begrepen.”

83

Grondt, fol. 9v (chapter 2, stanza 15); see note 127 infra. Also see ibid. (stanza 16): “En sonderlingh moesten wy wel onthouden / T’ghene wy teeckenen om worden vroeder/ Want siet, Memoria is de Muses Moeder.” See the notes to chapter 2 infra, especially notes 1 and 6, for a full discussion of the ways in which Van Mander’s conception teyckenconst diverges from Vasari’s disegno, as formulated in the 1568 edition of the Vite.

84

Grondt, fol. 10r (chapter 2, stanzas 20–21).

85

“Van Appelles, Prince der Schilders,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 78r.

86

Ibid., fol. 77v: “want t’was (seyde hy) onmoghelijck, dat yemandt anders als Appelles soude connen maken met verwe en pinceel soo aerdighen dunnen treck als desen was.”

87

Ibid.: “… hy de voorgaende twee trecken doorcloof soo behendich, dat het niet moghelijck en was netter noch aerdiger te doen.”

88

Ibid.: “Dit Tafereel is van hun beyden onverandert also tot een ghedachtenis laten blijven, met alleen dees driederley trecken, tot een groot verwonderen van die’t sagen, sonderlinge voor de ghene, die van de Teycken-const oft Schilder-const verstandt hadden.”

89

Ibid., fol. 78r: “Dit is datter Plinius van ghetuyght, Maer als ick vryelijck hier van mijn gevoelen soude segghen, en dunckt my niet, dat dit waren slechte recht uytgetrocken linien oft streken, ghelijck vele meenen, die geen Schilders en zijn: maer eenigen omtreck van een arem oft been, oft immer eenich pourfijl van een tronie, oft soo yet, den welcken omtreck sy seer net hebben ghetrocken, en t’sommiger plaetsen door malcanders treck met de verscheyden verwen henen, dat hier doorcleven van Plinio sal gheheeten wesen: ghelijck de Gheleerde, die geen goet verstandt van onse Const en hebben, oock onverstandich daer van schrijven en spreken. En mijn meyninghe bevest ick hier mede, dat Plinius ghetuyght, datter de ghene die hun aen de Schilder-const verstonden, grootlijcx, in waren verwondert en verbaest. Waer door wel te verstaen is, dat het constighe omtrecken, en gheen simpel linien en waren, die dese soo uytnemenste opper Meesters in onser Const tegen malcander om strijdt ghetrocken hadden: want een rechte linie uyt der handt henen te trecken, soude menigh Schoolmeester, Schrijver, oft ander die geen Schilder en is, dickwils veel beter doen, als den besten Schilder van de Weerelt, en sulcx en wordt by den Schilders niet veel gheacht: want daer toe ghebruyckt men de rije oft reghel. Maer de Const-verstandige verwonderen en ontsetten sich, wanneer sy sien eenen aerdigen en constigen omtreck, die met een uytnemende verstandt behendich is ghetrocken, waer in de Teycken-const ten hooghsten bestaet: maer de rechte linien souden sy onghemerckt voorby gaen.”

90

On Apelles’s inimitable gracelijckheyt, see ibid., fol. 77v.

91

“Het leven van Michel Agnolo Buonarruotti, Florentine, Painter, Sculptor, and Architect,” fol. 168r: “In summa, dit werck in’t gheheel is soo ghedaen, en sulck, dat het is het licht-vat oft Lampe onses Consts, dat het ghenoechsaem is te verlichten de gheheele Weerelt, die te vooren in de rechte Teycken-const menich hondert Jaren is ghenoech verblint gheweest.

“Geen schilder behoeft te wenschen, in inventie, vercortingen, actituden, schoonheyt der naecten, en omhangsels, meer volcomentheyt te sien: want hier is de Const in haren hooghsten graet, en ter uyterste grens ghebracht, alst wel blijckt aen die volcomen schoon naeckte Beelden, seer verheven, levende en roerende, van verscheyden ouderdommen, die eenige eycken festonen, om de gulden eeuw te bewijsen, houden.”

92

Ibid., fol. 170r: “Doe begaf hy hem voorts te dienen Paus Paulus de derde, voldoende met grooter vlijt het Oordeel, in welck hy eyghentlijck met een groote manier heeft ghelet op de naeckten, te weten, op de schoonheyt, volcomen proportie, en ghestaltenissen der Menschen lichamen, op alderley actituden, hier in allen anderen overtreffende, latende aen d’een sijde de vroylicke coloreringhe, en ander duysent aerdicheden, die ander Schilders tot vermakelijcken welstandt ghebruycken, en oock eenige gracelijcken inventie in’t ordineren zynder Historie.”

93

Ibid., fol. 172v: “… datmen hem soude ghewennen uyt zijn selven wat te maken.”

94

On the “Lives” of Sprangher and Goltzius as correlates to the “Life of Michelangelo,” see J. Müller, Concordia Pragensis: Karel van Manders Kunsttheorie im Schilder-Boeck: Ein Beitrag zur Rhetorisierung von Kunst und Leben am Beispiel der rudolfinischen Hofkünstler, Veröffentlichungen des Collegium Carolinum 77 (Munich: 1993), 189–190.

95

“Voor-reden, op den grondt der edel vry Schilder-const,” in Schilder-Boeck, fols. * v verso–* vi recto.

96

Ibid., fol. 274r: “… en zijn wercken sullen als des Michel Agnels hem tot kinderen verstrecken die zijnen name in den Tempel der Fame d’onsterflijckheyt sullen opofferen.” Van Mander paraphrases Michelangelo, who is said, in “Life of Michelangelo,” fol. 172v, to have called his works his true children when a priest chided him for having no offspring.

97

“Life of Raphael,” fol. 121r: “… Raphael in alles gracelijck was.” Grace is the primary theme of this “Life.”

98

“Life of Bartholomeus Sprangher, Excellent Painter of Antwerp,” fol. 274r: “Het heeft doch van aenvangh altijt een besonder Apellische gratie in al zijn dinghen gespeelt, welcke nu verselt met de dochter van Mars en Venus, Hermonia, door t’overeencomen van wel verwen, en vast cloeck versierich teyckenen, is zijn Venussche Pictura aen t’minste Toffel-craken niet te berispen, veel min te overtreffen. Also dat den Sprangher wel verdient in soo weerdighen graet aengenomen te wesen by den Roomschen Caesar, die Const-liefdich als den grooten Alexander, oock zijnen Apelles heeft.”

99

Ibid., fols. 273v–274r: “Aengaende zijn teyckenen, daer weetmen zijns gelijck niet, soo uytnemende aerdich hy de Pen handelt, en hier in volgh ick oock het oordeel van die het Pen-handelen boven anderen bekent is, besonder Goltzij, die my gheseyt heeft, niemant zijns ghelijck te weten. Also wy verscheyden dinghen hier te lande ghesien hebben, bysonder dat heerlijck en wonder wel gheordineert bancket der Goden, oft bruyloft van Psyche, welck de gheleerde hand en constigh graef-ijser Goltzij in’t licht ghebracht heeft Ao. 1585.” On the Banquet of the Gods, based on Apuleius, Golden Ass IVVI, see M. Leesberg, comp., The New Hollstein Dutch and Flemish Etchings, Engravings, and Woodcuts, 1450–1700: Hendrick Goltzius, 4 vols. (Ouderkerk aan den Ijssel and Amsterdam: 2012), 2:312–315, no. 341.

100

Grondt, fol. 8v (chapter 2, stanza 3):

Des Teycken-consts volcomenheyt moet drijven

Wt ghesont vertandt, en aen crachten raken

Moet t’verstandt door oeffeningh, en beclijven

Door natuerlijcken gheest, die tot verstijven

Edel vernuftich is, en snel ontwaken.

101

Ibid., fol. 9r (chapter 2, stanza 10):

Ghy meught van als doen, artseren, en wasschen,

Nae den lust ws gheests met een vierich pooghen,

In het conterfeyten in handen rasschen,

Tot Kool’ en Crijt, op Papier graeuw als asschen,

Oft een bleeckachtich blaeuw, om op te hooghen,

En op te diepen: …

102

“Life of Bartholomeus Sprangher,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 271r: “noyt hebbende anders gheteyckent als met kool en crijt, heeft het doch den Paus te ghevolle ghedaen op blaeu papier oft van wit en swart, tot twaelf stucken.”

103

On natural ability as a leading theme in the “Life of Sprangher” and its equivalent status there to nobility of blood, see Müller, Concordia Pragensis, 190–193. Natural ability allows Sprangher to succeed as a courtly draughtsman and painter, precisely by ensuring that he remains sui generis.

104

“T’leven van Henricus Goltzius, uytnemende Schilder, Plaet-snijder, en Glaes-schrijver, van Mulbracht,” fol. 386r: “want dese Const, so wel als schilderen, en Plaet-snyden, wast oock, oft heeft haer volcomenheyt uyt de Teycken-const, in welck ick nu zijn beter niet en weet, oft yemandt boven ghemeen oordeel hogher gheclommen oft opgewassen.”

105

Grondt, fol. 9r (chapter 2, stanza 9):

Daerom een goet Meester waer goet ghevonden,

Voor eerst, om goede manier aen te wennen.

Also see note 120, infra.

106

Grondt, fol. 9v (chapter 2, stanza 15):

T’is wonder wat gracy men siet uytstorten

De Natuer in’t leven, aen alle sijden,

Hier is al te vinden wat ons mach schorten ….

Also see note 127, infra.

107

“T’leven van Henricus Goltzius,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 284r: “En dit heb ick van hem te segghen, dat hy van jongs aen niet alleen en heeft de schoonheyt oft verscheyden ghedaenten der Natueren gesocht nae te volghen: maer heeft oock seer wonderlijck hem ghewent verscheyden handelingen der beste Meesters nae te bootsen, alsnu Hemskercken, Frans Floris, Blocklandts, dan Fredericks, en eyndlinghe des Spranghers, welcx geestighe manière hy seer eygentlijck volgde: en sneet oock corts nae desen dat heerlijck stuck, t’Hemelsche bancket van Sprangher, overvloeyende van soeten en bevallijcken Nectar, den Teyckenaer en Snijder toelanghende ghelijcke onsterflijckheyt.” Cornelis Kiliaan, Etymologicum Teutonicae linguae sive dictionarium Teutonico-latinum (Antwerp: Jan Moretus, 1599), 330, defines naeboetsen as “imitation by the action of the hand of someone else’s deeds or words” (“imitari gesticulatione facta aut dicta alterius”); it carries the implied sense of impersonation or simulation.

108

“T’leven van Henricus Goltzius,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 284v: “maer ick sal om cortheyt veel overslaende, verhalen van ses stucken, die hy uyt Italien gecomen wesende dede: want bedenckende wat hy over al voor handelingen hadde ghesien, heeft met een eenighe handt verscheyden handelinghen van zijn inventie ghetoont.” On the Life of the Virgin, see Leesberg, comp., New Hollstein: Hendrick Goltzius, 1:15–34, nos. 8–13; W.S. Melion, “The Meditative Function of Hendrick Goltzius’s Life of the Virgin of 1593–1594,” in R. Falkenburg, Melion, and T. Richardson, eds., Image and Imagination of the Religious Self in Late Medieval and Early Modern Europe (Turnhout: 2008), 379–426; and P. Wandrey, Ehre über Gold: Die Meisterstiche von Hendrick Goltzius (Berlin: 2018), esp. 123–344.

109

“T’leven van Henricus Goltzius,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 285r: “Hier nae quam Goltzio in den sin, op gheprimuerde oft van Oly-verwe bereyde doecken metter Pen te teyckenen: want hoe groot de Pergamenten waren, sy vielen hem nae zijn groot voornemen en gheest noch veel te cleen. Des gingh hy toe, en teyckende met de Pen op eenen paslijcken grooten gheprimuerden doeck een naeckt Vrouwen beeldt, met eenen lachenden Satyr daer by, seer aerdigh en versierigh ghedaen, en heeft daer oock op gehooght, en een weynigh de naeckten t’som plaetsen met verwe aengheroert, en daer op vernist.” On this pen-werck, as Van Mander calls it, now identified as the Venus with Satyr and Faun (Sine Cerere et Baccho friget Venus) in the Philadelphia Museum of Art, see L.W. Nichols, “The Pen-Works of Hendrick Goltzius,” Bulletin of the Philadelphia Museum of Art 88 (1992): 4–56; B. Welzel, “Das Schloß, darin sich Schicksale kreuzen: Hendrick Goltzius und sein Federkunststück am Prager Hof Kaiser Rudolf II,” in N. Büttner and E. Meier, eds., Grenzüberschreitung: Deutsch-Niederländischer Kunst- und Künstleraustausch (Marburg: 2011), 139–148; and L.W. Nichols, The Paintings of Hendrick Goltzius, 1558–1617: A Monograph and Catalogue Raisonné (Doornspijk: 2013), 131–133.

110

See Van Mander’s account of the pseudo-alchemical invention of painting in oils by Jan, in “Het leven van Ian en Hubrecht van Eyck, ghebroeders, en Schilders van Maseyck,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 199v. On this “Life,” see A. Stanneck, Ganz ohne Pinsel gemalt: Studien zur Darstellung der Produktionsstrukturen niederländischer Malerei im Schilder-Boeck von Karel van Mander (1604), Europäische Hochschulschriften 393 (Frankfurt am Main, Berlin, et al.: 2003), 14–24.

111

See Grondt, fol. 1r (chapter 1, stanza 1):

O Hebes spruyten, Genius Scholieren,

Ghy die hier en daer, in plaetse van schrijven,

Hebt becladdert, en vervult u Pampieren,

Met Mannekens, Schepen, verscheyden dieren,

Dat ghy nau ledighe plaets’ en laet blijven,

Schijnend’ of Natuer u voort wilde drijven,

Een Schilder te wesen, soo dat u Ouders

U daer toe aenvoeren op lijf, en schouders.

112

See Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 2:91–92.

113

See B. Bakker, Landscape and Religion from Van Eyck to Rembrandt (Burlington: 2012; reprint ed., 2016), 179–180.

114

See Maldoets, Kiliaan, Steenhart, and Van Hasselt, Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae, fol. y3 recto.

115

See L. de Pauw-de Veen, De begrippen ‘schilder’, ‘schilderij’ en ‘schilderen’ in de zeventiende eeuw, Verhandelingen van de Koninklijke Vlaamse Academie voor Wetenschappen, Letteren en Schone Kunsten van België 31 (Brussels: 1969), esp. 1–16, 69–95, 204–237.

116

On afschilderen, see ibid., 219–220.

117

See Schilder-Boeck Book IV, fol. 300v.

118

Ibid.: “dan also ick de selvige, oft de bysonderste, t’somtijden voorhenen in de levens der Schilders hebbe ghenoemt, en verhaelt.” He adds: “… thinking, too, that the time hastens when I, having written about others who painted, ought myself to return to [my] Brushes and, making trial of them, to discover whether I be capable of producing something good” (“… bedenckende daer beneffens, dat het haest tijt soude wesen, als ick van anderen hebbe gheschreven hoe sy gheschildert hebben, dat ick my tot den Pinceelen keerde, om al proevende te ondervinden, of ick oock yet goets con maken”).

119

On the term glas-schrijven, see Vereeniging van Zackkundigen, Volks-Encyclopedie: algemeene woordenboek behandelende kunsten en wetenschappen … derde deel (Schiedam: 1858), 235–236.

120

Grondt, fol. 9r (chapter 2, stanza 9):

Daerom een goet Meester waer goet ghevonden,

Voor eerst, om goede manier aen te wennen,

En om te leeren seker vaste gronden

Int stellen, handelen, omtrecken, ronden,

Dagh, en schaduws plaetsen wel leeren kennen,

Eerst met Colen dan met Crijen oft Pennen,

Aerdich trecken op den dagh, datment nouwkens

Sien mach, en daer schaduw valt harde douwkens.

Also see note 105 supra.

121

On manier, see Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae; on handeling, see ibid., fol. V3 recto. On the related term naebootsen, see note 107 supra.

122

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 282v: “Coornhardt ghenoechte hebbende in Goltzij leeringh en begin, heeft hem dickwils op de beste wijse (zijns bedunckens) onderwesen, nae zijn uyterste vermoghen.”

123

Ibid., fol. 284r; see note 107 supra.

124

The long tale of the student Sprangher’s misadventures extends from fols. 268v–271r of his “Life.”

125

Ibid., fols. 273r and 274r. In this context, the adjective aerdige connotes the quality of clever invention, i.e., ingenuity; see Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae, fol. B1 verso. On the term aerdigh, apropos its use in Schilder-Boeck, Books IIIV, the Ancient, Italian, and Netherlandish “Lives,” where, depending on context, it can variously signify “subtle” or “attractive,” see P. Taylor, “Boekbespreking: Karel van Mander, The Lives of the Illustrious Netherlandish and German Painters, ed. H. Miedema,” Oud Holland (2001), 131–154, esp. 132.

126

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 274r.

127

Grondt, fol. 9 v (chapter 2, stanza 15):

T’is wonder wat gracy men siet uytstorten

De Natuer in’t leven, aen alle sijden,

Hier is al te vinden wat ons mach schorten

Van werckinghe, stedsel, en schoon vercorten

Omtreck, en binne-werck, om ons verblijden:

Door veel doen, en herdoen, met Langhe tijden

Raecktmen ervaren als Meester ter eeren:

Maer uyt zijn selven doen moetmen oock leeren.

Also see note 106 supra.

128

Le vite de’ più eccellenti pittori, scultori ed architettori, scritte da M. Giorgio Vasari Pittore e Architetto, ed. G. Milanesi, 9 vols. (Florence: Giunti, 1568; reprint ed., Sansoni, 1981), 1:174.

129

Ibid., 1:72: “… e poi avere sicurtà, per lo molto studio, che senza avere i naturali innanzi si possa formare di fantasia da sè attitudini per ogni verso.” On Vasari’s distinction between figure drawings dal vivo and da se, see F. Härb, “Dal vivo or da se: Nature versus Art in Vasari’s Figure Drawings,” Master Drawings 43 (2005): 326–338.

130

See R. Felfe, “Naer het leven: Between Image-Generating Techniques and Aesthetic Mediation,” in T. Balfe, J. Woodall, and C. Zittel, eds., Ad vivum? Visual Materials and the Vocabulary of Life-Likeness in Europe before 1800, Intersections 61 (Leiden and Boston: 2019), 44–88, esp. 47.

131

See M. Kemp, “ ‘Ogni dipintore dipinge se’: A Neoplatonic Echo in Leonardo’s Art Theory?”, in C.H. Clough, ed., Cultural Aspects of the Italian Renaissance: Essays in Honour of Paul Oskar Kristeller (Manchester and New York: 1976), 311–320.

132

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 208r: “Het is seer te verwonderen, hoe hy soo veel eyghenschappen onser Const uyt der Natuer, oft als uyt zijn selven, heeft byghebracht, oft gevonden, soo wel in welstandt der action, ordinantien, als in vlackheyt der lakenen en schoonheyt, als in eenige zijner lester Mary-beelden te zien is, daer men siet een schoon heerlijckheyt der stellinghe, groote vlacke daghen, en daer neffens treflijcke schaduwen, en eeparige diepselen, in de rijckelijcke lakenen.” On this passage, with specific reference to the term eepaarige, see Taylor, “Boekbespreking: Karel van Mander, The Lives of the Illustrious Netherlandish and German Painters,” 134.

133

On Lomazzo’s principles of canon formation, see M. Kemp, “ ‘Equal excellences’: Lomazzo and the Explanation of Individual Style in the Visual Arts,” Renaissance Studies 1 (1987): 1–26, esp. 18–26.

134

See note 120 supra; also see notes 93 and 108 supra.

135

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 297v, as translated in Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 1:449: “Soo dat hy teghen zijn Discipulen woorden gebruyckende, hun tot neersticheyt vermandende, wel t’somtijden heeft geseyt: ick wouw dat ick eens binnen mijnen leven had moghen eenigh goet Meester sien schilderen, oft de verwen ghebruycken, op dat ick hun wijse oft maniere hadde siende moghen afleeren.” On this passage, with reference to Bloemaert’s “disciples,” see M.J. Bok, “Biographies and Documents,” in M.G. Roethlisberger, Abrahanm Bloemaert and His Sons: Paintings and Prints (Doornspijk: 1993), 571–575.

136

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 294v.

137

See P. Parshall, “Imago contrafacta: Images and Facts in the Northern Renaissance,” Art History 16 (1993): 554–579.

138

On this and other connotations of naer t’leven, see C. Swan, “Ad vivum, naer het leven, from the life: Defining a Mode of Representation,” Word & Image 11 (1995): 353–372, esp. 354–355; on other meanings of naer t’leven, operative throughout the seventeenth century, see Felfe, “Naer het leven,” 49–81.

139

On the ekphrastic implications of the term ad vivum and its vernacular cognates, see S. Kusukawa, “Ad vivum Images and Knowledge of Nature in Early Modern Europe,” in Balfe et al., eds., Ad vivum?, 89–121, esp. 110–111.

140

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 292v: “Ondertusschen quam Cornelis zijn aenporrende natuere grootlijcx te hulp, met uytnemende veel en vlijtigh te teyckenen nae t’leven, daer toe uytsoeckende van de beste en schoonste roerende en levende Antijcke beelden, die wy hier ghenoegh binnens Landts hebben, als de ghewiste en alderbeste studie die men vinden mach, als men soo volcomen oordeel heeft, het schoonste uyt het schoon t’onderscheyden.”

141

See P.J.J. van Thiel, “Cornelis Cornelisz. van Haarlem as a Draughtsman,” Master Drawings 3 (1965): 123–154, esp. 128.

142

See Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 6:26–27.

143

On Van Mander’s epigrams lauding the trompe-l’oeil effect of Myron’s heifer, see section 6, infra, of this “Introduction,” “Landtschap and byvoechsel: Karel van Mander on Landcape and History, Simulation and Dissimulation.”

144

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 234r, as translated in Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 194: “T’is kenlijck, dat voormael t’hooft der Steden, het alder schoonste Room, bloeyende in voorspoet, en volck-rijck wesende, placht in ghelijck ghetal van Menschen t’overvloeyen, en verciert te wesen van constighe uytnemende beelden, oft om beter segghen Marmoren, en Coperen, die door hooge vernuftheyt natuerlijck in uytghekosen alder schoonste Menschen lichamen, en Dieren lijven waren verandert.” For a fuller discussion of nae[r] t’leven and uyt den gheest, see section 4.e., “Key Terms and Categlories: ‘Leven and Gheest,’ ” infra.

145

See Dictionarium tetraglotton seu voces Latinae mones, et Graecae eis respondentes, cum Gallica et Teutonica (quam passim Flandricam voant) earum interpretations (Antwerp: Ex officina Christophori Plantini, 1562), fol. 84r.

146

See ibid., fol. 84v.

147

See ibid.

148

See Cotgrave, Dictionarie (reprint ed., Hildesheim and New York: 1970).

149

See Kiliaan, Etymologicum teutonicae linguae, 662.

150

See Aristotle, Art of Rhetoric, trans. J.H. Freese (Cambridge, MA: 1982), 377–379.

151

See Cicero, De oratore, trans. H. Rackham (Cambridge, MA and London: 1942), 167–169.

152

On Rivius’s two treatises, see H.J. Dethlefs, “Wohlstand and Decorum in Sixteenth-Century German Art Theory,” Journal of the Warburg and Courtauld Institutes 70 (2007): 143–155, esp. 147–155. On later, more restrictive uses of the term by Crispijn van de Passe the Younger, Samuel van Hoogstraten, and Gerard de Lairesse, see J. Noorman, Art, Honor, and Success in the Dutch Republic: The Life and Career of Jacob van Loo (Amsterdam: 2020), 105–109.

153

On Dürer’s use of Wohlstand, see Dethlefs, “Wohlstand and Decorum,” 143–145.

154

On the figura serpentinata as a bodily canon that reconciles effort and ease, motion and stillness, see Giovanni Paolo Lomazzo, Trattato dell’arte della pittura, scoltura, et architettura … diviso in sette libri (Milan: Paolo Gottardo Pontio, 1585), 192–196, esp. 196. For a fuller discussion of Lomazzo and the figura serpentinata, see Grondt, chapter 4, note 11, infra.

155

“The brushstrokes Masterfully and manfully applied, the nudes and other elements laid out in one go, directly on the [under]drawing, and so attentively that from a distance (as it was meant to see by the eye) it had an exceptional degree of welstandt.”

156

On welstandt as a critical component of drawing after the live model, on its role in producing an ad vivum / nae[r] t’leven effect, and on the status of this effect as both a pictorial mode and a mode of viewing, see C. Fowler, “Presence in Seventeenth-Century Practice and Theory,” Word & Image 30 (2014): 155–167, esp. 162–164.

157

Grondt, fol. 37r–v:

Al soudemen soecken op veel manieren,

Nae t’leven, oft handelingh aenghename,

Ghestadelijck op grondighe papieren,

Met sap al wasschende bladers te swieren

Hopend’ ofmer al metter tijdt toe quame:

Doch, ten schijnt niet alst bemuysde lichame

Leersaem Const: want bladen, hayr, locht, en laken,

Dat is al gheest, en den gheest leert het maken.

158

See, for instance, Thomae Aquinatis Scriptum super sententiis Magistri Petri Lombardi, ed. P. Mandonnet and M.F. Moos, O.P., 4 vols. (Paris: 1929–1947), 3:50: “Distinctio II: De unione verbi et carnis mediante anima.”

159

On the three types of bodily spirits—animal, natural, and vital—their kinds and degrees of subtlety, and their relation to the incorporeality of the rational soul, see C. Göttler, “Preface: Vapours and Veils, the Edge of the Unseen,” in Göttler and W. Neuber, eds., Spirits Unseen: The Representation of Subtle Bodies in EarlyModern European Culture, Intersections 9 (Leiden and Boston: 2008), xv–xxv, esp. xx–xxi.

160

See A. Marr, R. Garrod, J.R. Marcaida, and R.J. Oosterhoff, Logodaedalus: Word Histories of Ingenuity in Early Modern Europe (Pittsburgh: 2018), 181–185. On esprit, see Cotgrave, Dictionarie.

161

Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 192 v: “Hy seyde oock dat gheen boomen hem beter aen stonden, oft beter teyckeninghe hadden als Castagne boomen, en een goede maniere van bladen om nae te volghen.” On Muziano’s landscapes, his trees in particular, see Grondt, chapter 8, notes 37 and 57.

162

On the dead-coloring stage of painting, see M. van Eikema Hommes, Changing Pictures: Discoloration in 15th-17th-Century Oil Paintings (London: 2004), 13–15; J. Gage, “Dear-Colour: Some Problems in the Interpretation of Layers,” in J. Goupy and J.P. Mohen, eds., Art et chimie, la couleur (Paris: 2000), 56–59; and N. van Hout, Functies van doodverf: de onderschildering en andere onderliggende stadia in het werk van P.P. Rubens, Ph.D. diss., Katholieke Universiteit Leuven, 2012, esp. 39–42.

163

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 242r: “Maer het neemt uyt, wat Frans al goede Discipulen heeft ghemaeckt: want hy hier in oock te boven gaet alle Schilders, die in onse Nederlanden oyt waren, so dat in alle Coninghrijcken, oft Landtschappen van Kerstenrijck, veel de beste Meesters zijn gheweest zijn Discipulen.” On the organization of Floris’s workshop, see E. Wouk, Frans Floris (1519/20–1570): Imagining a Northern Renaissance (Leiden and Boston: 2018), 161–215.

164

On working uyt zijn selven, see section 4.c., “Uyt zijn selven doen,” supra.

165

On the verscheydenheden of painting, see Schilder-Boeck, “Voor-reden,” fol. * vi r, as expounded in section 1, supra, of this “Introduction,” “The Intertextual Network of Dedicatory Epistles and Prefaces.”

166

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 298r: “By den Const-beminders zijn oock van hem seer aerdighe Landtschappen, met eenighe aerdighe en drollighe Boeren huysen, Boerigh ghereetschap, boomen, en gronden, dinghen die daer om Wtrecht seer veel en verscheyden te sien, en van hem gheconterfeyt zijn: want hy seer veel nae t’leven doet, hebbende een seer aerdighe wijse van teyckenen, en handelinge metter Pen, daer hy dan eenige sappighe verskens by voeght, tot sonderlinghen welstandt. En gelijck hy in alle deelen der Const seer ervaren is, gheeft hy dese dingen in’t schilderen grooten aerdt en schoonheyt, daer in te pas brenghende somtijts eenighe Sonneschijnen, duyster oft vierige lochten, nae den eysch des wercks. Hier in comen dan beesten, koeyen, honden, oft anders, seer natuerlijck nae t’leven ghedaen, met eenighe Historikens.”

167

Ibid., fol. 281r: “Hy volghde in inventie, beelden, en anders, heel geestigh de manier van zijns Meesters handelinghe, alsoo ick ghesien hebbe aen verscheyden dinghen, die hy in zijn jongheyt gheinventeert, en gheschildert hadde, doe hy op zijn selven wrocht, welcke my seer wel bevielen.”

168

On this type of image, see Parshall, “Imago contrafacta,” 556; and the discussion of Cornelis Corneliszoon’s nae[r] t’leven drawings, in section 4.c., “Uyt zijn selven doen,” supra.

169

As a category of imitation, namaken is bound up with the assimilationist aesthetics of schrijfconst (the art of calligraphy), which requires the master calligrapher to subsume his hand into the canonical handelinghen (manners of hand)—the various inflections of national hand, Latin Dutch, French, German, etc.—wherein he was expected to be fluent; see W.S. Melion, “Memory and the Kinship of Writing and Picturing in the Early Seventeenth-Century Netherlands,” Word & Image 8 (1992): 48–70. On the sisterhood of schrijfconst and schilderconst, see Van Mander’s dedication of Book II to Iaques Razet (fol. 59r–v), whose love of Schrijf-const is equated with his love of Schilder-const, as expressed by the “various learned, artful hands” on display in his painting collection; also see note 30, supra.

170

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 230r–v, as translated in Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 178–181: “Hendrick begaf hem tot Lantschap, en is ghereyst in Italien, en ander Landen, veel dinghen en ghesichten nae t’leven doende, en conterfeytende, die hy naemaels dickwils in zijn wercken te pas bracht. Hy hadde doch al de plaetsen niet besocht, waer van hy eenige Steden, Ruwijnen, en Antiquiteyten hadde in teyckeninghe, die ten deele in Print uyt comen: maer hadde veel dingen gehadt van een Oosterlingh, geheeten Melchior Lorch, die langen tijdt te Constantinopel hadde gewoont.” On the network of statements, examined in section 4.e., supra, about leven and gheest as sources of teyckenconst and schilderconst, also see Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives, 4:41–42, 5:92, 5:121–122, 6:47, 6:79.

171

See Lomazzo, Trattato dell’arte, 180–186.

172

See A Tracte Containing the Artes, trans. Haydocke, 86–92, esp. 87.

173

See M.W. Roskill, ed. and trans., Dolce’s “Aretino” and Venetian Art Theory of the Cinquecento (New York: 1968), 154–155.

174

See ibid., 156–157.

175

On colorito, colorire, and colorito alla veneziana, see D. Rosand, “Titian and the Eloquence of the Brush,” Artibus et Historiae 2.3 (1981): 85–96; and idem, “The Crisis of the Venetian Renaissance Tradition,” L’Arte 11–12 (1970): 5–53. On Van Mander’s adoption of key features of Dolce’s discourse on coloring, see W.S. Melion, “Karel van Mander et les origines du discours historique sur l’art dans les Pays-Bas au XVIIe siècle,” in E. Pommier, ed., Histoire de l’histoire de l’art de l’Antiquité au XVIIIe siècle (Paris: Musée du Louvre, 1996): 1–49. On netticheyt, see idem, Shaping the Netherlandish Canon, 60–63, 72, 78–79, 87, 107–108, 119, 139; and section 4.d., “Welstandt,” supra.

176

Grondt, fol. 48v (chapter 12, stanza 26):

Hier heb ick, o edel Schilder scholieren,

U voor ooghen willen beelden en stellen

Tweederley, doch welstandighe manieren,

Op dat ghy met lust u sinnen mocht stieren

Tot het gheen’ uwen gheest meest sal versnellen:

Maer soude doch raden u eerst te quellen,

En u te wennen, met vlijtighe sinnen,

Een suyver manier, end’ een net beginnen.

Also see the second marginal gloss to stanza 26: “Netticheyt voor eerst aen te wennen” (To start by familiarizing yourself with precise workmanship).

177

For Gage’s letter, see M. Rooses and C. Ruelens, Correspondance de Rubens et document épistolaires concernant sa vie et ses oeuvres, 6 vols. (Antwerp: 1887–1909), 2:120. On the letter’s significance, see E. Honig, Jan Brueghel and the Senses of Scale (University Park: 2016), 71; also see P. Taylor, Dutch Flower Painting, 1600–1720 (New Haven: 1995), 130–131; and C. Swan, Art, Science, and Witchcraft in Early Modern Holland: Jacques de Gheyn II (1565–1629) (Cambridge: 2005), 35–36.

178

See F. Borromeo, Sacred Painting: Museum, trans. K.S. Rothwell (Cambridge, MA: 2010), 167, as cited in Honig, Brueghel and the Senses of Scale, 82.

179

See A. Stanneck, Ganz ohne Pinsel gemalt: Studien zur Darstellung der Produktionsstrukturen niederländischer Malerei im “Schilder-Boeck” von Karel van Mander (1604) (Frankfurt am Main et al.: 2003), 119.

180

See K. Leonhard, “Verf, kleur: Farbtheorie und Stilleben im 17. Jahrhundert,” in C. Fritzsche, Leonhard, and G.J.M. Weber, eds., Ad Fontes! Niederländische Kunst des 17. Jahrhunderts in Quellen (Petersberg: 2013), 55–81, esp. 55–58.

181

Schilder-Boeck, Book II (“On Eupompus, Painter of Sicyon”), fol. 70r–v: “Want alle Schilderijen waren eerst alleen op zijn Hellatijcksche, dat is, op zijn Griecks, oft sy waren op zijn Asiaensch: Maer om dat Eupompus een Sycioner was, heeft men de Hellatijcsche verlaten, en men sprack niet meer dan van Schilderijen ghedaen op zijn Ionijcksche, op zijn Sycioonsche en Aetijcksche: dit was (nae mijn ghevoelen) soo men nu seght, op zijn Nederlantsch, Italiaensch, Venetiaens, door de groote volcomenheyt, die in zijn constighe wercken, gheschilderde naeckten en anders, te sien was.”

182

Ibid., Book III, fol. 187r: “Heeft Florencen te roemen, te wesen t’bedde van de Schilder-const in dese leste Eeuwen, en van soo menich edel Const-rijck gheest? Heeft Room haer te verheffen, dat sy de groote Academie oft School is van alle Schilders, en Teycken-const oeffendende studiose, oft leerlustighe der gantsche Weerelt: Soo heeft geen Stadt haer te roemen boven Venetien, van so veel goede treflijcke coloreerders, oft welverwende Schilders over langh stadich t’hebben gehadt.”

183

Ibid., Book IV, fol. 285v: “Goltzius comende uyt Italien, hadde de fraey Italische schilderijen als in eenen spieghel soo vast in zijn ghedacht ghedruckt, dat hyse waer hy was noch altijts gestadich sagh: dan vermaeckte hem de soete gracelijckheyt van Raphael, dan de eyghen vleesachticheyt van Correggio, dan de uytstekende hooghselen, en afwijckende verdreven diepselen van Tiziaen, de schoon sijdekens en wel gheschilderde dinghen van Veroneso, en ander te Venetien, dat hem de Inlandtsche dinghen soo heel volcomen niet meer conden voldoen. Het was den Schilders eenen lust en voedsel, hem hier van te hooren spreken: want zijn woorden waren al gloeyende carnatien, gloeyende diepselen, en derghelijcke onghewoon oft weynigh meer ghehoorde verhalinghen.” On the practical and theoretical context within which Goltzius came to appreciate Venetian and Lombard coloring during his Italian journey (1590–1591), see D. Bohde, “ ‘Le tinte delle carni’: Zur Begrifflickeit für Haut und Fleisch in italienischen Kunstraktaten des 15. bis 17. Jahrhunderts,” in Bohde and M. Fend, Weder Haut noch Fleisch: Dat Inkarnat in der Kunstgeschichte (Berlin: 2007), 41–63.

184

Schilder-Boeck, Book IV (“Life of Dirck Barendszoon”), fol. 259r and (“Life of Pieter Vlerick”), fol. 250r.

185

See section 4.a, “Key Terms and Categories: ‘Schilder’,” of this “Introduction,” supra.

186

On the origins of the disputatio artium in Cicero’s Academica and its method of argumentation in utramque partem as applied to the canonical philosophical schools, see C. Dempsey, “Disegno and Logos, Paragone and Academy,” in P. Lukehart, ed., The Accademia Seminars: The Accademia di San Luca in Rome, c. 1590–1635 (Washington, D.C.: 2010), 43–53, esp. 49; C.B. Schmitt, Cicero Scepticus: A Study of the Influence of the Academica in the Renaissance (The Hague: 1972); and C. Lévy, Cicero Academicus: Recherches sur les Académiques et sur la philosophie Cicéronienne, Collection de l’École française de Rome 162 (Rome: 1992).

187

The term paragone, which is often used to designate the collation of medial forms and functions, dates only from the early nineteenth century, as Dempsey argues in “Disegno and Logos,” 47. He points out that the disputa delle arti was licensed by the analogy presumed to exist, on theological grounds, between the “relation of words to things and ideas” and the “relation of visual forms to things and concepts represented.” Moreover, when the ekphrastic text disputes with its pictorial counterpart, or the ekphrastic picture with its textual source, the process of disputation can be seen to express the doctrine that various media achieve mutual perfection through this rational, logos-based process of analytical investigation and comparative scrutiny. They are contentatione perfecta (perfected through contestation).

188

On these topical pairs, which were treated dialogically, see ibid., 48.

189

“Voor-reden, op den grondt der edel vry Schilder-const,” in Schilder-Boeck, fol. * iiij recto: “De seer vermaecklijcke vernuft-barende edel Schilder-const, natuerlijcke Voedster van alle deughtsaem Consten en wetenschappen (ghelijck den letter-condigen Gheleerden ghenoegh kenlijck is) was by den meesten Heeren, en hoogh-gheleerden, oyt in seer hoogher eeren en weerden: Jae by den ouden wijsen Griecken in sulcken aensien, dat syse ten tijde van den constighen Schilder Pamphilus, by den anderen vrye consten in ghelijcken graet oft plaetse der eeren stelden. Maer of nu in oft door dit t’saemvoeghen onse uytnemende Schilder-const, door haer weerdighe tegenwoordicheyt oft bycomst den anderen Consten niet meerder eere heeft toegelangt, dan sy van henlieder gheselschaps weerdicheyt weghen heeft ontfanghen, wat ick daer van ghevoele wil ick geeren verswijghen, om niet met dweersen ooghen te worden berispt, qualijck ghedanckt, oft veel tistenissen te veroorsaken. T’is niet te wederspreken doch, oft sy en is by de ander haer plaetse wel weerdigh, van waer sy noyt van yemandt is uytghestooten gheworden, des sy te rechten wel vry mach gheheeten worden.” On the demurral with which this passage closes, see note 42 supra.

190

Rhetorica ad Herennium, trans. H. Caplan (Cambridge, MA: 1954) 404–409.

191

Ibid. 356–359.

192

On ekphrasis as the description of a work of art or, more precisely, of the speaker’s experience of having viewed such a work, see M. Baxandall, Giotto and the Orators: Humanist Observers of Painting in Italy and the Discovery of Pictorial Composition, 1350–1450, Oxford Warburg Studies (London et al.: 1971), 85–87, 90–96; J. Heffernan, “Ekphrasis and Representation,” New Literary History 22 (1991), 307; idem, Museum of Words: The Poetics of Ekphrasis from Homer to Ashbery (Chicago: 1993) 191; and J. Elsner, “Introduction: The Genres of Ekphrasis,” Ramus 31 (2002): 1–18.

193

Van Mander wittily expressed his doubts about disputatious argumentation as an instrument of truth in the Dutch poem he composed to accompany an allegorical print of ca. 1593, Foolish Discord in the World, designed by him for his maecenas Melchior Wijntgis and engraved by the workshop of Jacques de Gheyn II:

Door herde bollen met voorhoofen Diamantigh,

(Die altijds ‘tis, ten is, den onghelijcken sangh

Vast driven heen en weer, pyck tegen pyck) faelcantigh

De wereldt al verkeert licht droefvigh in bedwangh.

Sulck wil zij meen zy recht, al gaet hy crommen gangh,

Met kracht op zijn ghewis, oock vormen ‘svolcks ghewissen:

Waer vreed is, daer is God: maer ‘t schijnt wel al zoo langh

Als wereldt is, sal m’altijdt ‘tis, ten issen.

Een in noodigh.

Hard-headed, with adamantine brows,

(That ever ’tis, ’tisn’t, the unlike song

Do stoutly drive back and forth, pike to pike) error-prone,

Under duress, the fickle sad world turns.

Such a one will think himself right, even when he takes the crooked path,

By force of his assurance, the people’s sureties, too, take form:

Where peace is, there is God: but it well seems that

So long as the world is, there shall ever ’tis, ’tisn’t be mine.

Only one thing is necessary.

In the context of this poem, his motto, “Een is noodigh,” taken from Luke 10:42, can be read to signify that “Concord is needful.” On this print, see M. Leesberg, ed., The New Hollstein Dutch and Flemish Etchings, Engravings, and Woodcuts, 1450–1700: Karel van Mander, ed. H. Leeflang and C. Schuckman (Rotterdam and Amsterdam: 1999), xxxi–xxxii, lxxix–lxxx, 137 no. 121.

194

“Van Appelles, Prince der Schilders,” fol. 77r: “Jae Plinius die houdt, dat hy niet alleen alle Schilders die voor hem waren en heeft overtroffen: maer oock alle die naer hem zijn gheweest. Men leest oock nerghens by den Ouden, van geenen soo uytnemenden. Dan yemandt mocht dencken, of zijn dingen, soo sy in wesen waren, niet bysonders en souden wesen, alsmense stelde tegen de schilderijen van de Schilders van desen tegenwoordigen tijt, daer ben ick gantsch van meyninge tegen, dewijle datmen te Room siet de ronde Beelden in Marber en Coper, die tegen de Jaren hun harde hoofden hebben connen bieden, soo uytnemende te wesen. Nademael men ooc altijts bevonden heeft, dat de Schilder-const en ronde beelden-const malcander niet en ontwijcken: maer dat wanneer d’een opgeclommen is, d’ander niet en is ghedaelt, maer hebben gemeenlijck gelijck in waghe ghelegen. Laet ons nu ons moderne ronde Beelden by de beste Antijcke leggen: de Michael Agnoli selve sullen ghenoech te doen hebben, hun in Consten te doen wijcken. Nu soud’ ick gissen uyt datmen leest, dat Apelles geschilderde Beelden eer beter als slimmer waren, als de beste ronde, die men van de oude noch siet.”

195

Ibid.: “Hy wilde seggen, dat hun dingen hadden van doen een bysonder uytnemende gratie, die zijn dingen hadden.”

196

“Voor-reden, op den grondt der edel vry Schilder-const”, in Van Mander, Schilder-Boeck, Book I, fol. * vi recto: “De selve verscheydenheden salmen oock vinden by den dees-tijdtsche Italianen en Nederlanders te zijn geweest, hier te lang te verhalen: waer by de Jeught gheleert sal wesen, om in de Const volherden, te grijpen nae t’ghene Natuere meest aenbiedt. Ist niet de volcomenheyt in beelden en Historien, soo mach het wesen Beesten, Keuckenen, Fruyten, Bloemen, Landtschappen, Metselrijen, Prospectiven, Compartimenten, Grotissen, Nachten, branden, Conterfeytselen nae t’leven, Zeen, en Schepen, oft soo yet anders te schilderen. Maer boven al behoort oft behoeft yeder op t’uyterste yverigh en vyerigh te trachten, om d’eenighe opperste heerschappije onser Consten tot hem te trecken en te vercrijghen, waer toe men sonder eenigh ghevaer, krijgh oft bloetvergieten, gheraken can, als men maer ernstigh met stadighen vlijt de milde Natuere te baet comt.”

(One will also find the same varieties [verscheydenheden] amongst contemporary Italians and Netherlanders, here too many to recount: whereby the Young shall be taught to persevere in the Art, to seize that which Nature offers most readily. If not perfection in figures and Histories, so may it be Animals, Kitchens, Fruits, Flowers, Landscapes, Buildings, Perspectives, Cartouches, Grotesques, Night Scenes, Fires, Portraits after the life, Sea Pieces, and Ships, or to paint something else in this wise. But above all, every person must strive with the utmost diligence and zeal to acquire and achieve a singular mastery in our Arts, which he will attain without any danger, battle, or shedding of blood, if earnestly, with constant effort, he but avail himself of magnanimous Nature.)

Van Mander considers history prima inter pares amongst pictorial subject categories, precisely because it encompasses all these “omstandighe deelen [der Consten]” (concomitant parts [of the Arts]), corollary to that “most special part,” namely, “to learn how to dispose a Human figure” (“een Menschelijk beeldt te leeren stellen”); his alternate term for the “concomitant parts” is verscheydenheden, which defines them as varied adornments and amplifications upon a pictorial subject or, alternatively, as themselves self-sufficient subjects; see Melion, Shaping the Netherlandish Canon, 1–12. Hendrick Hondius, in Pictorum aliquot celebrium praecipuae Germaniae Inferioris effigies (editio princeps, The Hague: 1610; editio secunda, The Hague: 1618), a canon of artists’ portraits based on Hieronymus Cock and Domenicus Lampsonius’s canon of 1572, likewise titled Effigies, and on Van Mander’s Northern “Lives,” portrays many of the verscheydenheden as fully autonomous specialties, whose skillful exponents are all equally worthy of praise; see De Vries, “Hondius Meets Van Mander,” 270–284, esp. 279. Lampsonius had already conferred this status upon landscapes (Patinir, Bles, Matthys Cock, and Gassel) and grotesques or drolleries (Bosch, Bruegel), on which see Melion, Netherlandish Canon, 143–145; and Wouk, “Life of Lombard” and “Effigies,” 40–42.

197

A marginal gloss reads: “Nota: Already before the time of Homer, Daedalus was exceptionally skilled at Schilder-const.”

198

Van Mander, “Voor-reden, op het Leven der oude Antijcke Doorluchtighe Schilders, soo wel Griecken als Romeynen,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fols. 60v–61r: “So ist onwedersprekelick, na des selven Homeri schrijven in zijn 18e. Boeck, of de Schilder-const en was genoech ten tijde der Troyanen bekent, want hy seght, dat Vulcanus had gemaect in Achilles schilt voor Thetys, duysentderley versieringen van Inventien, te weten, Hemel, aerde en Zee, den loop van Son, maen, en sterren, en die Hemel teyckens onderscheyden den Beyr, de Pleiaden, Hyaden, en dergelijcken: dan had hy gemaect twee Steden, in d’eene Bruyloften, daer men de Bruyden met brandende toortsen geleyde, en daer men openbaer danssen maecte, en de Vrouwen saten op hen drempels toe en sagen, schijnende aen haer oogen verwondert te wesen: elders waren Lieden vergaert om te hooren eenige die tegen malcanderen pleyteden, om eenen dootslag voor t’Recht, in welke Historien (hier te lang te verhalen) segt hy van wonder affecten en actien, dat den besten Schilder van de weerelt nu genoech te doen hadde die dingen al uyt te beelden. In d’ander Stadt segt hy van veel geschiedenissen van Oorlogen, de Stadt was belegert, en hielden veel raedt van binnen, deden uytval lagen leggende, terwijle dat Wijfs en Kinderen met den ouden Mannen de Stadt beschermden: die de lage leyden, hadden Mars en Minerva voor Leytlieden, en lagen so by een Riviere, alwaer sy verwachten te nemen Vee, dat daer quam drincken: daer quamen twee Herders, welcke spelende op hun Ruyschpijpen, gaven hun blatende Kudden een vrolijc vermaeck, niet merckende op die lagen der vyanden, de welcke met hun sweerden uytsprongen, en namen dese vette Ossen en witte Schapen, doodende de Boersche Herderen: die van t’Leger in den raedt vergadert wesende, verlieten hun vergaderinge, en quamen derwaert te Peerde, waer een groot gevecht is geschiet, daer tusschen beyden hun spel hadden oproer, tweedracht en de doot: hier waren groote bloetstortingen, verscheyden actien en cleedingen te sien. Noch hadder (segt hy) Vulcanus gemaect eenen dreftschen acker, die driemael geploegt was, en was sonder gelijcke sacht en het van aerd-gront, hier op waren veel Bouwers, die hun gekockte Ossen met de ploegen heen en weder stierden: aen t’eynde van den Acker quam een Man, die hun den arbeyt ververschte met een kanne Wijns. Men sagh ooc also sy ploegden, de versch geroerde aerde bruynder te wesen, dan die voor henen geploegt was, dit alles (segt hy) was een werck weerdich te sien. Ter ander plaetsen was gemaect een vruchtbaer veldt, dat vol geel-arige vruchten wesende, worde van den maeyers gesneden, de hoopen oft bossen lagen dicht op malcander midden de voren: daer waren die de schooven bonden, en knechten die de hoopen in leyden: daer was den Heere van’t velt, houdende in zijn hant eenen Scepter oft staf, den welcken hen scheen te verblijden. Eenige die sulc last hadden, waren elder doende onder geeyckelde Eycken de maeltijt toe te maken, daer sy een van den vetsten Ossen hadden ten Offer geslachtet, daer sy al aen doende waren: de Vrouwen des huysgesins brochten den wercklieden te noenmalen spijse en broot, met wit fijn meel overstroyt. Noch hadde Vulcanus in zijn Godlijck werck ghemaect eenen Wijngaert vol druyven, welcke swart waren van blaeuwicheit, en had den Wijngaert omvangen met een graft, en om daer in te comen wasser maer eenen wegh, daer de Wijnsnijders door uyt en in gingen, daer saghmen maegden en knechten de vrolijcke vruchten in gevlochten wisse korfkens dragen. Midden onder dese was een jong knecht, die spelende op een Herp, soetelijc een Boerigh liedeken song, daer d’ander mate houdende, vrolijc met den handen dappende, op dansten. Voorts had hy gemaect een vette kudde Ossen met gehoornde voorhoofden, welcke quamen al loeyende uyt den stal in de weyde, by een snel loopende Rivier, met rietige oevers, vier Herders volgden om hun te bewaren, met negen snel-voetige Honden, en twee grouwelijcke Leewen hadden aen het eynde genomen uyt t’brullende kudde eenen Stier, die met luyder stem om hulpe riep, en hoewel de Herders toeloopende hun Honden aenhissen, en dorsten sy niet toebijten, vreesende van den Leewen (die den Stier niet verlatende t’bloet en ingewant aten) gesnout te wesen, maer basten slechs wat by, en liepen dan so heen. Noch had desen mancken Constenaer gemaect een dal vol witte Schapen, ooc stallen, keeten, en dergelijcke dingen. Noch had hy geschildert op de selve wijse, dat Dedalus voormaels had gedaen in Creta om de schoon Ariadne een vergaderinge van nieu-crachtige Jongelingen en schoon-hayrige Dochters, die wel waren weerdigh 100. Ossen, dese t’samen hant aen hant danssende, maecten eenen ronden ring oft crans: der Knechten cleedinge was van fijn geweef, en blincte oft met oly had geweest besmeert, de maegden hadden lang-ployige keurssen, en hadden op de hoofden verf-bloemige kranssen geladen: de knechten hadden aen vergulde daggen, somtijts met veerdigen wel geleerden voet seer licht loopende, gelijck eenen Potbacker zijn radt somtijts licht om schuyft: somtijts liepen sy gepaert t’samen recht uyt, en maecten den eenen dans op den anderen, en somtijts al onder een vermengt: eenen grooten omstant volcx sagh vast toe met groot vermaeck, wie de fraeyste sprongen dede: daer onder ander twee op hun gesang fraey en volcomen tuymelsprongen deden. Nu is uyt desen Schilt wel te oordeelen, datmen ten tijde der Troyanen van schilderen genoech heeft gheweten: want wat Schilder isser, die dit alles soude connen versieren, oft te wege brengen in desen onsen tijt? Of men nu seggen wil, dat dit werc niet en was geschildert, maer gegraven, oft metter hitten geamailleert, het mocht zijn so het mocht, ten was niet mogelijc alle de verhaelde dingen int werc te brengen, of de Teycken-const en most doe al in seer groote perfectie wesen: was sy in groote perfectie, so ist niet mogelijc of de Schilder-const most mede al gebaert en in wesen zijn, en ooc niet onvolcomen, als wel te ramen is. Ten anderen, leestmen in’t 1e. Boeck der Aeneidos, dat den Troyaen Aeneas, comende te Carthago in eenen Tempel, die ter eeren van Iuno gebout was, en sagh daer een schilderije van de belegeringe van Troyen, daer hy Priamus, Achilles, en veel andere na t’leven gedaen sagh, oft so gedaen dat hyse kende. Onder ander strijden en vluchten sagh hy, hoe Troilus ongeluckich tegen Achillem hadde gestreden: elders hoe desen Achilles, Hectors doot lichaem om de mueren van Troyen gesleept hebbende, dat vercoopt voor een deel gouts, en veel meer ander omstandicheyts, het welc so constich en we gedaen was, dat het Aeneas zijn gemoet so beweegde, dat een groote vloet van tranen zijn wangen bevochtigden. Nu magh men seggen, dit is t’samen al Poeetsche versieringe, en geen Historie, om yet sekers mede te bewijsen, tot het voorige verhael niet genoechsaem wesende: dit laet ick so wesen Virgilij gedichten in zijn weerde: nochtans al versierde hy, so waren sulcke uytnemende Poeten aendachtigh op alle dingen, overleggende of men ooc in den tijt van den Troyanen, doe Troyen onder gegaen was, alree schilderije gevonden heeft, anders waer hy te straffen van groote onbedachtheyt: desgelijcx waer ooc te seggen van Homero. Nu dit overgeslagen, is te bedencken, dat Homerus niet en conde schrijven so heel werckelijck en bescheydelijc van de Teycken oft Schilder-const, haddese te zijnen tijde, oft te vooren niet openbaer en in kennisse geweest, jae ooc niet so heel breet daer van, haddese niet rijckelijc en hooglijck in swang en gebruyc geweest, ten alderminsten in zijnen tijt.”

199

Van Mander identifies the Greek painter Pyrrhus as a nephew of Daedalus; see “Van Pyrrhus, de Neef van Dedalo, d’eerste Griecksche Schilder,” in ibid., fols. 62v–63r.

200

On the Shield of Achilles as an epitome of the relation between verbal and visual description, see A.S. Becker, The Shield of Achilles and the Poetics of Ekphrasis (Lanham, MD: 1995).

201

See “Het leven van Jan en Hubrecht van Eyck, ghebroeders, en Schilders van Maeseyck,” in ibid., fols. 200v–201r.

202

Van Mander recapitulates the etymology of schilderen from schild in “Life of Bartholomeus Sprangher, Excellent Painter of Antwerp,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 268r, where he comments on the propriety of the surname “Van den Schilde” conferred on Sprangher by the Holy Roman Emperor, Rudolf the II, to mark his elevation to the nobility: “Thus may one now call him Sir Bartholomeus Sprangher van den Schilde, which term ‘Van den Schilde’ well agrees with the word Schilderen, since the word schilderen originated from the painting of shields, upon which we have previously expatiated.” On this passage and its relation to Van Mander’s conception of the court painter, see Müller, Concordia Pragensis, 181–185, esp. 184.

203

“Etimologie, oft uytlegh, waer t’woordt Schilder, oft Schildery, zijn hercomst van heeft,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 58v:

Siet, Adam, Broeder weerdt, ick achte dat dit woordt

Van Schilder, oft Schildry, comt van den Schilden voort:

Want d’edel Helden cloeck van in den krijgh voor Troyen

Hun Schilden lieten schoon met beeldewerck vermoyen,

Romeynen insghelijcx, jae hinghen hier en daer

Hun Voorders Schilden op, in plaetsen openbaer,

In Stadthuys, eyghen sael, oft in der Goden Kercken,

Om daer ghedencken by hun Ouders vrome wercken:

Want stonden veel daer op nae t’leven self ghedaen.

Dit Schilde schildren, siet, en is sindt noyt vergaen,

Waer uyt dat is ghevolght, en voort en voort ghecommen,

Te segghen Schildery, en Schilders ons te nommen.

204

See “Life of Cornelis Ketel, Excellent Painter of Gouda,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 274v.

205

Grondt, fol. 5r (chapter 1, stanza 47, marginal gloss). Van Mander equates poetry and rhetoric in the manner typical of the rederijkers, the rhetor-poets of his time, as witness Matthijs de Castelein’s theoretical poem De const van rhetoriken (The Art of Rhetoric) of 1555, which is in fact a treatise on poetics. On De Castelein’s poem, see G. Stuiveling, “Schaken met De Castelein,” Spiegel der Letteren 7 (1963–1964): 161–184, and the sources cited in note 55 supra. Rhetorica in this context refers to the so-called arts de seconde rhétorique—not the formal and structural principles of argumentation but, rather, the techniques of prosody, especially rhyme, rhythm, equisonance, and, of course, colorful elocution.

206

Grondt, fol. 5r (chapter 1, stanza 47):

De Dicht-const Rhetorica soet van treken,

Hoe lustich, aenvallijck, soeckt te ontvluchten,

Doch self en heb ickse noyt veel besweken,

Maer t’heeft my vry uyt den weghe ghesteken

Van de Schilder-bane, dat is te duchten,

T’is wel een schoon bloeme, droeghe sy vruchten,

Soo dat sy brochte het meel in de Keucken,

Dan mochte den sin haer t’hanteren jeucken.

Stanzas 45–47, in focusing on the business of art, recall P.C. Ketel’s emphasis on the commercial profit to be gained from the practice schilderconst, in his “Workshop-Song for Young Painters, after the wise: ‘The Lovely May, etc.,’ ” translated infra amongst the occasional poems preliminary to the Grondt (fol. ** vi recto); stanza 1 ends by asserting, “Our wish, our desire and hope is to sell.” Also see Advantage’s promise “to increase your pounds-weight of coin all round,” in Ketel’s “New Year’s Song, to be sung by six personages—Order, Art, Time, Advantage, Pictura, and Reason. After the wise: ‘Rejoice / in virtue / you Rhetorical Youth’ ” (fols. * vii verso-* viij recto), also translated infra. Ketel was responding to the practical strain that runs through Van Mander’s poem.

207

The term used by Van Mander, doek (canvas), can also refer specifically to linen; see Etymologicum Teutonicae linguae, 90. On Bol’s lost Daedalus and Icarus, see Miedema, ed., Karel van Mander, Lives of the Illustrious Netherlandish and German Painters, trans. Cook-Radmore, 4:210–212. Illustrated here is the version in the Museum Mayer van den Bergh, Antwerp (Fig. 4).

208

Van Mander, “Het leven van Hans Bol, Schilder van Mechelen”, in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 260r–v: “Ick heb van hem ghesien tot mijn Cosijn Mr. Jan van der Mander, nu Pensionnaris te Ghent, eenen grooten Water-verwen doeck, wesende d’Historie oft Fabel van Dedalus en Icarus, daer sy door d’open locht hun ghevanghnis ontvloghen. Daer was een Roots ligghende in’t water, die een Casteel gheladen hadde, die soo ghedaen was, dat het niet wel te verbeteren was, soo aerdigh en net was die Rootse bemoscht, bewassen, en met haer veel coleurkens, op een vaste manier gehandelt: desghelijcx dat oudt vreemdsche gebouw van dat Casteel, als uyt de Roots gewassen: was wonder versierlijck. Voort was seer wel ghehandelt het verre Lantschap, en het water daer dese Roots haer in spiegelde, en in die bruynicheyt saghmen de pluymen, die uyt Icari vloghelen door het was-smilten ghevallen waren, en dreven op t’water seer natuerlijck. Oock warender eenighe schoon voor-gronden, en ander Landtschap: ontrent voor aen sat eenen Schaep-wachter met zijn Schapen, en wat verder eenen Acker-man aen den Ploegh, die om hoogh dit vlieghen als verwondert aensaghen, ghelijck den Text mede brengt.”

209

Leon Battista Alberti, On Painting: A New Translation and Critical Edition, trans. R. Sinisgalli (Cambridge et al.: 2011), 75–76.

210

On the form and function of Vasari’s ekphrases in the Vite, and on their insistently literary rather than pictorial frame of reference, see S.L. Alpers, “Ekphrasis and Aesthetic Attitudes in Vasari’ Lives,” Journal of the Warburg and Courtauld Institutes 23 (1960): 190–215.

211

Van Mander, “Het leven van Jacob Palma, Schilder van Venetien,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book III, fol. 187r–v: “Daer is ooc geweest den ouden Jacob Palma van Venetien, desen schilderde van Olyverwe een heerlijck besonderste werck in de Camer, daer die van de Schole van S. Marc vergaderen, een stuck, daer t’doot lichaem van S. Marc wort ghebracht nae Venetien in een Schip. Hier is seer aerdich uytghebeeldt een grouwelijck Zee-onweder, daer oock noch ander Schepen en Schuyten van de felle winden worden bevochten, seer wel en met grooter aendacht ghedaen: ghelijck oock is eenen groep beelden in de locht, in verscheyden ghedaenten van quade gheesten, die als Winden blasen, om t’Schip, dat door de rasende golven met riemen crachtlijck wort geroeyt, te beletten. Hier sietmen den vlijt en behendicheyt der Schippers, t’gheweldt der Winden, t’roeren der baren, en de blixemen uyt den Hemel vallen, t’water gebroken van den riemen, en t’vouwen der riemen van de cracht der Roeyers, een dinghen wesende dat niet te verbeteren is, de Natuer naerder te comen: Want het schijn in’t aensien, dat het heele stuck roert en schudt, gelijck of t’gene daer in geschildert is al leefde, en natuerlijck geschiedde.”

212

On geestigh handling as the sine qua non for the lively portrayal of leaves, hair, sky, and drapery, see Van Mander, “Van het Landtschap,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book I, stanza 37, fol. 37r–v; and Miedema, Karel van Mander, Grondt, 2: 556.

213

See Kiliaan, Etymologicum Theutonicae linguae, 148. The Etymologicum (Antwerp, Jan Moretus: 1599) is the retitled third edition of Kiliaan’s Dictionarium Teutonicum Latinum (Antwerp, Christopher Plantin: 1574), on which, see Claes F., De bronnen van drie woordenboeken uit de drukkerij van Plantin: het Dictionarium tetraglotton (1562), de Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae (1573), en Kiliaans eerste Dictionarium Teutonico-Latinum (1574) (Ghent: 1970).

214

The recent publication by the Getty Research Institute of Samuel van Hoogstraten’s Inleyding tot de hooge schoole der schilderkonst: anders de zichtbaere werelt (Introduction to the academy of the art of painting: that is, the visible world) of 1678, edited by Celeste Brusati, translated by Jaap Jacobs, and permeated by references to the Grondt and the “Lives,” makes patently clear how crucial, indeed canonical, Van Mander’s text was to his successors; see C. Brusati, ed., Samuel van Hoogstraten’s Introduction to the Academy of Painting; or, The Visible World, trans. J. Jacobs (Los Angeles: 2021), esp. 4, 8, 10, 15, 17–19, 32 n. 7.

215

On the close fit between Van Hoogstraten’s theory and practice as an argument against binary thinking in the study of Dutch art—the tendency to dichotomize questions of meaning and questions of representation, see C. Brusati, “Paradoxical Passages: The Work of Framing in the Art of Samuel van Hoogstraten,” in T. Weststeijn, ed., The Universal Art of Samuel van Hoogstraten (1627–1678): Painter, Writer, and Courtier (Amsterdam: 2013), 53–75.

216

See ibid., 61.

217

See ibid.

218

See ibid., 67.

219

On Van Hoogstraten’s close reading of the Schilder-Boeck, see C. Brusati, Artifice and Illusion: The Art and Writing of Samuel van Hoogstraten (Chicago and London: 1995), 160, 219, 220–222, 228, 232–233, 237, 265 n. 17, 313 n. 10, 317 n. 39 & 40.

220

On the insien and doorsien as crucial sources of visual interest in history painting, see Grondt, fol. 16r (chapter 5, stanza 12): “Want ons ordinancy moeste ghenieten / Eenen schoonen aerdt, naer ons sins ghenoeghen / Als wy daer een insien oft doorsien lieten / Met cleynder achter-beelden, en verschieten / Van Landtschap, daer t’ghesicht in heeft te ploeghen.”

221

Grondt, fols. 18v–20r (chapter 5, stanzas 44–60).

222

A byvoechsel is something bygevoeghd (adjoined, added, attached for a specific purpose or task). Kiliaan, Etymologicum Teutonicae linguae, 54, supplies as Latin cognates: “Adiungere, applicare, adaptare, accommodare, admouere, addere, subijcere.” Van Mander introduces the term in Grondt, fol. 19r (chapter 5, stanza 45), where he talks about the amplification of historical scenes by means of curious appurtenances designed to arouse the viewer’s interest; see 5:45 n. 58 infra.

223

Ibid., fol. 17r (chapter 5, stanza 23):

… dat sy sullen den ghewissen

Gantschen Scopus hunner gheschiedenissen,

Als besloten in een Circkels beringhen,

Op dat also een deel bootsen bevinghen

d’History, die als t’Centre punct in’t midden

Blijft staend’, als Beeldt, dat veel aensien oft bidden.

224

Grondt, fol. 19r (marginal gloss to chapter 5, stanza 45): “Hoe dat eenighe hun Historien vreemdelijck uytbeelden, en schier onkenlijck maken, waer van een exempel uyt Sannazarus Poët van Napels.”

225

Grondt, fol. 37v (chapter 8, stanza 41). On the poetics of the green world, see H. Berger Jr., Second World and Green World: Studies in Renaissance Fiction-Making (Berkeley, Los Angeles, and London: 1988), esp. 3–40, 251–323, 373–408. The phrase “little world” brings to mind a specific type of miniaturization, discussed by Elizabeth Honig in Brueghel and the Senses of Scale, 81–84 and, with specific reference to Brueghel’s battle scenes set within vast landscapes, 103–112: an optically expansive view, panoramic in scope, is condensed into a delimited pictorial field that is yet made to extend laterally and recede infinitely; such pictures are absorptive in that they invite the eyes to roam across and into the landscape, and to dwell on multifarious anecdotal episodes, each of which is fully individuated. Honig coins the apt term “probing” to describe this method of historical construction and the aggregative mode of viewing peculiar to it; see ibid., 58, 72–73, 77.

226

Grondt, fol. 37v (chapter 8, stanza 41):

T’waer goet, waert ghy u storyken voorweter,

Schriftich, oft Poetich, naer u benoeghen,

Om u Landtschap daer naer te schicken beter,

Maer boven al en weest doch gheen vergheter,

Cleyn Beelden by groote Boomen te voeghen,

V cleyn Weerelt ghemaeckt, stelt hier te ploeghen,

Daer te maeyen, ginder t’voer op den Waghen,

Elders visschen, varen, vlieghen, en jaghen.

227

On this large drawing, see W.S. Melion, “Ekphrasis and Ovidian Poetics in Hendrick Goltzius’s Landscape with Venus and Adonis of ca. 1598,” in A. di Furia and Melion, eds., Ekphrastic Image-Making in Early Modern Europe, 1500–1700, Intersections 79 (Leiden and Boston: 2021), 520–621.

228

Respectively, Grondt, fol. 19r (chapter 5, stanzas 46, 47, and 48).

229

Ibid. (stanza 47).

230

Ibid. (stanzas 48–49).

231

Ibid., fol. 19v (stanza 52).

232

Ibid. (stanza 54).

233

Ibid.

234

Ibid. (stanza 55): “En scheen dat hy gants met schalckheyt doordreven / Bedachte, hoe best soude wesen moghen / Den gheooghden Argus van hem bedroghen.”

235

Ibid., fol. 19v (stanza 56).

236

Ibid., fol. 20r (stanza 56).

237

Ibid. (stanza 57).

238

Ibid. (stanza 58, marginal gloss): “Dit is nu het scopus der History, te weten, t’vonnis van Paris.” Van Mander himself painted a Judgment of Paris like the one described here, replete with byvoechsels; see Theodorus Schrevelius, Harlemias, ofte, om beter te seggen, De eerste stichtinghe der Stadt Haerlem (Haarlem: Thomas Fonteyn, 1648), 375: “He painted various things from his Poetic Spirit. There is still to be seen in our house a judgment of Paris amidst forest greenery, wherein [Van Mander] brings forth the three Goddesses who came to be judged by Paris, along with wood-nymphs, mountain-nymphs, river-nymphs, and nymphs of the stream, all sitting round about as witnesses, in the place where Xanthus himself, the river of Troy, lay, and many other such things plucked from the fables of the Poets.” (“Hy heeft verscheyde dinghen gheschildert, uyt Poëtische Geest. Daer is noch van hem een stuck in wesen in ons huys, het oordeel van Paris in de groente van een bosschagie, daer hy in te pas brengt, behalven die drie Goddinnen die daer quamen onder ‘t oordeel van Paris, Bos-goddinnen, Bergh-goddinnen, Revier-goddinnen, Fonteyn-goddinnen als toe siensters sittende in ‘t rondt, daer Xanthus selfs de revier van Troien lagh, en meer andere dierghelijcke dinghen gheraept uyt de fabulen der Poöeten.”)

239

Grondt, fol. 20r (chapter 5, stanza 58):

Maer t’gheen t’overlegghen en te aensiene

Stondt, seer vernuftich, bevallijck, ydoone,

Was de groote aendacht, fraey van ingiene,

Van desen discreten Schilder, door wiene

Daer stonden ghemaeckt, uytnemende schoone

Iuno en Minerva elcke persoone,

Soo gants volcomen, als dat hy van beter

Te doen niet hadde moghen zijn vermeter.

240

Ibid. (stanza 59):

Nu hy Venus dan schoonder, nae t’behooren,

Als d’ander twee te maken niet en wiste,

Heeft hy, daer dese twee stonden van vooren,

Venus gheschildert subtijl in’t orbooren,

Met den rugg’ om ghewent, als wijs Artiste,

Ontschuldighende t’behaghen met liste,

Ghevende t’bedencken, mocht sy haer keeren,

Sy soude des anders schoonheyt onteeren.

241

On the Latin term catena and its Dutch equivalent ketene, see Kiliaan, Etymologicum Teutonica linguae, 233.

242

J. Sannazzaro, Arcadia and Piscatorial Eclogues, trans. R. Nash (Detroit: 1966), 44.

243

Ibid.

244

Recounted by Pliny in Naturalis historia XXXV.xxxvi.74, Timanthes’s ingenious device is also featured in “Van Timanthes, den seer constighen Schilder,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book II, fol. 70r. As Lorenzo Pericolo points out, in Caravaggio and Pictorial Narrative: Dislocating the Istoria in Early Modern Painting (London and Turnhout: 2011), 84, Timanthes’s Sacrifice of Iphigenia, by veiling Agamemnon to convey the intensity of paternal grief, qualifies as a variant of litotes, the rhetorical figure whereby affirmation is effected through negation.

245

See S. Kusukawa, “Conrad Gessner on an ‘Ad Vivum’ Image,” in P.H. Smith, H.J. Cook, and A.R.W. Meyers, eds., Ways of Making and Knowing: The Material Culture of Empirical Knowledge (Ann Arbor: 2014), 330–356, esp. 336; also see eadem, “Ad vivum Images and Knowledge of Nature in Early Modern Europe,” in T. Balfe, J. Woodall, and C. Zittel, Ad vivum? Visual Materials and the Vocabulary of Life-Likeness in Europe before 1800, Intersections 61 (Leiden and Boston: 2019), 89–121, esp. 110–111. Caroline Fowler, in “Presence in Seventeenth-Century Practice and Theory,” Word & Image 30 (2014): 155–167, esp. 160–161, extrapolates, with specific reference to Van Mander and fellow masters of teyckenconst such as Cornelis Cornelisz. van Haarlem, Hendrick Goltzius, and Abraham Bloemaert, that their shared commitment to drawing the nude model ad vivum / nae[r] t’leven testifies to a new emphasis on producing in the viewer a direct experience both of the model’s presence and, paradoxically, of the draftsman’s prior unmediated viewing of said model. For Fowler, this experience is multisensory and also phenomenological, in that the encounter with such a drawing heightens the viewer’s awareness of her / his own bodily presence. I would argue that for Van Mander, the lively effect of presence issues most fully from an immersive historie that encompasses or, alternatively, is comprised by an encompassing landtschap. His Sannazzaro-like ekphrasis attempts to give an account of the engaging effect—at once enargeian and assimilatory—that an history picture can exercise on the beholder when it is painted in a landscape mode.

246

Grondt, fol. 19r (stanza 45): “Datmen qualijck den sin soude gheraden.”

247

Ibid., fol. 16r (stanza 12): “Van Landtschap, daer t’ghesicht in heeft te ploeghen.”

248

The remark in stanza 12 about ploeghen is introduced in stanzas 10 and 11 by multiple references to securing welstandt:

Bevallijcke schoon welstandighe crachten,

Ghy moet noch op verscheyden dinghen achten.

Eerst suldy bevinden uyt ondersoecken

In u ordinancy welstants fundacy ….

249

“Hier volghen nu de levens der vermaerde levende Nederlandtsche Schilders. Het leven van Hans Fredeman de Vries, Schilder van Leeuwaerden,” in Schilder-Boeck, Book IV, fol. 267r: “alwaer den Keyser als hem vergissende dickwils meende door heen te gaen, en quam dickwils sien schilderen.”

250

See note 110 supra: the phrase “hem vergissende dickwils meende” can be translated either “often forgetting himself” or “forgetting himself, he often thought.” The parallel clause “en quam dickwils sien schilderen” translates “and [just as] often saw painting,” i.e., “saw that it was painted.”

251

See Grondt, fol. 16r (chapter 5, stanza 11): “Of ten sal stracx eenen welstandt ghewinnen.”

252

On Van Mander’s usage of the critical categories nae[r] t’leven and uyt den gheest, and their complementarity, see chapter 2, stanza 15, note 21 infra, chapter 8, stanza 34, note 53 and stanza 37, note 58 infra, chapter 9, stanza 18, note 19 infra, and chapter 10, stanza 6, note 8 and stanza 8, note 14 infra. A picture made uyt den gheest will look no less true to nature than one made nae[r] t’leven, which generally refers to any picture made in the presence of the object portrayed; a nae[r] t’leven image thus implicitly attests the act of viewing whereby it was recorded. Although both types of image will be convincing in mimetic terms, their handelingh (handling) will often vary, especially since foliage, hair / fur, skies, and draped fabric require a “subtle, fine manner, a good stroke,” which must be spirited in appearance and cannot be learned by rote, either by copying life / nature or other masters; see Grondt, fol. 37r (chapter 8, stanzas 36–37):

… dus waer te raden,

Een aerdigh’ en fraeye manier van bladen,

Op eenen goeden slach, hem aen te wennen,

Want hier in leyt de cracht, dit moetmen kennen.

Al soudemen soecken op veel manieren,

Nae t’leven, oft handelingh aenghename,

Doch, ten schijnt niet alst bemuysde lichame

Leersaem Const ….

253

Grondt, fol. 37r–v (chapter 8, stanza 37): “… want bladen, hayr, locht, en laken / Dat is al gheest, en den gheest leert het maken.”

254

Ibid., fol. 37r (chapter 8, stanza 37): “Yet ‘twould not seem, like [drawing] the muscular body, a teachable art” (“Doch, ten schijnt niet alst bemuysde lichame / Leersaem Const”). Also see notes 156 and 251 supra.

255

See Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae, fol. P3 recto. Also see section 4e, “Leven and Gheest,” of the introductory essay supra.

256

See Pierre Ronsard, Continuation des Amours (Paris: Vincent Certenas, 1555), 53–55. Ronsard chose epigrams from the first sequence of thirty on Myron’s heifer, in The Greek Anthology; see The Greek Anthology, 5 vols. (London: 1948), trans. W.R. Paton III, 3:392–403, epigrams 713–742.

257

Grondt, fol. 41v (chapter 9, stanza 42): “… uyt een heel dousijne.”

258

Ibid., fols. 41v–42r (stanza 43):

Gheen Koe-beeldt ben ick, maer Myron my stelde,

Op desen steen vast, uyt spijtich misnoeghen,

Om dat ick afsnoeyde zijn gras ten velde.

259

Ibid., fol. 42r (stanza 43):

Den Koeyer Myrons Koe ben ick wat ghelde,

En gheen versiert Beelde, dus wilt u voeghen,

Te Prick’len mijn lancken, en leydt my ploeghen.

260

Ibid. (stanza 44):

Al heeft my Myron van coper gaen bouwen,

En hier op ghestelt, ick brulded’ en songhe

Als Stier, had hy my slechs ghemaeckt een tonghe.

261

Ibid.:

Een Wesp dees Koe siende was uytghestreken,

K’heb (seyse) noyt harder Koe-huyt ghesteken.

262

Ibid. (stanza 45):

T’wy comdy Calf nae mijn spenen ghecropen,

De Const wou mijnen uyr gheen melck verleenen.

263

Ibid.:

Waerom houdt ghy, Myron, op desen steenen

Voet my ghevaen? Ghy hadt my moghen jocken,

Soo hadt ick door u landt den ploegh ghetrocken.

264

Ibid. (stanza 46):

Behoudens men niet met handen en taste

Op mijnen ruggh’, men mach my nae begheeren,

Van verr’ en by aensien, men sal van vaste

Coper te zijn niet legghen my te laste.

265

Ibid.:

Wil Myron mijn voeten niet haestich weeren

Van desen pijler, ick en mach ontbeeren

De doot niet, maer wilt hy my hier ontboeyen,

Ick loop in de bloemen, als ander Koeyen.

266

See M. Squire, “Making Myron’s Cow Moo? Ecphrastic Epigram and the Poetics of Simulation,” American Journal of Philology 131 (2010): 589–634, esp. 612–616.

267

Ibid., 612.

268

Ibid., 616.

269

Grondt, fol. 42r (chapter 9, stanza 47):

… maer om verafgrijsen,

Monsters en Draken, niet beters dan wijsen

U totter Natuer, om niet te verdwalen,

Waer ghy eenich patroon meught achterhalen,

Merckt hoe elck light, loopt, stapt, oft wandelt,

Maer maeckt dat alles zy aerdich ghehandelt.

According to the Thesaurus Theutonicae linguae, fol. B1 verso, the term aerdt can also signify “naturel de quelque chose,” i.e., that which is natural to a person or thing, and, taken more broadly, natura, i.e., Nature or the nature, course, or order of things. In stanza 47, this other sense of aerdich is implicit though corollary to the primary sense of “subtle” or “ingenious.”

270

Ibid. (stanza 47, marginal gloss): “Datter niet beter en is, als alle dinghen nae t’leven te schilderen, merckende op alle action, en bysonder aerdich te handelen.”

271

Van Mander, in Grondt, fol. 46v (chapter 12, stanza 2), alludes to the seductive properties of schilderconst by associating wel verwen (the art of coloring well) with Pandora, fashioned by Vulcan and enlivened by Jupiter to allure and entrap humankind. On this evocative analogy, see chapter 12, note 4, infra.

272

The longest, at eighty-eight stanzas, is chapter 5, “Van der Ordinanty ende Inventy der Historien” (On the Ordonnance and Invention of Histories). Throughout this final section, I italicize key critical categories in Dutch, using quotation marks for corollary terminology.

  • Collapse
  • Expand

Metrics

All Time Past 365 days Past 30 Days
Abstract Views 0 0 0
Full Text Views 1628 483 34
PDF Views & Downloads 695 192 13